Archive of Our Own ^beta

Chapter Text

Once, when he had been much younger, Itachi had thought that if people could be given a second chance, if they could do it all over again, they would probably be much more careful the second time around and would try to not die meaninglessly. He had reckoned that if he, who was already very cautious, were to be in this position, he'd be so perfectly prudent that he wouldn't ever be killed, and that he'd manage to outwit everyone.

But in that split second of awareness, a flash of understanding that suddenly made everything he knew about the world connect flawlessly, he realised how foolish he had been to believe he wouldn't be as reckless as anyone else. It all made too much sense. The reason why everything had gone so horribly wrong, why the war was raging and why so many shinobi had already lost their lives, it all came down to one single person. It seemed so clear now. Itachi couldn't understand why he hadn't thought of it before.

Obito and the Kannabi Bridge.

Because if Obito hadn't been buried under the rubble, he wouldn't have met Madara. If he hadn't met Madara, he wouldn't have unleashed the Kyuubi to destroy Konoha, and without the Kyuubi unleashed, Minato and Kushina would have survived. If the Yondaime had survived, he could have stopped the Uchiha revolution in time, and the massacre would have never happened.

Every single one of Itachi's darkest nightmares and deepest regrets were all connected to that one, tiny event that had somehow resulted in the 4th Shinobi war. It made too much sense, and the second Itachi realised this, he knew he was going to act hastily and probably make a mistake. This flash of understanding had occurred as he had been on his way to kill Kabuto and had he stayed on track, had he gone to Kabuto to stop his Edo Tensei, the outcome would have probably been very different.

But instead, Itachi had decided that there was another way, a very foolish and reckless way to save the world, and he wasn't about to simply give up because it seemed far-fetched. Even now, surrounded by forbidden scrolls so complicated that even his so-called genius mind couldn't comprehend half of them, Itachi didn't want to give up. He hadn't hesitated before changing tracks and making way back to Konoha to dig through centuries old Uzumaki seals in hope of finding what he needed.

On some of his Anbu missions, he had heard other shinobi talking about it, and at the time, it had seemed idiotic. Time wasn't something to be messed with, only someone desperate or mad would try to reverse the course of time. Itachi was desperate, and probably not so sane any more if he was truly considering doing something so irresponsible. He hadn't even thought out a plan yet. He hadn't really been able to stop and think about what he was doing. All he knew was that he had been dead, now he was alive, and if he didn't do anything, they would lose the war and every single person on the planet would be trapped in a Genjutsu.

After all, if a Genjutsu could force every soul to be stuck forever in an illusion, how hard could it be to force every soul to rejuvenate? Not as hard as one would believe, if the scroll that Itachi had found could be believed. It was a dark and illegal jutsu, and even as Itachi drew the final lines of the seal down onto the earth, he couldn't help but worry whether he was truly doing the right thing. He still probably had enough time to go back to where he knew Kabuto was hiding and just forget about this foolish plan.

But now that the idea had formed, Itachi couldn't help but dream about this new world. A world in which he wasn't forced to choose between his village and his family, a world in which Sasuke didn't have to drown in hatred, a world in which Madara wouldn't be resurrected. All of that could become true, if he played his cards right, if he saved Obito.

The seal was horribly complicated, and Itachi took the time to check it thrice to make sure he hadn't forgotten any line or hadn't made any curves too tight. The upside to this more than dire situation was that, just like Madara's Infinite Tsukuyomi, this Time-Turning Jutsu needed a full moon to be activated, and some of the more cryptic parts had required his Sharingan to decipher.

This was the only chance this world would get.

The moon was high and large, looming over the forest in which Itachi had drawn his seal, its light illuminating every line and curve. The scroll had been enigmatic, and Itachi could only guess how it truly worked. The only thing that seemed clear was that the more Chakra used, the bigger the jump in time. His Chakra reserves weren't big, nowhere near any Uzumaki, and this seal was meant to be activated by more than one person. He was alone.

There was yet another source of worry that Itachi had not allowed himself to delve on for too long. He had been resurrected by Kabuto, but what would happen to him, to his body, if he jumped back to a time when Kabuto was probably not even born? He was better off not thinking about that too much, because if the seal worked, if he could turn back in time, it didn't really matter if he survived or not. He hoped he'd give everyone a second chance, even if he wasn't there to see it.

As he began to pour his Chakra into the Seal, Itachi had a faraway thought for his younger brother, the one he had given everything up for, and he could only hope that his endeavour wasn't as useless as he feared it might be.

If there was a single good thing about being undead, it was that he couldn't die of Chakra depletion or exhaustion. If he used his Chakra wisely, in time he might be able to gather enough Chakra for the Seal to activate. After all, Itachi didn't need to go back centuries, like the seal was originally made for, he just needed a few decades, and as time passed and more Chakra was poured, Itachi hoped saving Obito was truly all it would take to, in turn, save the world.

Chapter Text

When Uchiha Itachi opens his eyes, the very first thing he thinks is 'I am alive'. It's not the most productive thought he could have had, because obviously he is alive, but it doesn't mean that he isn't completely blown away by the realisation and its implications. He hadn't died again using the seal, and with his dire lack of a viable plan in mind, the mere knowledge that he hasn't failed the most important part is enough. He is alive, his body hasn't imploded and the world is still standing. The seal has worked and Itachi hadn't even realised how tense and worried he had been but now that his body starts to relax, he feels lighter than he has in ages.

He has given everyone another chance, and while he knows he has no time to waste on being emotional, simply thinking of his kid brother, being out there, innocent and happy warms his heart and makes the guilt he has been feeling since the massacre a tiny bit lighter. Even his parents are alive and well. Shisui is alive and well, he suddenly realises, and if Itachi had to name a few turning points in his life, his best friend’s death definitely was one of the most important ones.

He can save them all.

But when Itachi takes a breath and looks up, the air gets caught in throat when the sight before him registers. It takes less than a second for his heart to stop from the horror and the fear of realising that, actually, maybe he should have put more thought into all of this before activating the seal.

He is still in the same part of Konoha’s forest, he can feel the echo of his own chakra, strong enough to alert any shinobi around that something big just happened. The seal has worked, he is alive, and back in time. But it didn't work enough.

In front of him, proudly protruding from the mountain surrounding Konoha are the faces of the Hokage, and Itachi is very far from them, but not far enough to miss the number. Four faces. Four Hokage.

The Kannabi-Bridge tragedy happened before Minato became the Fourth.

Obito has already met Madara.

Itachi has always been a calm and cautious man, and the one time he forgoes his own precepts he ends up regretting bitterly his reckless actions.

In the haze of quickly rising hurry and panic, Itachi activates his Sharigan, and searches his surroundings. The seal on the ground has disappeared, and the scroll is nowhere to be seen. With enough luck, he could probably find the scroll again, and with it jump further back in time but he can feel three chakra signatures approaching, well hidden and controlled, but not enough for him not to notice.

Probably Anbu, he reckons, with how close to Konoha's main gate he is, and he knows without a doubt that he has to run because even if he has no idea of where he should be going, he clearly sees how Anbu stumbling upon an unknown Uchiha outside of Konoha would mean trouble for everyone involved.

So, Itachi starts running and as he rushes through the tall trees, he is half preoccupied with keeping his Chakra tightly under control to not be detected, and half worrying about what he should do next. Because if he can't save Obito, then the reason why he came back disappears and Itachi simply hates when things don't go the way he expects them to.

It thankfully doesn't take him long to lose the three Anbu on his tail, they are good, and there is probably a Sensor among them, but Itachi is better at hiding than they are at searching, and all it takes him is an hour of careful racing through the woods for them to give up and head back to Konoha.

He lurks in the shadows of a few sunken rocks for a few minutes, and when he is sure that the Anbu are far enough, he allows his breathing to come back to normal and for some chakra so seep through the cracks. His Sharigan activates, more out of habit than practicality at this point, and he studies his surroundings once more.

He has moved quite a long distance from where he had ended up after using the seal, but he is closer to the archives station than before and he almost decides to just go in there, consequences be damned, and steal the seal to redo it all over again a third time. But the Archives's building is a lot closer than what he'd like to the Hokage's office, and Itachi knows his chances of even making it past the barriers unnoticed are non-existent.

And then, that thought brings on a question he should have asked himself the second he saw the number of stone faces.

Who is the Hokage?

Itachi knows that the chances of it being Minato are small with his reign being barely over a year, but he'd like to believe he's had enough bad luck throughout his life for it to finally even out the second time around. If Minato is the Hokage, it'll be much easier to convince him that Itachi means no harm, and that he's in fact trying to save the world.

Hiruzen Sarutobi on the other hand, as much as the old man wouldn’t want to admit it, distrusts the Uchiha and has lived a life filled with betrayals. His patience is wearing thin with Danzo's schemes, and Itachi doesn't think he'll take kindly to a stranger with no means of proving his identity whatsoever roaming around Konoha.

But more than that, Itachi has some personal history with the Third Hokage and would like it if he didn’t have to interact with him again. He isn't one to hold grudges, and while he wouldn't say that he regrets the choices he made, he still wishes Sarutobi hadn't coerced him into thinking that annihilating an entire clan was better than risking a civil war.

At any rate, it’s all giving Itachi a terrible headache. He distantly wonders if he’s ever going to forgive himself for making that choice, but as soon as the thought manifests, he pushes it down and forces his brain to focus on the task at hand. He needs to think, to stop and plan out the course of action he'll follow.

He tiredly runs a hand over his face, stopping briefly over his eyes to feel the Chakra pulsing through, but then he realises something is wrong, or maybe awfully right. His skin feels warm to the touch, and his fingers don't catch on the paper-like cuts of the Edo-Tensei.

He glances down at his robes and when he pulls the sleeves back to reveal his arms, a whooshing breath makes it past his lips. He looks pale in the moonlight but he's not sickly white and because it all seems too good to be true, he takes a kunai and gently presses the sharp side above his elbow, just to make sure. A dull pain registers, barely there with how little pressure he puts on the weapon, and a thin red line appears.

He bleeds, and he would have never guessed this thought would make his heart swell with happiness. He is alive in all the ways that matter, and that is more luck than he's allowed himself to believe he'd have.

He knows, rationally, that his reincarnated body would have given him an advantage over any enemy, because being unkillable would have made him quite literally unbeatable, and while Itachi has never seen himself as overly sentimental he thinks there's beauty in being vulnerable. It will surely make him think twice before jumping again head first into situations he has no control over.

Itachi allows himself a deep breath. He knows he shouldn't be wasting too long hanging around Konoha, but he feels overwhelmed in a way he hadn't in a while. The air is filled with smells – fresh air made crisp by the chilly night – and the reigning silence is sparsely broken by the distant singing of birds. From where he stands, he can make out a few stacks of smokes rising from chimneys, mixing high up with dark rainless clouds and all of this is just so utterly Konoha-like that for the first time in what seems like forever, Itachi is reminded of what it feels like to be home.

By the time the sun starts rising Itachi has an idea. It's foolish, and the chances of everything going well are so slim that were he in any other situation, he'd throw away his entire plan and turn heels. But he is an unknown number of years in the past with a world to save so he doesn't have much of a choice. He needs to get inside Konoha to find out who the Hokage is.

He needs that information to situate himself in the right era and to come up with a viable course of action, but he isn't really sure yet how he is going to do that without getting caught. He looks like a shinobi, there's no way around that. His eyes are sharp and his movements tightly clipped in a way that screams chakra control and years of heavy training. The Chuunin at the gate might not figure him out if he acts well enough, but the second he stumbles upon a Jonin, or even an Anbu, Itachi knows he'll have to run.

Itachi takes a deep breath to try to ground himself before he finally gathers enough courage to head for the gate. He is immensely thankful that the seal had thrown him back in time not looking like a corpse, it makes it easier to disguise himself as a civilian. His eyes are back to obsidian black, and the hold he has on his Chakra is unwavering, tight as steel. No one will be able to tell he even has Chakra, let alone an amount large enough to be a threat.

The red cape he had been reincarnated with does a good job of hiding his weapon pouch, as well as his basic shinobi uniform, but it doesn't go high enough to hide his chain.

Itachi ponders for a few seconds. He’s had this chain for years, and while it doesn’t have a meaningful story, it’s still with some hesitation that he takes it off. It’s a necklace a shinobi would wear, so he pockets it and tells himself he’ll put it back on at some point.

Itachi knows he won’t. He doesn’t want to think about this part yet, but he knows deep down, that in this world, he won’t be allowed to be Itachi Uchiha any more.

He will work in the shadows, the way he always has and give up as far as his entire identity if it means saving the world.

It’s with a strengthened resolve that Itachi heads towards the main gate, his civilian disguise as good as it can get considering the situation. He knows he looks like a Uchiha, even with his Sharingan deactivated, and he really doesn't want to think too much about how old this world’s version of himself is. If Itachi didn't go back far enough, chances are that the age difference won't be enough to hide the resemblance, especially if he takes a wrong turn and runs head first into someone who knows him well.

Suddenly, Itachi feels self conscious about his appearance, and he tears his hair tie away, leaving his hair fluttering in the wind. A different hairdo might not do much, but he really hopes it will be enough. He has a thought to cut his hair at some point, or even dye it, no matter how displeased he feels with the prospect.

Itachi is getting close to the gate, and the shorter the distance, the more restless he feels. He has to be inconspicuous, and that's something he is used to from his Anbu years, so making himself as bland and unthreatening as possible proves to be quite easy, and if not for the light quickening of his steps when he approaches the guard-post, Itachi does a great job of remaining entirely impassive, even if he feels all but calm.

It's early, but Konoha has always been a city filled with life even at dawn. There are a handfuls of merchants coming in and out, even some children running around and Itachi tries to blend in with them. He keeps his gaze steady and doesn't allow himself to glance sideways at the two Chuunin guards no matter how bad he wants to check if it's Izumo and Kotetsu. He tries to walk slowly, and look as unbothered as possible, keeping his demeanour easy and his gait light, and he is almost disappointed when nothing happens once he sets his first foot in Konoha..

Peace is an awfully easy time for people to slip inside the town, and Itachi feels frustrated, almost angry, that Konoha would be so defenceless when the world is literally ending.

When it doesn't seem like anything is about to explode or go horribly wrong, Itachi lets his muscles to relax fractionally and he lets a tiny breath make it past his lips.

He got inside of Konoha way too easily, and that was the hardest part of his plan. Next is finding someone who will inform him of who the Hokage is.

Asking a ninja is definitely out of the question, but civilians might also be wary of a stranger asking about the Hokage and while Itachi had never felt exactly at ease with children, they are loose-tongued and usually don’t bother remembering one more faceless stranger in the vast village of Konoha. And so, he heads for the playground.

It is much smaller than Itachi remembers, and he feels horribly self-conscious to be there so early in the morning when there are so little people around. He is a grown-man of twenty-one years old, childless, wearing oddly concealing clothing and standing in the middle of a place made for children. It isn’t the Anbu he should be concerned with, but the Konoha Police Force.

Thankfully, there are no adults around the sandbox, and Itachi doesn't hesitate before walking towards it, head held high as he steps inside, his footsteps loud on the crunching sand. A few children look up, before going back to their mindless games without another thought, and Itachi is eternally grateful that children have no sense of danger.

There is one girl, who is alone in a corner with a bucket filled with sand and Itachi stops in front of her. She looks up, brown hair shining in the sun and stares at him, mouth open.

"Hi," Itachi tries, and were he a lesser man he'd cringe at how awfully awkward he sounds.

"Hi!" The girl answers cheerfully, a smile blooming on her face, "you wanna build a castle with me?"

Itachi almost recoils when her hand shoots out to grab his coat, and it takes every ounce of willpower he has to crush down the shinobi-honed instincts he has of evading the foreign touch.

"No, I just have a question," Itachi says slowly, and he prays that the girl will just drop it but shall never be so lucky.

"No one ever wants to play with me," she whines, and her voice is high, incredibly high, there are tears in her eyes and Itachi is starting to panic. He can feel the stares of the other children on his back, they are mocking, but most of all Itachi fears that a crying child will be enough for any adult in the vicinity to decide to intervene.

"I'll play with you if you tell me who the Hokage is," Itachi offers, and he hates how simple-minded his offer sounds, but he figures that simple stuff makes most sense to children and he truly hopes it'll be enough to calm her down.

It would seem that it wasn't the right thing to say, as she suddenly wails, and she's loud. She grabs his coat tighter, and Itachi is sure he sees snot being smeared on it but he can't really pay attention to that when there are two Chakra signatures rushing to his location.

They are rather weak, probably belonging to some Genin, or even Academy Students, but still approaching at an alarming rate.

Before he can even decide on how to pry the girl off, there are two teens, only a few years older than the crying child, sanding in front of him. They look self-righteous, chests puffed out and large smirks stretching over their lips. He knows they are under estimating him, and at least it proves that his cover as a harmless civilian is working, but they are also wearing a Hitai-ite, and it means Itachi is in trouble if he stays here much longer.

"You like to make children cry?" One of them challenges, and Itachi thinks it's nice of them to want to help some unknown civilian child, but right now he is too preoccupied with how in the world he's going to get out of here without hurting anyone to stop and admire their magnanimous attitude.

Itachi figures he doesn't really have much of a choice, and he is confident in his ability to run, if anything. It takes him less than a second to decide what he is going to do, and then another second to set his plan into action.

He glances down at the girl, catches her eyes filled with tears and his Sharingan activates. Her eyes widen in surprise before they close and she falls down, sand sticking to her wet face as she lies in the sandbox fast asleep. Itachi hears the two teenagers gasp, he can feel the way their chakra gather as they get ready to attack, but he is much faster, and in a blink, one of them is also down, sleeping through a Genjutsu, while the other is left to stare open mouthed at Itachi who is standing right in front of him after a small Shunshin.

"Who is the Hokage?" Itachi asks as his Sharingan spins leisurely, his hold over his chakra so controlled that not even a drop is wasted on useless moves. The young shinobi's eyes waver and for a second, Itachi fears he'll pass out before he gets an answer, but the Genjutsu works, and the kid answers.

He breathes out a name that makes Itachi's heart drop and it's only out of habit that he uses a wide-range Genjutsu on all the children around, the two young shinobi included, so that no one will remember what happened on this playground. Erasing a dozen children’s memory might not be very wise, but Itachi’s mind is set on one single thought only, rendering him blind to the consequences of his actions.

He curses, and he doesn’t even realise he is biting down on his lip hard enough tp draw blood. His fists are tightly shut, and he knows that some Chakra is seeping through, he also knows that he needs to get the hell out of here this instant, because using so much of his Chakra made it spread, but just for a second, he stands in Konoha and breathes in its familiar smell.

He'd laugh at how disastrous this is all turning out to be, but he can't really manage that much. Itachi looks up and glares at the stone-faces. It's the last time he gets to see them in a while, because he's not going to come back any time soon.

He won't take a step inside Konoha unless Hiruzen Sarutobi isn't Hokage.

Getting out of Konoha proves to be just as easy as getting in, but it is more because Itachi has decided he doesn’t care any more if he gets spotted. He is faster, stronger, and cleverer than any of the men that could try to hunt him down, and it isn’t some mindless pride that makes him think so, but experience and trust in his own abilities.

He jumps right over the High Walls of Konoha, breaching the barrier and alerting every Anbu in the vicinity. None of them is able to chase him far, as expected, or rather they give up once he crosses the border into the Land of River.

It takes him a few days to get there and even if he doesn’t have much time to think while he tries to lose the Anbu on his tail, he is absolutely certain that in another country no one will come looking for him when all they probably have is a vague physical description and nothing to hold over his head, besides breaking a handful of barriers.

One thought remains, however, once he has reached the Land of River and been freed from his pursuers. He needs a new plan.

Itachi sighs before he takes another sip of water. He has decided to stay in the country for a few days and give himself some time to choose what he should do next, but it has quickly become clear that without money, he wouldn't lead a stellar life.

Thankfully for him, the Land of River is poor, so extremely poor that when Itachi had offered to hunt down food in exchange of a room to stay in the first inn he had seen, the owner had immediately accepted. His traps weren't anything grand, far from his speciality, but they did a satisfactory job when it came to catching a few boars and some rabbits.

Itachi bites back yet another sigh, and gets up from the small table that serves as the only furniture beside the bed in his room. There’s not even a chair, but he has had to accommodate with far worse during his deserter years and he is thankful he even has a roof over his head and food in his stomach. With his basic needs taken care of, he is free to let his mind wander.

For a second, he had considered going back to Konoha, use his strongest Genjutsu on the Hokage and force him to cooperate, but that is clearly a recipe for disaster, especially considering the current relationship between the Uchiha and the Council.

Over the past few days, Itachi has managed to get a few information here and there from the owner of the inn, a gentle old lady who probably thought of him as a harmless traveller. She likes to talk a lot, and Itachi didn’t even have enough time to ask one single question that he had managed to determine what year he had landed in.

‘...How sad what happened in Konoha, it's been over three years and yet I can't seem to get over it. So sad, oh so sad how the Fourth died fighting this terrible creature... Would you like another cup of tea? Oh, where was I...? Ah yes, so sad. You heard about the fights in the west? Such a violent world…’

She had kept going, but Itachi had stopped listening.

If the Kyuubi attack had happened three years ago, it meant that the Uchiha massacre would happen in another three years, give or take. Itachi knows that if he doesn't do anything about it, history will just repeat itself, but he also doesn't want to accelerate things by placing the Hokage under a Sharingan-induced Genjutsu. That wouldn't be good for the Uchiha’s reputation.

At least now, with this piece of information, Itachi has a new goal, even if he hasn’t yet figured out how he's going to go about finalizing it.

Tobi's Akatsuki is already out there, and they are looking for the Bijuus. Itachi can't know for sure who the members are, seeing as he hadn’t joined them yet at this time, but he knows he has to stop them. If Itachi can annihilate Akatsuki, Madara won't be brought back, and without Madara, or the Ten-Tails, Obito can't launch the Infinite Tsukuyomi.

Itachi does realise that with this new plan he'll probably have to kill Obito instead of saving him, and while he hates it because in the end Obito is just another victim, he also knows that the guilt of shedding innocent blood is nothing next to the end of the world.

How ironic really, that after all he’s done, he still convinces himself, the way Sarutobi had done, that it’s all for the greater good.

Itachi gulps down the rest of his glass and puts it down on the battered wooden table, before gathering his belongings and leaving his room. Another upside of shopping in a poor country is that most clerks are so desperate to get food on the table that, just like the owner of the inn, they hadn't hesitated before swapping clothes for meat.

It seems almost comical that his long years of training are now used on animals so that he can get clothes on his back and a bed to sleep in.

Itachi hitches his bag up on his shoulder and makes sure his pouch is packed with weapons. He has decided that he'll spend another day in the small town and look for ways to get some money, before leaving for a bigger town where the gossip will be more likely to give him the information he needs, as well as a sword.

Itachi's Kenjutsu isn't especially strong, but he knows, realistically, that if he wants to remain as unnoticed as possible, he'll have to cross out using his Sharingan, and that means relying heavily on Taijutsu, which he isn't as used to as he'd like to admit.

Itachi walks down the stairs of the inn and heads for the counter where the old lady is, smiling his way when their eyes meet.

"You're leaving, young man?" She asks as she reaches for the keys that Itachi just dropped on the counter.

"Yes," he answers curtly, because even if he knows that she is harmless, she speaks so much that even revealing where he is headed could be dangerous.

"Mmh, if I were someone looking for information, I know I'd pay attention to what these three sirs over there are saying. Seems important," she whispers, her eyes twinkling happily.

Itachi lets his lips turn up fractionally in the ghost of a smile, and he looks to where the old woman points discreetly with her bony hand. There are three shinobi sat at a round table, each of them a pot filled with beer in hand. They wear Suna's gear, and Itachi can make out the shape of an hourglass on their headbands. They are talking quietly among themselves, looking far to engrossed in whatever matter it is they are discussing to pay attention to Itachi.

He thanks the old woman, and really, who would have thought that mentioning once to this stranger that he was looking for whatever information seemed important would result in him gaining exactly what he was looking for.

Itachi moves away from the counter and hides in the shadows of a corner, he knows he is far enough that activating his Sharingan won't disrupt his chakra waves so badly that the shinobi will notice, and the second he does, his eyes go straight to the man facing him. He reads on his lips what he is saying, and Itachi swears he can hear the blood rushing to his ears when he realises what it is exactly they are talking about.

"It's worrying that someone managed to get their hands on him. It means Gaara isn't safe either," the one in front of Itachi states. His eyes shoot right to the shinobi sitting to the left, and his face is turned sideways, but Itachi can still make out what he is saying.

"Who knows, maybe Iwa didn't want to admit that he simply ran away," and Itachi doesn't really need any more information to connect the dots, but the shinobi keeps on talking and there's no room left for confusion.

"Who in their right mind would target a Jinchuuriki?"

Akatsuki, Itachi thinks, and he doesn't stay a second more. He knows Akatsuki had gotten their hands on two Bijuu before Itachi joined, the Gobi and the Nanabi, and if what the Suna shinobi said was to be believed, Iwa's Jinchuuriki had just disappeared. Well, the Land of River isn't all that far away from the Land of Earth. Itachi can be there within a month if he takes his time to stop in a few villages and hear the gossip.

Chapter Text

In the end, it doesn't even take two weeks for Itachi to reach the Land of Earth, and he did stop a few times. He got his hands on a Bingo Book as soon as he reached a bigger city, and he went after a few thieves and some robbers, just enough to have money, but not so much as to raise suspicions.

And now that he is in the capital of a flourishing country, Itachi hopes he'll manage to find a weapon shop where he'll be able to buy a satisfactory sword. But that's not his main goal here. While travelling to the capital, Itachi had decided that he'd give himself a week in Iwa to find information about the missing Jinchuuriki, and that if he came up empty, he wouldn't waste another day here and head for the Hidden Village of Taki.

It doesn’t matter if he has to spend months there, or even years, he believes that after the Gobi, Akatsuki will come for the Nanabi, and when they do, Itachi will be waiting for them. It definitely isn’t what he had had in mind when using the seal, but Itachi knows he will have to adapt if he wants to save the world. With enough preparations, he can stop the Akatsuki before they take any other Bijuu, but he knows, realistically, that he has a ton of things to do, very little time, and he is all alone.

Ever since he used that seal over a month ago, he has kept thinking about whether he should try to seek out help from people he had trusted in the past, but they are all too young in this timeline, and Itachi isn’t entirely sure how he is supposed to explain that he is from the future without sounding completely insane.

To him, a Uchiha with an awaken Mangekyo Sharingan, time travel doesn’t seem that far-fetched. If a Doujutsu like Obito's is able to change the shape of space and dimensions, it doesn’t come across as mad to believe that Chakra could reverse time with the appropriate jutsu. But Itachi also knows that there wouldn't be many people who’d just nod and accept that he is truly from a different time.

That also raised the question of what would happen if he did tell people. Would the world collapse from impossibility of Itachi being twice in the same space-time?

Time and Space were forces out of his control, and even his understanding. He had messed around with something he didn't comprehend enough, and he isn’t going to take more risks than necessary. All that matters now is saving his brother, and the people he cares about.

The Hidden Village of Iwa is very different from Konoha. The atmosphere isn't anywhere near as light and lively. Itachi can feel the wary stares of civilians and shinobi alike, but he pays them no mind. After visiting a few villages, he has mastered his civilian cover, and if it comes to the worst, Itachi is confident, after so many years of running away, that he can somehow make it out of here alive. Still, it doesn't mean he feels at ease.

There's close to no vegetation in Iwa, and even water is hard to come by. Itachi is impressed they manage to flourish when their village is so shut off from the rest of the world and its natural gifts.

Itachi takes yet another turn without any idea of where he is going. He has been roaming around the town for a few hours now, but just in case some Iwa shinobi are watching him, he wants to look like a harmless traveller exploring the neighbourhood.

Walking allows him to think, and he needs to plan out his course of action very carefully. Taki isn't far from the Hidden Village, and Itachi knows he can be there in less than a week if he hurries. That gives him some time to look for information that he knows will be hard to find in Iwa.

Chances are that civilians don't know one of their Jinchuuriki is missing. Most probably aren't even aware that they have a Jinchuuriki, let alone two. Which means that if he wants to get even the smallest information on their Bijuu’s whereabouts, Itachi has to either gain someone's trust, or force a shinobi to talk with a Genjutsu.

Both options require that he first finds someone with a rank high enough to know about such confidential matters.

Itachi can feel another headache coming.

At any rate, he needs to start looking in places frequented by shinobi, and because he really wants a sword, Itachi makes another turn into the main street where he knows he passed a few weapon shops. He hangs outside what seems to be the biggest around town, feigning to take an interest in the many kunai displayed next to the door, when really, he is waiting for the perfect candidate to show up.

Itachi had hoped he would find quite a few ninjas around weapon shops, but so far there hasn't even been one single customer, and he is starting to grow bored. The number of merchants strolling through the town can be counted on one hand, that just shows how trading and sales in Iwa have plummeted.

Itachi gives it another few minutes, but when no shinobi shows up, he decides he'll just buy his sword and go look in taverns instead.

As soon as he enters the shop, the clerk welcomes him and runs to his side. His smile is too wide and the way he fumbles over his words sounds more than desperate to Itachi's ears.

"W-welcome, my good sir! Do you, uhm, well, what are you looking for? Can I help you with anything?" He asks, and Itachi then notices how young he looks. Iwa is in an even a worse place than he’d thought after suffering such a loss in the War if they needed to employ teens.

"Where are your swords?" Itachi asks as he takes in the sheer size of their kunai and shuriken shelves.

"Right over here sir," the young clerk says as he moves quickly towards the other end of the boutique, before immediately speaking up again.

"We have a large choice of katana, as well as larger weapons..." and Itachi vaguely hears the kid going on and on about how skilled their smith is, but he really doesn't pay him any mind. He knows how to spot a good blade and to his dismay, they don’t seem to come in large numbers in Iwa.

Still, Itachi knows he is proficient enough with a sword. He has had to learn how to fight with a standard tanto during his Anbu years, and no matter the quality of the blade as long as it's sturdy and doesn't break easily, Itachi will take it.

"So, what type of sword are you looking for, exactly?" The clerk asks again nervously, wringing his hands. His unease visibly turns up a notch when Itachi doesn't even bother answering.

In front of him is a large array of katana and ninjato, but it's not what he is looking for and he doesn't hesitate before turning away to move closer to where a handful of tanto are scattered in a wooden box. The shinobi of Iwa don't rely on weapons, they are heavily trained in Ninjutsu and Taijutsu, and Itachi is honestly surprised they even have so many varieties of swords.

He studies the short blades in front of him, and after a while he picks up what looks to be the most durable of their tanto and turns it over, testing its weight.

"Who even fights using these toothpicks? It's lame," a high-pitched voice comments, quickly followed by an offended gasp from the clerk.

Itachi looks up, one eyebrow cocked up in amused surprise at the unexpected words. But his amusement disappears as fast as it came when his eyes land on the kid in front of him. He is young, a lot younger than Itachi ever remembers him being, but there's no mistaking his long blond hair and the bright blue eyes that stare up at him.

'Deidara', Itachi almost breathes out, but he holds the name back, knowing how disturbed the child would be. He doesn't know him, not in this timeline, not yet, so Itachi remains silent.

"You shouldn't waste time on these needles, look for something better. Bigger. Cooler," the blonde kid keeps on saying, but Itachi barely hears what he says over the sound of his own musings. Of course, Deidara is in Iwa. He hasn't defected yet, he hasn't joined Akatsuki yet, and he is still a shinobi of the Hidden Stone.

That's another life saved from the grasp of Akatsuki, he suddenly realises. In his own time, Itachi had been the one to force Deidara into joining the Akatsuki, on Nagato's orders, and he had always felt guilty for it. Deidara's hatred for him hadn't made it any easier to stop blaming himself. He had been too young when he had joined, and still too young when he had died. His blood was on Itachi's hands.

"Kid, don't say that, I am sure this man can decide what he wants to buy," the clerk chimes in, effectively bringing Itachi back to the situation at hand.

If Itachi wasn't so preoccupied with the young shinobi in front of him, he would had found it comical how distressed the clerk is at the prospect of losing what is probably going to be his only customer for the day.

"Mmh, just helping a fellow shinobi out," Deidara says, and suddenly Itachi is all too aware of the fact that he is a foreigner trying to buy a sword on his first day in town.

"I am not a shinobi," Itachi retorts, and he knows it's a useless attempt but he is trying to buy himself some time.

Deidara seems entirely unimpressed with his statement, and he cocks a brow as he smirks. ‘Not a shinobi, eh?' his eyes seem to say as he looks at Itachi from head to toe, and even if Itachi has since then bought new plain black clothes with a large grey cloak that hides away most of his body, Deidara’s eyes twinkle with a knowing glint all the same.

Itachi is forcefully reminded of the reason why Deidara had been recruited at barely fifteen years old. He is a tactical genius and a highly intelligent individual when he isn't obsessing over art. That means trouble for Itachi, because someone smart enough is bound to figure at least some parts of him out, and he doesn’t want to risk that happening.

Itachi looks away from the kid, choosing to ignore his presence and comments, trying to appear a lot calmer than he currently feels. He takes the tantō with him to the counter before dropping the number of ryo written on the price tag on the wood of the cash register. It's awfully expensive, considering that it's nothing spectacular, but he doesn't have time to waste negotiating when he needs to get away from Deidara.

The kid is probably not even ten yet, but by that age Itachi had already killed countless Jonin and been through a War, he knows he shouldn't underestimate a shinobi based on their age, especially one as clever as Deidara.

Itachi is out of the shop before the clerk can even process that he just sold a weapon, and he is far from ear-shot when he is profusely thanked for his purchase. He doesn't waste time worrying about any lingering Iwa-nin and rushes away. He won't use a Shunshin, because it's a technique too advanced to make him seem like he is 'just your average shinobi passing by', but he is fast, faster than a child and he is out of Iwa in a matter of minutes.

The day hasn't exactly turned out the way Itachi had expected, but at least now he has a sword, even if he will have to be much more careful over the course of the week if he wants to gather information without running into Deidara again.

Realistically, Itachi knows Deidara isn't a threat, but he hasn't had the time yet to figure out how he is going to act around people who used to know him. He has to be careful, because even if Deidara hasn't met his younger self, chances are that they could, and the kid is too clever not to see the resemblance if he hangs around Itachi too much.

Just as he is about to reach for some food in his bag, Itachi feels a Chakra signature approaching, and he spent too long around his fellow Akatsuki 'friends' not to immediately recognize it as Deidara's, even if it's much less refined than what he has been used to.

"You run pretty fast for someone who isn't a shinobi," Deidara says the second he reaches Itachi, and he does sound winded but Itachi is surprised he even managed to catch up to him.

"So what's some not-shinobi stranger doing in Iwa, buying weapons?" The kid asks as he crosses his arms over his chest, head held high.

"It's not any of your business," Itachi answers easily.

They are far from the gate, far enough that Itachi can use a Genjutsu if he can't find a way out of this without using his Saringann and having that option always calms him down.

"Well, I've just been promoted to an Elite Squad you see," and Itachi vaguely remembers that, yes, indeed, Deidara had been quite an important shinobi in Iwa, but before he can try to recall what he knows of the kid's past, he adds, "It is my duty to protect my village from enemies."

Itachi stares him down, and for the first time, he really looks at Deidara. His Iwa headband looks brand new but Itachi knows it's because Deidara must be taking care of it thoroughly, and there's a fire in his eyes that he doesn't remember ever seeing there. He is young, his dreams haven't been shattered yet, and it shows in the lightness of his steps and the clear determination of his gaze. This Deidara is nothing but a child who loves his village dearly.

This Deidara hasn't defected, his hands don't sport hideous mouths from a Forbidden Jutsu that he hasn't even stolen yet, and Itachi thinks it might be better if he never does.

"I am not your enemy," Itachi states with a firm voice, and it's the truth. He is no one's enemy this time around, he wants to save the world, and that includes everyone who lives in it.

"So why'd'you run away so fast?" The kid shoots back. It's a clever question, and Itachi knows how it’ll look if he takes even a second too long to answer so he doesn’t hesitate and says the first thing that comes to his mind.

"I was in a hurry to test out the sword."

Deidara looks completely and utterly nonplussed by his answer.

"That so, mmh," the kid says doubtfully and Itachi nods, focused on keeping his demeanour relaxed.

He hasn't had the time yet to ponder on whether or not using his Sharingan would make him go blind again – because his sight had been restored when he had been resurrected – but he'd rather not find out just yet, and that means that over-using his Sharingan is high up on the list of things he needs to avoid. Up there with meeting too many people he used to know, it would seem, because he had been wildly under-prepared for how disconcerted he would be.

"How about I help you test it out then?" Deidara offers, and he looks way too confident for a child wanting to spar with a stranger. Itachi knows he made it so he would look unthreatening but really, he should tell Deidara to stop being such a cocky idiot.

"You're extremely self-confident," he says instead, because he knows how brash Deidara gets when he is riled up and the sound of explosion isn't exactly what Itachi would call discreet.

"You're saying that because I'm a kid, right?" He challenges, but Itachi is way above belittling a child. He remembers that feeling of frustration from when he had joined the Anbu, and if it hadn't been for Hatake Kakashi being another genius child vouching for him, he probably wouldn't have received as much respect as he did during his first weeks.

"No, I'm sure you're plenty strong, you simply don't know me," Itachi replies calmly. He hopes it's enough to make Deidara drop the idea.

It isn't.

"Nothing beats a good fight to get to know someone," the young shinobi says, and Itachi can't even come up with an answer quickly enough, because Deidara is running towards him, a kunai clasped in his right hand.

Itachi heaves out a sigh and draws his newly acquired sword, shifting the sharp side so that it faces to the other way. He isn't about to cut a child because he thinks he can take on someone too strong for him.

Deidara goes for the blade, which greatly surprises Itachi because he had expected such a brash kid would try to land a sneak attack. Their weapons connect, and Itachi hates how familiar the clanging sound is. He despises everything about fighting, from the blood spurting to the guilt that crushes him after he defeats his opponent, but he takes one glance at Deidara's face and it's all washed away by the kid's wide grin.

This insane child is having fun, he realises.

This isn't a fight, it's more of a friendly spar and Itachi suddenly feels, oddly enough, serene. His grip on the hilt tightens but he isn't yet counter attacking, too focused on avoiding Deidara's charges. The kid isn't physically strong so it's easy to block his blow with the blade until Itachi effortlessly pushes him away, before quickly ducking down and kicking Deidara's left shin.

The kid falls down on his rear, his kunai flying away from his hand, and he blinks up at Itachi with his mouth hung open.

"So much for not being a shinobi," he says as he rubs his leg where Itachi's foot had hit. That would probably bruise, Itachi feels almost apologetic.

"I know how to fight is all," he tries, but he knows Deidara doesn't buy it. Itachi sheaths his sword before offering a hand to the kid who doesn't hesitate before taking it, and he helps Deidara up. There's a curious glint to Deidara's eyes as he looks over to Itachi, and as he turns away to go fetch his kunai, he sees that the kid is smiling, even wider than before.

"I'm already late for the team meeting, but I really want to spar with you again, how about tomorrow, same time same place?" Deidara offers as he packs his kunai away in his weapon pouch.

Itachi stares. He keeps his face composed, but his thoughts are rushing. He considers the offer, and thinks for a few seconds more.

Deidara is smart, but he is still a child, and Itachi is confident in his ability to manipulate people. Even without his Sharingan, he knows he can gain his trust, if he is careful enough.

"Why?" Itachi asks at last. He is genuinely curious to know Deidara's reasons, he doesn't think that the child has suddenly taken a liking to him.

"Because you're shady," Deidara states with a firm nod, "and crazy strong, I'll make you train me so that I'm strong enough to beat you if you're a bad guy."

As amused as Itachi is by the boy’s words, he doesn’t let it show on his face.

"Fine, tomorrow, here, at 10," he finally agrees, and before he can catch the look of satisfaction on Deidara's face, he uses a Shunshin to teleport away.

It's only hours later, after long minutes spent on recalling what he used to know about Deidara, that Itachi suddenly remembers what Elite Squad Deidara had been in. The Explosion Corps, a Unit directly under the orders of the Tsuchikage. Now that he thought about it, Deidara had mentioned a handful of times how he had been Oonoki's best student.

What are the odds of Deidara knowing anything, anything at all, about the Jinchuuriki's disappearance?

The next day, Itachi is in the same place at 10. He has decided that gaining a child's trust within a week would be easy enough, and he doesn't really have any other lead.

Itachi also had had the chance of being very close to Uchiha Shisui, and his Kotoamatsukami. He intimately knows how it worked, and even if he had never really tried his hand a mind controlling Jutsu, he is confident in his ability to reproduce an equivalent of Shisui's Genjutsu.

If he couldn't make Deidara trust him within a week, he'd place him under a Genjutsu that would convince the kid he could trust Itachi, and it would all turn out how he has planned in the end. He hopes.

"You're there."

Itachi looks up, and Deidara is standing a few meters away. He looks surprised, eyes wide and mouth open as he stares.

"Yes," Itachi says, as outwardly calm and unperturbed as ever.

Deidara grins, it makes him look just as young as he is and it's such an odd sight for Itachi who had only ever known a bitter and angry teenager that he feels surprised yet again by his carefree and honest nature. Maybe it would be easier than he had thought to make the kid spill his secrets.

"Let's spar then," Deidara says, and Itachi nods.

He puts his bag down, and he is instantly annoyed when he realises he doesn't have a spare hair tie. He hasn't had the time to cut his hair, or rather doesn’t yet want to part with another part of his identity, but they just get everywhere. He makes a mental note to do something about it before they can grow any longer.

This time around, Itachi doesn't draw his blade, and Deidara doesn't reach for is weapon pouch. The kid runs in his direction, and goes for a punch to his guts. He has a nice form, Itachi muses, and his gait is well balanced for a child this young, but Itachi is much faster and he won't let Deidara land a single hit.

It's easy enough to evade every attempts the kid makes at attacking, and Itachi notices how he grows restless and annoyed when he realises just how big the difference in strength between them is. He is full of openings. Really, it's hard for Itachi not to just kick him in the face and he reminds himself he has to hold back.

"Stop dancing around and fucking fight me," Deidara grits between clenched teeth as he goes for yet another punch, this time aimed right at Itachi's face. The spat out curse and his reckless attack bring a small smile to Itachi's lips.

He really doesn't like children, but he loves Sasuke with all his heart and to some extent, Deidara's fiery eyes remind him of his younger brother's. Itachi complies, and right after he ducks Deidara's fist, he elbows him right in the stomach. The kid falls down on his side, arms creeping around his middle as he coughs up, face red in anger and embarrassment at being so easily defeated.

Itachi didn't think he'd have this much fun, and they part with a promise to meet again tomorrow.

When Itachi arrives the next day, Deidara is already waiting for him. The kid doesn't waste any time on greetings, quickly rushes through Mudras and shoots rock bullets in Itachi's direction. It would seem that after the crushing defeat Deidara had suffered in Taijutsu, he was going for Ninjutsu this time around.

Itachi easily avoids the attack, and he doesn't hesitate before riposting with water bullets. Using Fire Release was too big of a risk. Black hair, Konoha's Taijutsu and Kenjutsu, plus a Fire Affinity would make it too easy to identify him as an Uchiha.

For the time being, Itachi would only use Water Release and hope people would assume he had a Water affinity. It puts him at a disadvantage against Deidara's dual affinity for Earth and Lightning, but his chakra reserves, although small, are bigger than a child's and he knows beating Deidara only using water technique won't be all that hard.

In the end, they don't even spar for an hour before Deidara is completely exhausted. The kid is laying on his back, breathing hard and drenched in sweat from the exertion. Itachi sits down next to him and hands him his water bottle, and the kid eagerly sits up before gulping down a few sips.

"How are you so strong?" Deidara asks as he passes the bottle back and Itachi simply shrugs, not sure how to tell him exactly how he had become one of the deadliest soldiers in the Fire Country. There’s no miracle recipe for strength, only rigorous training, and Deidara knows that already.

The child then looks up at him, the sun is shining bright and Deidara squints when he locks eyes with Itachi, a grin gracing his lips.

"You have a really beautiful way of fighting," he adds, and Itachi looks down at him with a frown on his face. Beautiful hasn't really been a word often used to describe Itachi. He was more used to scary, or ruthless, and Deidara’s choice of words makes him feel strangely… touched.

"It's like... Like every move has a purpose... And you're, mmh. I don't know, graceful or some shit," Deidara says as his cheeks warm up. "I don't know how to explain, I'm bad with words. It looks like a dance, like art, when you move."

It's Itachi's turn to feel his face slightly warm up.

"You're a weird one," he says as he tries to collect himself.

"It's just very different from the way the clumsy oafs of Iwa fight," Deidara retorts. He looks embarrassed. Itachi thinks it's a bit endearing.

It's the fourth day that Itachi meets up with Deidara but he isn't any closer to learning anything. Their training sessions only last about half an hour, and Itachi never really gets a chance to ask questions in between a punch and a jutsu. Of course, he has been spending the rest of his days hanging out in taverns and inns, trying to gather information from civilians and shinobi alike, but there's just nothing on the Jinchuuriki.

He has decided that if he can't get anything from Deidara today, he'll launch the Genjutsu the next day. He has wasted enough time not doing anything constructive and chances are that the Gobi is dead by now. Their spar has been over for more than thirty minutes, but Deidara doesn't look like he is going anywhere, and that gives Itachi hope. The first two days, the kid had left right after, and on the third they had only talked for a few minutes. But now they've been chatting for quite some time, and Itachi is trying really hard to steer the conversation where he needs it to go.

"So, what's your name?" Deidara suddenly cuts in, and Itachi's brain almost short-circuits. He has to answer, and fast, because there is little that is more suspicious than to hesitate before saying your own name, but there's no way he can just tell the truth. It's too big of a risk.

"What is it to you?" Itachi asks instead, and he knows he sounds defensive but he has to buy himself some time while he comes up with some sort of nickname he knows he'll be able to react to instinctively. If there is anything more suspicious than hesitating to give one's name, it's not recognizing said name.

"Mmh, I don't know," Deidara says, and he is beaming up at Itachi with a grin so large that it reaches his ears, "maybe so I can stop mentally referring to you as my personal graceful teacher."

This time Itachi's brain does short circuit and he makes yet another mental note to come up with a name.

It's the sixth day they meet, and by now Itachi is growing restless. He had used the Genjutsu the day before, it's light but intricate, and Deidara hadn't noticed it, which is what Itachi had been most worried about. He is well versed in Genjutsu, and it hadn't be hard, really, to put the kid under one without using his Sharingan while in the middle of the fight. He hadn't tried to get anything out of Deidara straight away, it would give time for the Genjutsu to strengthen so that the kid would believe he was disclosing information of his own free will.

"So, what's your name," Itachi asks, mimicking Deidara's tone from two days ago. He'll start of with basic information, it's a lot less suspicious, and once he knows he can trust his Genjutsu, he’ll move on to what interests him.

"Deidara," the child answers easily as he gulps down on Itachi's water bottle. "Are you gonna give me yours this time?"

Itachi hasn't really had the time to come up with anything truly convincing, but he knows he has to answer if he wants to keep Deidara as unsuspecting as possible.

"Kuro," he lies easily, it'll be simple enough for Itachi to remember.

Deidara eyes him for a few seconds, but he doesn't look suspicious.

"That's an odd name," he remarks, and Itachi has to agree but he doesn't think he'll have to introduce himself to many people so 'Kuro' will just have to do for now. They remain in silence for a few minutes, and when Itachi estimates that it's been long enough, he speaks up again.

"You said you were in an Elite Squad," he starts, and immediately, Deidara's eyes light up with a barely concealed pride.

"Yup, strongest squad of Iwa, we get to be trained by the best shinobi of the village," he says, and there's a smile gracing his lips. Itachi hums.

"Who have you been trained by?" Itachi prods, all of his attention centred on the kid, and the light feeling of his Chakra merging with Deidara’s.

"The Tsuchikage himself, as well as Master Han, and Master Roshi," the kid answers, and Itachi’s heart skips a beat. This is going well.

"I heard Han disappeared, you must be pretty worried."

Deidara frowns, and Itachi doesn't hesitate to let more Chakra seep through to strengthen the Genjutsu. He is too close to getting an answer not to risk it.

"He didn't disappear, Master Han wouldn't just leave. He was taken by rogue ninjas from Taki," Deidara grumbles and he looks affronted at the thought of his Teacher letting him down. "I'm gonna go get him once I'm done with these stupid missions old man Oonoki keeps on giving me," he adds, but Itachi isn't really listening any more.

The only Akatsuki member who used to be from Taki, as far as Itachi knows, is Kakuzu. If he is the one who was sent to collect the Five-Tails, it is highly likely that he will also be the one to retrieve his former village’s own Jinchuuriki. That’s the second terrible piece of news Itachi has gotten since using the seal.

Kakuzu is an efficient shinobi who hates wasting time, chances are that with the week Itachi has wasted in Iwa, the man has already moved on to the Seven-Tails, much sooner than what Itachi had anticipated.

Itachi needs to get going, there's no way he can get to Han in time, but maybe he won't be too late to save Fuu.

"Why... why am I telling you this?" Deidara suddenly says, and Itachi has barely enough time to think 'fuck' before the kid gathers a large amount of Chakra, brings his hands into a seal and whispers 'Kai'.

Itachi dashes away and he picks up his sword in one fluid movement. Deidara scrambles up to his feet and looks at Itachi with wide eyes.

"You... You put me under a Genjutsu!" He yells, and Itachi winces at the betrayed expression on the child's face. "Why did you want to know about Master Han? You're after him too, right?"

"No, I know who took him, and I'm going to stop them," Itachi says, and he really tries his best to remain calm but every single outcome that rushes through his mind doesn't look bright at all. He won't kill Deidara, but he can't just replace an entire week's worth of memories without frying at least half of the kids' neurones.

Deidara glares at him, and he reaches for a kunai in his weapon pouch. Itachi can knock him out easily, and all Deidara has is a false name and a physical description, but if all of Iwa is sent on his tail, it'll make his mission a lot harder.

So much for staying in the shadows, he thinks.

"Is that the truth?" Deidara asks, and Itachi blinks at him.

"Yes," he answers firmly, not a shred of hesitation to his voice.

It is the truth, but surely even Deidara isn't naive enough to trust again a stranger who had put him under a Genjutsu.

"Then take me with you, I want to save my Master," Deidara says and while his face is still alight with distrust, there’s a determined edge to his gaze that Itachi knows all too well by now.

He sighs.

Why do things never go the way he expects them to?

Chapter Text

Kakashi is tired, but what is new, right? This time, however, he is so so utterly tired that he isn't sure he'll be back in Konoha in time to hand in his report, but, hey, that's not so new either. He knows he should stop taking on so many missions in such a short amount of time. His body is bound to just give up at some point, and Kakashi thinks it might be today that he finally breaks down.

The mission hadn't even been that complicated, he just needed to act as a body guard for some figure heads of Taki while they crossed the border, and the second they had arrived in the Hidden Village, Kakashi had turned back in the direction of Konoha.

When is the Third finally going to let him go on important missions again? Probably not until he is sure Kakashi wouldn't collapse, and well that is pretty wise of him because it is the second break Kakashi is taking, and he hasn't even left Taki yet.

Kakashi breathes in and out, tries to gather enough energy to keep going because honestly he doesn't give the lightest crap about whether or not he hands his report in time, he has a few of those lying around his flat that he needs to take care of first, but he wants his bed really, really bad.

Fuck. The people at the mission desk are going to murder him.

He is about to jump onto the next tree branch when something registers. He isn't a Sensor and locating chakra is far from his speciality, but he has got a good nose, and one very good eye that he uses to look around the second he smells the ominous scent of something burning.

That's when he realises that there is no sound at all in the forest, no singing birds, no running boars, and that raises every mental red flag Kakashi has. Something is going down nearby, and it's big enough that animals left the vicinity.

Kakashi scans his surroundings with his Sharingan and it doesn't take him long to finally see where the commotion is at. There is chakra floating around, all coming from the same direction: the Hidden Village of Taki.

Kakashi sighs. Of course things start going downhill the second he leaves, and with the luck he has, he is sure that the people he had to protect can manage to get themselves killed. That wouldn't look good on his record, failing a B-Rank mission.

And so, Kakashi turns back even if his legs feel heavy, and he has to close his left eye to stop the Sharingan from siphoning too much of his energy. He is running low on Chakra, and he really hopes it's just some shinobi having fun because he doesn't want to fight when he is that exhausted.

It's not some shinobi having fun. That much is clear.

Kakashi is hidden at the outskirts of the forest, and he really doesn't want to get any closer. He is a bit far to really see who is fighting, but it's definitely someone strong, someone too strong for Kakashi to take on if he isn't in the best of shapes. There's smoke everywhere, and it's a chance they are fighting on the only rocky desert around Taki, because otherwise the entire forest would have been burnt to the ground already.

Plus, they are too far from the Hidden village to be involving anyone, and Kakashi has half a mind on just turning back towards Konoha and running away. But he has learnt throughout his shinobi years that one is never too careful when it comes to missions and so, he gathers what is left of his chakra and cloaks himself as best as he can.

Being an Anbu, he had had to learn how to hide his presence completely, but he isn't sure he can remain concealed for long when he is tired, and there is literally nowhere to hide on this rocky desert.

He creeps closer until he has a better visual of what exactly is going down, and his blood freezes in his veins. There are children over there, two of them, a boy and a girl who look far too young to be outside of a village, let alone next to a fight this dangerous.

He is still quite far away, so he opens his left eye and with his Sharingan activated once again, his vision sharpens and he can make out the symbols on their headbands. The blonde boy is from Iwa, and the green haired girl is from Taki. Just his luck, two children, one of them from the place he had just left, in the middle of what seems to be a Kage-level fight happening right in front of them. They both have a Hitai-Ite, so they are shinobi but they need to get out of here if they want to live because these ninjas are not messing around.

There are three adult shinobi fighting, and Kakashi can only gape at the sheer amount of Chakra his Sharingan reveals. He studies their movements and observes their appearance carefully, trying to remember if he might know them from his trusted Bingo Book.

Two of them wear long black cloaks with what seems to be a red cloud pattern, but what grabs his attention are their slashed head-bands: two rogue ninjas from Taki. One is tall, awfully tall, but he seems slow and heavy, he doesn’t appear to pose much of a threat. The other, though, is much faster and Kakashi can't help but notice just how big his chakra reserves are. Most of his face is hidden away by white cloths, but Kakashi thinks he looks somewhat familiar.

Against them is another shinobi, and although he isn't wearing a Hitai-Ite, there's just no way he isn't one. The man is fast, precise, and even if it's two against one, he evades every single one of their attacks and returns every blow easily. He isn't tall, nor bulky and the grey cloak he wears must be obstructing most of his movements. With the way his long black hair tangles every time he moves, he doesn't make a good picture of the traditional shinobi, but there's no mistaking the way he easily glides between his two opponents as the result of long years of training.

Then, suddenly, the masked rogue ninja uses a Shunshin to leave his taller partner behind, so that he now stands in front of the kids. He reaches out and grabs the girl so harshly that Kakashi is sure her wrist will bruise purple, before throwing her on his back. The blonde kid rushes through seals and tries to stop the man from leaving with a mud wall.

Really, Kakashi will respect that he is even trying but the gap in power is way too big, and in a second, the man teleports next to the kid's sides and punches him right in the face. There's blood pouring from the boy's nose and mouth, he looks spaced out from the force of the blow. Still, he doesn't go down, tries to recover by attacking with a Lightning jutsu but all it takes for the deserter is another Shunshin, a well placed kick to the kid's guts and he falls on the ground, passed out.

Kakashi grits his teeth. He is tired, and he knows he shouldn't intervene when he doesn't know what's happening but what kind of asshole goes all out on children?

And what kind of asshole doesn't jump in to help?

Kakashi glances at the other two fighting shinobi, but it's clear that the deserter is over-powered, the dark haired ninja is much stronger and after he traps the rogue shinobi in a Water Prison, he teleports to where the two kids and the masked man are. The unaffiliated ninja stands in front of the one with the black and red cloak and he raises his sword. A tanto, Kakashi notices, and that's surprising because he is sure there aren't many shinobi who uses that kind of weapon any more outside of Konoha.

The man rushes in close, it's clear he isn't aiming for a killing blow but he is precise and fast, and Kakashi watches as the blade cuts deep into the rogue ninja's arm, but no blood flows. He drops the girl, and that's another bruise that is going to be big and blue because she falls head first into a rock. Still, the rogue ninja doesn't seem like he is about to give up and he conjures a clone, just as his partner gets away from the Water Prison and rushes to his side. That's three on one, and Kakashi decides it's about time he steps in.

He uncloaks himself and runs to where the blonde boy is passed out on the ground. Kakashi glances at him but doesn't stop, the kid is breathing, his chakra reserves are low but not worryingly so. He'll live and that's enough for now. In a matter of seconds, he is close enough to the three men to distinguish features and he easily identifies the masked rogue ninja.

Kakuzu, his brain supplies, and he definitely wouldn't have remembered him if he hadn't done a background check on every rogue shinobi from Taki right before taking up the mission, just in case.

He is an S-rank criminal, and Kakashi wonders how the hell the man with the tanto isn't dead yet. He doesn't have much time to ponder though, because said man is crouching down next to the unconscious girl and he is so focused on keeping her safe that he has a hard time fighting Kakuzu, his clone, and his partner at the same time. Kakashi is almost close enough for a Shunshin when he sees Kakuzu's hands come up to form a Snake seal, and the earth rises to trap the grey-cloaked Shinobi’s legs.

He can't move, both his hands are occupied with trying to slash through the clone, and the other rogue ninja is behind him, kunai raised high as he aims for the throat. Kakashi doesn't hesitate. He gathers more of his chakra to use a Shunshin, and suddenly he is standing in front of the deserter, his own tanto raised high as he blocks the attack, his back to the other man. Kakashi feels the hair on his nape rise up and the skin of his elbow tingles when it brushes the grey cloak of the dark haired shinobi.

His instincts are protesting against this proximity with an unknown ninja, but Kakashi truly hopes that saving the man’s life will be clear enough as a peace offering.

There is half a second of surprise from the three men, but it doesn't last and the deserter recovers quickly. He dashes away, and Kakashi uses that moment to turn and glance back at the man he just saved, their eyes meet and Kakashi swears his heart stops beating when he registers the sight of twin blood-red Sharingan staring at him, wide in surprise.

°°°

It takes less than a second for the situation to get out of hand when Itachi and Deidara arrive in Taki. They had travelled for close to a week to reach the Hidden Village, and the days had been spent suffering through Deidara's reproachful glare and never ending questions. Itachi had never regretted a choice as much as he did this one.

He shouldn't have allowed Deidara to come with him, and that had proven to be all the more true when they had crossed the border into the country. He had been stretching his senses, using all of his chakra to scan their surroundings, and yet he hadn't been able to feel Kakuzu until it was too late…

… And now, Deidara is bleeding out on the ground, the Nanabi is unconscious at Itachi's feet, and he isn't sure he is going to be able to get out of this situation without anyone dying, and well, he hopes it won't be him, or Deidara.

Kakuzu is strong, but his partner isn't, and it hadn't been hard for Itachi to neutralize him in a Water Prison, before heading for Kakuzu to retrieve the Jinchuuriki. What he hadn't expected was for Kakuzu to know such an advanced Earth Jutsu, and in his surprise and panic, he hadn't been able to dash away in time without leaving the girl behind.

Itachi doesn’t want to activate his Sharingan, but he is getting overpowered without it and just as Kakuzu conjures a clone, and they both rush towards him, Itachi lets the black of his eyes fade to a deep red.

The real Kakuzu makes a run for the Jinchuuriki, while his clone goes in for a punch. Itachi raises his tanto and tries to cut him down, but suddenly he feels his Prison Jutsu giving out, and the other Akatsuki member is now behind him. He starts to turn around, hoping to cast Tsukuyomi before the man's attack lands but before Itachi can even register what is happening, there's another shinobi who deflects his kunai.

Itachi knows that gear, it's Konoha Special Squads’, and even if the Anbu is wearing his white wooden mask, Itachi figures out who it is in a second. He is too surprised to react fast enough, and when Kakashi turns around and their eyes meet, Itachi curses everything that lives. Their Sharingan lock, pupils narrowing on one another and that's going to be hard to explain if they both get out of this alive.

"You're an Uchiha?" Kakashi asks. He sounds breathless, his voice breaking over the vowels of the clan name.

There’s no time for Itachi to answer, nor even consider what he is going to tell Kakashi. His priority is getting out of here alive, and then save the Jinchuuriki. He’ll deal with this misstep later. Itachi takes his sword in one hand and cuts through the clone who crumbles down into stones, while he gathers chakra in his other hand and rushes through seals one-handed. One Lightning Jutsu later and his legs are free from Kakuzu's earth trap.

Itachi doesn't waste any time glancing at Kakashi even if he can feel his chakra clashing with the other Akatsuki member’s, and he heads straight for Kakuzu who is already rushing away with the Taki girl on his back.

Itachi is about to reach them when suddenly, he feels Kakashi's chakra wavering and loosing its strength, and even if he knows that saving the Seven-Tails is what matters most, he can't help but risk a glance in Kakashi's direction. There's a kunai embedded deep in his shoulder, and Kakuzu's partner is awfully close to him, fire balls gathered in his hands as he aims for Kakashi's face.

That's a killing blow, and Itachi doesn't even think before he uses a Shunshin to intercept the attack with a Water Jutsu of his own. Their attacks connect, and steam rises high, but Itachi can see through it with the Sharingan and quick as lightning, he draws his tanto and slices the man's throat.

No casualty, he had sworn to himself, and the rogue shinobi falls to the ground in a wet thump, his blood spurting out in large drops before it starts pooling at Itachi's feet. He looks down at the man's distorted face and before he deactivates his Sharingan, he lets the sight of his dull eyes and the red of his blood be burnt into his brain.

Itachi looks away as he gathers his chakra to scan his surroundings, but all he can feel is Kakashi's and Deidara's faint signatures.

Kakuzu got away, the Nanabi disappeared, Itachi just killed a man, and now he is going to have to deal with Kakashi.

His patience is wearing thin.

"Who are you?" Itachi turns around and his eyes land on the man he had had so much respect for, his Anbu Captain and his beloved brother's teacher, but all he sees is a lost and terribly young man.

Itachi realises suddenly that Kakashi isn’t even quite a man yet in this timeline.

His mask had been torn off in his fight, and it lies in three burnt pieces next to its owner. Itachi doesn't remember ever seeing Kakashi look so young, his eyes are wide and confused, his lone Sharingan shining bright red as he looks at Itachi's face with bewilderment.

"You're... You're..."

"No one important right now, " Itachi cuts in, because really, he doesn't have any time for this Kakashi who is most likely still obsessing over the loss of his best friend.

He rushes to where Deidara is, and he can hear Kakashi scrambling up to his feet in a frenzy to follow him. Deidara is passed out. His face is all bloody, but he doesn't seem to be about to die and that's a relief. Itachi reaches in his bag and takes out bandages that he wraps quickly around Deidara's head. He doesn't have enough time to wipe away the blood, the kid will do that himself when he wakes up.

"Look after the boy," Itachi orders as he throws some bandages to Kakashi's face. He barely catches it, flinching when he tries to raise the arm in which the kunai had hit deep, and he looks at Itachi like he just grew a second head.

"What?" Kakashi asks, and Itachi is a second away from knocking him out, but he needs someone to watch over Deidara while he goes after Kakuzu.

"I'm going to get the girl back. You stay here and protect the kid."

Kakashi blinks a few times, before he reaches for the kunai in his shoulder and takes it out with a small wince.

"I'm coming with you," Kakashi states as he wraps the bandages around his wound.

"No you're not," Itachi retorts, and he is having a terrible deja-vu, but before he can add anything, he hears a few wet coughs that make him glance down and his eyes meet Deidara's.

"Where is that fucking asshole, I'll make his balls explode," he bites out, and if they weren’t in such dire straits, Itachi would probably reprimand Deidara for his colourful language, the way he had had to do a lot over their journey to Taki.

"He ran away, I'm going after him," Itachi explains, and he is already walking away, but Deidara's hand shoots out and grabs Itachi's bloodied pants.

"You mean we're going after him," he says and it's truly impressive he even manages to get up, but Itachi notices how unsteady he is.

"You'll just get in my way," Itachi replies, and he hears Kakashi scoff.

"I saved your life five minutes ago," he says and Deidara's head snaps up to him, his eyes widening as if he had only just realised his presence.

"Who the hell are you?" Deidara asks, and he is already dropping into a fighting stance but considering the fact that he is four feet tall with some blood trickling down his nose and into his mouth, he really doesn't make an imposing sight.

"That's my question too," Kakashi shots back, his voice wavering slightly when his eyes land on Itachi, but with the next breath he seems to gather himself and he looks over to Deidara with a challenging grin. “You look weak.”

Deidara roars, and Itachi sighs. He is surrounded by children, and he has no idea how to deal with them.

"Do whatever you want, I'm getting the girl back," is all he says before he starts running.

"Fuck, my teeth hurt, this bastard knocked one out," Deidara whines, and really when is he going to stop complaining?

"Do you ever stop wailing?" Kakashi asks and Itachi notices from the corner of his eye how Deidara's face becomes red with anger.

"I am not wailing," he snaps as he glares at the Anbu running next to him, but suddenly his foot catches on a root and he would have fallen down if not for Itachi grabbing his arm and steadying him.

"Watch out, wouldn't want another baby tooth falling out, right?" Kakashi taunts, and Itachi has to physically hold Deidara back from jumping on the man.

"That why you wear a mask? Got no teeth under there, you fucking piece of shit?" Kakashi raises a brow at the kid, the curve of his smile clearly visible even under the cloth.

"Weak comeback kid," he remarks, and Itachi wonders why he doesn't just let Deidara punch his smug face, but they have to hurry and all this catfight is doing no one a favour.

"Will the two of you stop? There's a girl in danger," Itachi says as he lets go of Deidara's arm and picks up running.

"Do you even know where we're going, Uchiha?" Kakashi asks, and Itachi snaps his jaw close, lips shut in a thin line.

He doesn’t bother answering, but his mind buzzes with worries when he tries to come up with some sort of loophole that would explain why he possesses the Sharingan, because while Itachi knows he can always knock Kakashi out, his Genjutsu wouldn’t work as well on him, a shinobi well-versed in Genjutsu as well, and with a Sharingan to boot. That meant that Kakashi would remember this encounter, so Itachi has to tread carefully.

“I know where I’m going,” is what he finally says. Kakashi looks like he wants to add something, but Itachi suddenly feels a familiar Chakra signature and it's out of habit that he uses the basic shinobi sign for 'danger'. The three of them stop, and the two others eye him warily.

Itachi points to where the chakra is coming from, and he can distinguish between the trees a rocky part where a hole is hidden behind a few bushes. Kakuzu had wasted quite a lot of Chakra during the fight, and he had probably been in a hurry to find a hideout where he could recover before reaching one of Akatsuki's bases. The chances of him taking the time to lay traps are small, but Itachi won't take any risk.

He beckons the two younger shinobi closer.

"He is in there, stay behind me and be stealthy." Itachi doesn't wait for their approval before he moves closer to the entrance and activates his Sharingan. Kakashi has already seen it anyway, and with the past week spent with Deidara, chances are that the kid has figured him all out so Itachi doesn’t hesitate. He can’t let Kakuzu get away again.

The second the black of his irises bleeds to red, a soft breath escapes Kakashi’s lips and Itachi doesn’t have to turn around to know that he is being stared at. Kakashi’s lone Sharingan is burning a hole though his face and Itachi clenches his teeth in anticipation. That’s a conversation that isn’t going to be pleasant for any of the parties involved.

Seconds later, the three of them jump over the bushes and enter the hole soundlessly. Kakashi is just as good as Itachi would have expected him to be at stealth, being an Anbu Captain, but he is surprised by how well Deidara is holding up. His chakra reserves are low, and he should be exhausted after running around for so long, and yet he still manages not to make a sound as they delve deeper into the cavern. Itachi has trained him well over the past weeks.

They don't walk for long before voices can be heard, the words clear enough to be understood with how they resonate against the cold stone walls.

"Good job, Kakuzu, you need to bring the girl to a safe place quickly so we can begin the ritual," a voice says, and Itachi doesn't even have to analyse the Chakra signature to recognize that distinctive high tone. Stopping a weakened Kakuzu would have been easy enough, but if White Zetsu is also there, it makes this fight more dangerous.

Itachi grits his teeth. He can't let Kakashi, and certainly not Deidara go any further, with how wounded they are. They'll get themselves killed and Itachi knows he won’t go all out if he has to watch over them. That hadn't gone over well the first time. He turns to look at them.

"You need to leave," Itachi says in a low voice that is barely above a whisper. Kakashi cocks a brow and Deidara frowns.

"I'm serious, you'll die," he adds, but that really doesn't seem to phase either of them and they keep on staring at him, looking entirely unimpressed with his warning.

"Look, there are two enemies now, and you’re both injured. I can't let you distract me while I fight them," he explains, but immediately Deidara gets that look in his eyes that Itachi has grown used to over the past two weeks of hanging around this younger version of him. He is about to blow up.

"I don't give a fuck what you think, I'm gonna gouge that fucker's eyes out, and then force him to tell me what he did with my Master before I blow up his nuts, whether you like it or not," the kid bites out and he isn't exactly being loud, but sound spreads easily in a cavern and Itachi feels every mental alarm bells he has ringing loudly in his brain.

He barely has the time to grab Deidara's sleeve and Kakashi's wrist to drag them down to the ground before there's a large yellow fireball rushing over their heads, aimed at the ceiling. It lands and explodes, and the sound rings so loud in Itachi's ears that he almost doesn’t hear Kakashi's sharp exhale but he certainly doesn’t miss the way his entire body goes rigid with fright. The ceiling shatters, and there are large rocks raining down on them.

°°°

Kakashi can't think. He can't even breathe and he is feeling light-headed with the amount of blood rushing to his brain from how fast his heart is beating. There are voices screaming in his head, and as he stares up at the man at his sides and steals a look at his Sharingan, his vision is assaulted with deep buried memories of a body crushed under stones. He knows he has to snap out of whatever this is, because there are stones falling down on them, and one has already landed hard on his injured shoulder, but he feels frozen. His entire body is trembling, and he really is worried that he might just pass out.

Before he can finally react, the dark haired shinobi sneaks an arm around his waist and rushes forward, grabbing the blonde kid along the way as he gets the three of them away from the rockslide. Kakashi blinks up at the man, and he looks as eerily calm as he has been the entire time. His long hair is full of dirt and dust, and it gets in his eyes, but Kakashi guesses that with the Sharingan, it doesn't really matter much.

He is jostled sideways when a large rock falls right in front of them, but the man isn't phased and he dashes aside without even blinking. And then, there's a large boulder, bigger than any others dropping right above them and Kakashi wants to cast a Raikiri, he really does but his body is seizing and he can't help but watch with wide eyes as it draws closer.

From the corner of his eye, he sees the blonde kid elbow the shinobi while trying to free his arms and he brings his hands together as he gathers what is left of his Chakra. There is a deafening explosion and the boulder disappears into dust above their heads. Kakashi glances from the ceiling to the blonde kid, dumbfounded, and he can't really believe his eyes when he notices that this mad child is grinning.

"Yeah, take that fucking rock, that's what true art looks like!" He shouts as a laugh bubbles out of his lips. The shinobi is also smiling, even if minutely, and Kakashi feels the pain in his chest ease a bit. He breathes in and almost chokes on the dust that gets in his lungs, but the air rushes back to his brain and he feels like he can finally think again.

Kakashi is suddenly dropped down on his rear, and he scurries back to his feet before he looks around in a hurry, his Sharingan helping him analyse his surroundings. They are in a larger cave with four tall stone columns holding up a sturdier ceiling, lit up by a few torches on the walls, and there is just no way out.

The passage they had come through has entirely collapsed, but he can worry about how he's going to get out after they survive this fight. Kakuzu is standing only a few feet away with the Taki girl passed out behind him, and to his right is an odd individual wearing the same distinctive cloak. It's a weird mix between a man and a plant, and Kakashi isn't even sure what that thing is. All he knows is that it's clearly dangerous, because the shinobi next to him is tense and he doesn't look away from the two enemies when he whispers to them.

"The one on the right is a scout, the two of you can probably hold your own against him if you remain focused," he says, and Kakashi has no choice but to trust him if he wants to live.

The blonde kid looks annoyed, and he opens his mouth, probably to whine again, but he doesn't have the time because a second later, Kakuzu has dashed forward and he is reaching for the boy's throat.

But the Uchiha is fast, and Kakashi hasn't even seen him reach for his tanto but in the blink of an eye, Kakuzu's arm flies away. It doesn't get cut off, though, and Kakashi stares wide eyed at the thick strings that link his shoulder to the disjointed limb. There's no blood, just like the first time Kakashi had seen their enemy get stabbed.

Just what exactly is it that they are fighting?

He doesn't get to ask, because the plant is also moving towards them and Kakashi needs to focus on this fight. He draws his own tanto and gets ready to attack, but suddenly his enemy disappears into the ground and Kakashi can only stare at where it vanished.

"He uses Wood Release and can merge with the ground," Kakashi hears the shinobi say just as the plant reappears next to the blonde boy from Iwa.

'Wood Release?' Kakashi mentally echoes, 'what the hell'.

"How do you know about that, Mister Sharingan?" The plant asks as it avoids one of Deidara's punch. And yeah, that is one good question and Kakashi really wants to hear the answer as well, but the shinobi doesn't bat an eye as he rushes past the plant and stabs Kakuzu, thrusting the rogue ninja back against a wall.

Kakashi's shoulder is throbbing, his chakra reserves are worryingly low, and he really needs a nap, but the plant-man is shooting wooden bullets from his palm and the blonde kid has a hard time avoiding them, so he gathers what’s left of his Chakra.

He doesn't even know if he has got enough of it for a Chidori, but he doesn't have any time to think so he dashes to the child's sides. The jutsu takes form in his hand, the sound of a thousand birds echoes loudly throughout the cavern, and a second later he pierces the plant's skin, but it feels just like punching through mud.

Kakashi draws his arm back, and a disgusting squelching sound rips through the air. There's no blood, only a hole which is quickly regenerated, and when Kakashi raises his eyes to look at this thing's face, it's smiling widely.

"That won't work," it says and Kakashi isn't sure how he is supposed to kill that creature if his most deadly jutsu doesn't do any damage.

"How about that, then!?" Kakashi glances at the kid, and with his Sharingan he can see the amount of chakra he is gathering, probably more than what he should have left.

He barely has the time to jump back before a deafening blast makes the plant's body implode. There's a white creepy goo on the ground, and Kakashi is pretty sure he has some in his hair but he can't take the time to check because suddenly, it gets swallowed by the ground.

Kakashi looks around, but he can't see the creature anywhere in the cavern, there is not even a trace left of his Chakra, and he hopes it means that whatever the hell that was, it's gone for now.

Kakashi is about to turn to where the Uchiha fights when he suddenly feels a burst of chakra so strong that his legs buckle and the breath is knocked out right out his lungs. He feels dizzy with the strength of the tide and when he looks over to the blond kid, he sees that the wave of chakra was the last straw for the child who is kneeling down, his body shivering from exhaustion and shell-shock. Kakashi rushes to his side and he barely makes it there in time to catch him before he hits his head on the ground.

Kakashi looks away from the kid's face to gawk at the source of that chakra, and his eyes land on the Uchiha, standing tall and proud as he hovers over the motionless body of Kakuzu. When Kakashi’s Sharingan lands on the missing nin, he sees the way his chakra is bursting out irregularly, the vessels running through his body going haywire as a result of the attack launched by the Uchiha, and suddenly, the man’s chakra vanishes to the last drop.

Kakashi gapes. Only a Genjutsu can mess with someone’s chakra this badly, but he had never heard of someone dying because of one. He isn’t even sure how that can be possible, even with the Sharingan. His body shivers with fright.

The Uchiha seems calm and hasn’t even broken into a sweat. He mindlessly steps over the corpse of the ninja he just defeated, but very carefully reaches down for the unconscious girl. He hitches her up on his shoulder, her head gently resting on the man's small backpack, before he turns around and walks back to where Kakashi is.

"Is he alright?" The shinobi asks, and Kakashi blinks a few times before he can come up with the answer. His throat feels tight and dry, and he has to remind himself to breathe before he tries to speak up.

"Er, yes, just passed out," he says. The man nods.

"Get back, I need to make a hole in that ceiling," he states, and when he takes in Kakashi's astounded stare, he adds "there's a building above, we'll leave through the ceiling."

Kakashi drags the unconscious kid with him towards the wall, and he can only watch as the shinobi rushes through Mudras one-handed, the other supporting the child on his back, before he shoots Water Bullet right in the middle of the ceiling. They pierce through, and Kakashi has half a mind to wonder how an Uchiha can manage to use Water Release this efficiently. Kakashi marvels at the man's precision because it's not the entire ceiling that comes crashing down, only just a few rocks, clearing out a hole large enough for someone to pass through.

The shinobi leaps up so fast Kakashi almost looses track of him and he effortlessly passes through the hole. With how little Chakra Kakashi has left, he knows better than to risk jumping blindly, and instead, he throws the blonde kid on his back and he walks up the wall, then onto the ceiling, focusing hard on the amount of chakra he pours in his feet as he crawls out of the hole.

Sure enough, the ceiling of the cavern had been the floor of a large building that looks like a temple, but Kakashi knows Taki has a lot of those so that really doesn't help situate where he is. He sets the kid down, and straightens up to look around.

"Konoha is in that direction," the shinobi suddenly says, and Kakashi looks up to see that the man is pointing towards where Kakashi is facing. Most shinobi know what the standard Konoha Anbu uniform looks like, but that's still another piece of the puzzle that he mentally files away, and Kakashi isn't about to leave without some answers.

"Who were these people?" He asks as he takes a step closer to the stranger, legs like jelly.

"Not for you to worry about, go back to your village," the Uchiha answers, and Kakashi chuckles.

"No, I don't think so. You're an Uchiha, but you don't have Konoha's head-band. Are you a deserter too?"

The man turns around, and Kakashi can't read him at all. There's just no emotion to be seen on his face, and for a second, Kakashi is suddenly reminded of how strong and deadly the shinobi is, but if he hasn't been killed yet, it probably means he won't be. Even if it's dumb, and extremely dangerous, Kakashi raises his eyes to stare right into the shinobi's Sharingan. He isn't afraid, and he knows he probably should be, but he can't just let a rogue Uchiha out there.

"Come back to Konoha with me," Kakashi says, and because he is looking for it, he catches the subtle clenching of his jaw. The shinobi doesn't answer, and Kakashi is about to add something, anything that will convince the man, but then the two Sharingan start spinning, and the world goes black.

Chapter Text

Kakashi wakes up feeling like shit. For a second, he thinks it's another one of those mornings where all he remembers is agreeing reluctantly to go along with Gai and his friends out to a bar and drinking burning liquor that makes him forget the entire evening and leaves him with nothing more than a crushing hungover. But usually, on those mornings, the sight that he is met with when he blearily opens his eyes is the mouldy ceiling of his flat, and sometime a stranger’s warm body by his sides, but definitely not Konoha's hospital's pristine bedsheets.

He sits up in a rush and immediately feels so nauseated that he has to clasp a hand over his mouth to keep himself from throwing up, his fingers bumping against the smooth tissue of his mask.

"Easy there, my friend!"A voice booms out, and Kakashi can't hold back a defeated groan. Yes, all he needs right now to make his day just that much better his Gai screaming in his ears.

“How are you feeling?”

Like death, he thinks, but when he notices that it’s not Gai who spoke this time, but the Third Hokage standing in the corner of the room, Kakashi bites down the comment.

“Fine,” he rasps out instead, and if he looks even half as bad as he feels, he knows it won’t convince anyone. “Why am I here?”

Both Gai and the Hokage seem surprised by his question.

“Actually,” the old man says, “we were hoping you’d be the one giving us the answer.”

Confusion overtakes Kakashi and it must show on his face, because the Hokage quikly adds, “We received a message from you five days ago with coordinates and a request for a medical unit. They found you in a remote temple belonging to Taki, you were in a Genjutsu-induced coma.”

And then it all comes rushing back so fast Kakashi’s headache increases tenfold and he has so many things he needs to say that he doesn’t know where to start. Rogue ninjas, children, and the Uchiha.

Kakashi understands quickly how he arrived in Konoha, the Uchiha must have been the one to send that message. What he doesn’t get, however, is why. That man had nothing to gain from making sure Kakashi would be safe, in fact, it would have made more sense for him to be killed.

Kakashi couldn’t see the intentions of that man, or the reason why he had been travelling with a child, rescuing yet another kid from a minor country.

“...Kakashi?” The Hokage’s voice brings him out of his thoughts and he looks up to meet the old man’s eyes. They are expecting, but Kakashi knows that what he will tell the man will bring a different kind of light to his eyes by the time he’s finished.

“There was a rogue Uchiha fighting two other missing-nins around Taki. That man is the one who must have sent this message,” Kakashi begins and just as he is about to inform the Hokage of what he knows, the old man raises his hand, beckoning silence.

“Gai, I thank you for your help, you’re dismissed,” the Hokage says and Gai’s smile falters ever-so-slightly.

“Yes, sir,” Gai responds with a voice a tad less loud than usual and with a final bow and a last glance to Kakashi, he is out of the room.

“Now, Kakashi, tell me of these two missing-nins,” Sarutobi says as soon as the door shuts. If Gai isn’t privy to what they will talk about, it can only mean trouble for Konoha, Kakashi reckons, and he doesn’t wait another second before telling the Hokage what he remembers..

“After I completed my mission, I was caught in a fight between two rogue ninjas from Taki and an Uchiha on the outskirts of The Hidden Waterfall,” Kakashi recalls, keeping his voice matter-of-fact even if he feels everything but calm.

It’s been five days. Five entire days, and Kakashi had been stuck in Konoha, passed out in a hospital bed, while that shinobi had fled god knows where. There’s no way Kakashi will be able to pick up a trail.

“What do you know about those two missind-nins?” The Hokage asks, and Kakashi is slightly surprised that the Hokage would question this part first, instead of the Uchiha part. Kakashi knows close to nothing on the rogue ninjas. A physical description, sure, even a name for one of the two but the Bingo Book hadn’t provided with much information regarding Kakuzu.

All Kakashi knows is what he saw. For some reason, they had been fighting over the kid, but why two criminals and an unknown Uchiha would take interest in the same girl at the same time remained a complete mystery.

Tentatively, he speaks up again, his uncertainty clear even to his own ears.

“They were all trying to get their hands on the same child, a girl from Taki,” he says, and when Hiruzen only nods as if waiting for more, Kakashi recalls the events.

From the moment he had laid his eyes on them all, two kids and three adults, to the fight against the two rogue ninjas with the Uchiha’s deathly strength as his ally, and then finally to the rescue of the Taki girl after the jarring murder of Kakuzu.

Through his tale, the Hokage remains awfully still, fuelling Kakashi’s growing worry and confusion. Once he is finished, the two of them remain silent for a few seconds that stretch for far too long for Kakashi’s tastes. Then, the old man speaks up, his hoarse voice barely a whisper.

“Kakuzu, you say. He and his partner, did they have cloud patterned cloaks?” The Hokage asks and even if his voice is grave and the set of his jaw carries a barely hidden urgency, Kakashi doesn’t see why that detail would be important.

He has seen a shinobi with the Sharingan kill a man with nothing more than a Genjutsu, that seemed like a much more pressing matter than two dead criminals.

Still, when he meets the man’s eyes, he sees a dreadful seriousness that sobers him up, and he bites down any words of complaint he might have had, choosing to slowly nod instead.

The Hokage’s face shifts slightly, and he turns around swiftly, but not quickly enough that Kakashi can miss the worry marring his brow.

“Go to the Message Station and tell them to get Jiraiya in Konoha this instant,” Sarutobi orders to a corner of the room and Kakashi watches an Anbu flicker to life in the darkness, dropping his cover to bow at the Hokage and leave through the window.

It is hardly an unusual thing for an Anbu to shadow the Hokage, but Kakashi realises that choosing to reveal the agent and have him deliver this message spoke of an urgency he doesn’t quite understand yet.

“What is going on?” Kakashi finally probes when he realises that the Hokage seems intent on remaining mute. He knows he hasn’t ever been the one Sarutobi trusts with political matters, but he really hopes that this time, the Hokage will be willing to disclose this kind of information.

Kakashi has spent years being Konoha’s guard dog, taking on mission after mission and rushing through the ranks lightening fast. He never asks for the reasons behind missions, they are as much a way to keep Konoha safe as they are a way for him to forget. Forget about the deaths he still carries with him to this day.

These reasons, though, Kakashi wants to learn about them. Who is that man that had saved him when the cave had crashed down, and made sure he’d be safe? Kakashi isn’t yet ready to really ask himself why he needs to know. All he is sure of is that meeting this man had opened the barely closed wound left behind Obito’s death, and it needs to be shut for good or Kakashi might fall apart.

The Third looks at him for a long time, as if gauging him. His eyes have always looked warm to Kakashi, burning with a fire that lives in every Hokage, and even, to some extent, in every single person living in the Fire Country.

But if this flame is usually a comforting warmth for Kakashi, he almost feels burnt now by the intensity of the old man’s gaze.

Finally, he sighs deeply before speaking up.

“There have been whispers of an organisation rising in the village of Ame. They go by ‘Akatsuki’, and I sent Jiraiya to investigate. Over the past year, all he has managed to dig up on them is that they say to aim for world peace and that the members wear black cloaks with a red cloud pattern.”

The Hokage makes a short pause after that, sending Kakashi a meaningful glance.

Why should they be concerned by an organisation seeking world peace, Kakashi wonders. He understands that if someone like Kakuzu was a member, then their goal isn’t probably as noble as it sounds but he doesn’t really see how that connects back to Konoha. And to the Uchiha.

“And a month ago,” the Hokage adds before Kakashi can voice his confusion, “two Akatsuki members kidnapped one of Iwa’s Jinchuuriki.”

Kakashi blinks slowly as he takes in the new piece of information.

And suddenly, Kakashi understands why the Uchiha had been so determined to get the girl back. She isn’t just some child, she is Taki’s Jinchuuriki. He doesn’t have much knowledge on the vessels to the tailed beasts, but he knows that they hold the key to the fragile balance in power between countries.

“So what, are they collecting the Bijuus?” Kakashi asks, and even if he never meddles with village matters he knows just how critical such a situation is. The Jinchuuriki are supposed to be a Village’s stronghold, its last resort in a war, but also a way to assert their power. Stealing one is the kind of thing that starts a war, some have begun for way less.

Kakashi grits his teeth. This is no laughing matter. Even one of the Legendary Sannin is involved, which means that Konoha itself is neck-deep in this entire mess. This organisation needs to be stopped, no matter how honourable their goals sound, if they come after the Jinchuuriki, they are bound to aim for Konoha and its Nine-Tails as well.

Of course, Konoha won’t let go of their Bijuu so easily, but if they stole one from Iwa, one of the Great Nations, then they probably can get their hands on many more.

Kakashi is closer to understanding what exactly is looming over their heads, and he now sees just how dire the situation is. But if the Hokage has information on the Akatsuki and their actions thanks to Jiraiya, he has none regarding the Uchiha and this eats at Kakashi more than he’d like to admit.

Kakashi has just woken up from five days of sleep and he already feels worn out. He thinks he more than deserves a nap at this point, or a drink, more likely.

°°°

Itachi is getting another headache, and he isn’t sure how long he can keep on holding back before he snaps at the kid and physically make him shut up.

“I just don’t get why you don’t want me to come with you,” Deidara whines again and he is eight, so of course his voice is high but by now it sounds like a broken record to Itachi’s ears and his patience is thinner than ever.

“Because you have to go back to your village,” Itachi says yet again, and he has a hard time controlling his voice.

“I’m not going back until I have avenged my master,” Deidara states, and that’s a pointless argument because Kakuzu is dead, there is no revenge to be taken any more.

“They’ll think you deserted and you’ll become a missing-nin,” he argues, and by now he knows the kid doesn’t care, but he is running out of things to say to counter Deidara’s stubbornness.

“You’re a missing-nin too and you don’t seem to mind all that much,” the kid retorts and Itachi notices how the kid speaks as if he already is a deserter.

“Fine,” he snaps, “do what you want, but you’ll die.” Deidara grins wide, as undeterred as he had been when Itachi had warned him of the same thing days ago.

“You’ll protect me anyway,” he says, quite smugly, and Itachi is too tired of the child’s antics to even bother denying it.

It’s not like Itachi can really abandon the kid somewhere at this point. Deidara is too clever for his own good and Itachi really doesn’t want to spend too much time on worrying about just how much information the kid might have been able to piece back together.

Between Kakashi’s claim that Itachi is an Uchiha and his Sharingan, Deidara probably believes that Itachi is a missing Konoha-nin. But that isn’t the only thing Deidara has definitely figured out. Being trained by Roshi and Han, it wouldn’t have taken him long to realise just who exactly the girl they had saved was, and Kakuzu going after two Jinchuuriki in the span of a month couldn’t be seen as a coincidence.

There are people gathering the Bijuu, and Deidara is aware that Itachi knows who, and why.

“So what’s our next stop? Which Jinchuuriki are we saving?” Deidara asks eagerly. He sounds too happy for a child choosing a stranger’s quest over his own village.

“We’re not going to save a Jinchuuriki. We’re going after the organisation who kidnaps them,” Itachi says as he picks up his bag, abandoning the mystery surrounding some of the truth, judging that if Deidara really is to come with him he’d rather have the kid prepared for what they might face.

Before the boy can begin his endless tirades of questions, Itachi heads for the main gate. They can’t stay in Taki another day. The Head of Village had been adamant on paying them back for saving their Jinchuuriki, but Itachi has no interest in that and he really wants to leave before people in Taki can remember his face.

By now, Kakashi is probably back in Konoha and awake. Itachi needs to move and not leave the smallest of trails if he doesn’t want Kakashi on his back while he goes after Sasori.

Itachi is convinced that he hasn’t joined Akatsuki yet, and he can make sure that he never does by getting to him before Nagato or Obito can. Itachi also plans to stop a few times, hear the gossip and earn money by taking out a few thugs and take the opportunity to train Deidara.

Their next main goal is Suna, and Itachi really hopes Deidara can learn to shut up while they travel all the way to the Wind Country. It’s quite the journey and Itachi would rather spend it in peace and quiet.

Deidara doesn’t learn how to shut up. Peace and quiet are two adjectives that are absent of the child’s vocabulary, but for all his loudness, he also is a focused student and he is adamant on keeping up his spars with Itachi. Even if he is getting a bit tired of the child’s antics, he is also proud to see that the kid is determined to get stronger and bring down Akatsuki with him.

They stop as often as necessary, they train a lot, and while Deidara is making a lot of progress, Itachi isn’t. He has been back for almost four months, and so far all he has done is running around with a child on his back.

One certainty remains, he needs to take down more Akatsuki members and on the way to Suna he has the time to come up with his next course of action. With Kakuzu out and the Seven-Tails safe, the One-Tail is probably Akatsuki’s next goal. Gaara is nothing but a baby, and the Wind country is an unstable place. If Tobi can rally Sasori to his cause, getting to Gaara would be child’s play.

It’s only once they enter Suna that Itachi really starts to formulate his plan.

“So what are we looking for?” Deidara asks as he drops his bag on the straw rug that will work as his bed for the next few weeks.

“Have you heard of Sasori of the Red Sand?” Itachi asks before he imitates Deidara and puts his belongings on his own bed.

“Yes, a Puppet Master from Suna who deserted, right?” Deidara answers with a frown, obviously confused by the question.

Itachi nods. “He might be with Akatsuki.” Deidara cocks his head to the side as he studies Itachi for a few seconds.

“What if he isn’t?” The kid asks lightly, and even if his tone is nonchalant, Itachi pauses all the same.

If Itachi made sure Sasori wouldn’t join Akatsuki, Gaara would be harder to get hold of. Obito is down two men, he has to recruit as well as recover by siphoning a vessel’s chakra. He would target an easier Jinchuuriki.

There is one Jinchuuriki in an another unstable country with deserters who would be more than happy to join Akatsuki.

“Then we leave and move on to Kiri,” Itachi answers in a firm voice, thoughts drifting for a second to the Six-Tails and Kisame, but when he notices that the kid is oddly silent for once, he glances down to see his nose wrinkled in distaste.

“This inn is filthy,” the kid says, wide blue eyes taking in the dust gathered on the ground and the lack of furniture.

Itachi almost rolls his eyes, but he settles for a desperate sigh. They had been travelling with the bare minimum, no beds, little food, with rarely an occasion to get cleaned out, and now that they finally are in one of Suna’s inn, the kid still manages to complain.

“Stop whining, you’ve got a mission to carry out,” Itachi states, and that immediately grabs the kid’s attention.

“A mission? What kind? I am gonna fight some mean dudes?” Deidara asks, his eyes earnest and bright, and Itachi notices with something akin to fondness that the kid doesn’t swear as much nowadays.

“You’re going to go around and ask questions to shinobi about Sasori.” he answers in a commanding voice, looking at Deidara with a serious gaze. “You will have to look like a harmless civilian child, or they might see you as a threat and attack.” Deidara gulps down an excited shout, bouncing with hardly concealed enthusiasm. “Suna isn’t overly trusting, nor do they like strangers,” Itachi finally warns with a meaningful stare but Deidara seems too excited by the prospect of an undercover mission totruly heed the advice.

Intel gathering isn’t the easiest part of missions, quite the opposite. However, Itachi knows that Suna shinobi won’t trust an unaffiliated adult shinobi, but they might let their guard down if Deidara does the asking. That also means putting the kid right on the frontline, yet Itachi doesn’t have much of a choice.

He really hopes the kid manages to calm down enough to gain people’s trust because as of now he is all but bouncing, radiating energy.

“And what are you gonna do in the meantime?” Deidara asks as he takes his headband off and hides it in his bag, readying his harmless child cover.

“I’ll ask civilians,” Itachi answers, and he doesn’t wait any longer before jumping through the window and heading towards the busier streets of Suna.

They don’t have any time to waste, Itachi has done enough of that.

He only hopes he can find someone who will know what he is looking for.

°°°

Deidara knows he is in deep shit, and if he doesn’t get killed in the next few minutes, Kuro is the one who will have his skin for being so careless. He had been warned, and yet he had still messed up. He had thought that asking a young shinobi would be easier than an adult.

At least he did find someone who knows about Sasori.

A kunai grazes his cheek, the pain is light but there’s a cut and blood trickles down his face. He can taste the metallic tang of it in his mouth.

Deidara takes a swift turn and hides in the shadows of a tall building. He is near the main gate, but he doesn’t think that running out of Suna with a shinobi on his tail would be very wise.

What Deidara needs to do is take the boy out, but he isn’t even sure if he can. The shinobi on his tail is barely older than he is, probably around twelve, but he is strong and Deidara isn’t used to fighting against ninjas who use chakra the way the boy does. He makes an unpredictable opponent and how hard Deidara has trained with Kuro won’t matter in such a fight.

Deidara crouches down, barely avoiding the hand coated in chakra that flies above his head. It cleanly cuts through some of his hair and he curses under his breath. His enemy’s hands are sharper than a kunai and Deidara knows he can’t let them even graze him.

“What business do you have with Master Sasori?” The boy asks again, but if Deidara didn’t answer the first time, he sure as hell isn’t going to do so the second time around.

He grits his teeth and brings his hand into a seal. Using his hereditary exploding technique isn’t usually a good idea considering how big the attention it gathers is, but Deidara hopes that if he is loud enough, Kuro might hear the commotion and come to his help. He doesn’t want to rely on his companion too much, he is a shinobi himself and he despises feeling like a dead weight, but he isn’t about to let his pride kill him.

Deidara gathers Chakra and the wall near the silver haired boy in front of him detonates. Rumbles are sent flying and dust rises. The enemy shinobi lifts a hand to shield his eyes and Deidara uses the split second of surprise from his opponent to rush in close and grab a kunai from his weapon pouch. He is glad that he hadn’t left it behind in the inn along with his head band. Civilian children don’t wander around with shinobi weapons but his coat does a good job of hiding it and he doesn’t like to go out on a mission unarmed.

Deidara clasps the weapon in his hand tighter and reaches out towards the boy’s stomach to slice his guts but the boy blocks his kunai with his own. Swiftly, his enemy gathers chakra around his hand and extends it to Deidara’s face to slash his face. Deidara’s eyes widen as he sees fingers approaching and he knows he won’t be fast enough to dodge.

He squeezes his eyes shut, his entire body tensing in apprehension of the pain to come but the blow never lands and all of a sudden he is forcefully yanked back. His eyes shoot open and his heart swells almost painfully with relief when he sees the now familiar grey cape of Kuro standing in front of him.

“I told you to be careful,” the man says without glancing back at him and Deidara does feel vaguely insulted but he is too grateful to really get upset.

“I did find someone who knows about Sasori,” he shoots back with a grin, voice laced with challenge.

It may not have turned out how either of them had been expecting, but Deidara has completed his mission anyway. Kuro doesn’t rise to his provocation though, and Deidara’s smile falls.

Kuro isn’t even looking at him. His gaze is fixated on the kid in front of them and there’s something in his eyes that Deidara can’t really interpret quite right, but it seems like acknowledgment.

“Yakushi Kabuto,” Kuro says, and Deidara cocks his head in confusion but a gasp of surprise pulls his attention away from the man and back to their enemy. The kid is tense, his eyes opened wide.

“How do you know my name?” He asks as he gathers more chakra to his hands.

“I know your master,” Kuro answers but Kabuto doesn’t seem to believe him for one second, a doubtful frown set on his face.

“Master Sasori surely never told me about you,” the kid shoots back as he pushes his round glasses up his nose.

“I am talking about your true master,” Kuro says, and that’s when Deidara stops following where the man is going. Deidara squints at Kuro, but the man seems calm, the same knowing look in his eyes he always has when talking about his quest.

When Deidara glances back at Kabuto, he sees that the teenager’s body is taut with tension, sweat gathering at his temple. He is openly glaring at the two of them, gripping his kunai tighter as he slowly backs away. He suddenly looks like a cornered animal and Deidara has a hard time understanding what is going on.

“I don’t know what you’re talking about,” Kabuto says between gritted teeth.

Deidara then glances away from the boy to stare at Kuro. The man looks almost serene, there’s no aggressivity in his demeanour but there’s something in his face that Deidara thinks could be resentment.

Deidara looks back and forth between his companion and the older boy, and the tension he feels in the air is just as easy to see on both of their stiff bodies.

“I’ve got a message for your master,” Kuro finally says, very slowly. “Tell him he should give up on his obsession with the Uchiha if he wants to live.” Kuro’s voice his low and heavy with the threat and Deidara feels a cold shiver of fright run up his spine when he sees that Kuro’s eyes have bled to a deep red.

There’s that same ominous chakra gathering around Kuro, the one that had knocked Deidara out the first time he had felt it. He knows Kuro killed a man with that power. As much as Deidara has grown to like the man, respect him and admire him even, there’s a part of him that almost dreads Kuro.

Kabuto is looking rightfully terrified, there’s a slight tremor running through his muscles – he is shaking and his lips tremble, as if he was trying to say something but unable to.

Suddenly, the silver-haired boy turns around and starts running on unsteady legs, he looks ready to faint any second and Deidara is about to rush after him but a hand on his shoulder stops him.

“Let him go,” Kuro says and even if the dark aura is gone, Deidara flinches away from the touch. It isn’t quite fear he feels, rather a sort of anxious awe that leaves his instincts on high alert.

“Why?” Deidara asks in a breath. Kuro really likes to be mysterious about his plans most of the time, but Deidara would like to be kept informed. Kuro is already walking away by the time he answers.

“Change of plans. I had forgotten about someone who needs to be taken care of first,” is all he says in the voice of Deidara what likes to call the emotionless robot.

As mysterious as ever.

Deidara sighs heavily. If he has learnt anything at all about Kuro’s personality in the past two months, it is that going against the man is purely useless because of how utterly pig-headed he can be when it is about his quest. So Deidara follows him back to the inn.

Kuro is an enigma, Deidara thinks as they start packing their bags, and he is probably insane for trusting him as much as he does but Kuro knows things. He knows about the Jinchuuriki, and he is trying to protect them. That is more than anyone in Iwa had been willing to do. Most of them despised Master Han and Master Roshi, and Deidara has always resented them for it. In Iwa, all the adults he knew treated him like he was dirt. Like he was a bother.

Kuro, however, doesn’t belittle him. He gives him tasks, train him, and they have conversations during which Deidara sometimes feel like he is Kuro’s equal. Like his opinion matters.

And so, even if Deidara hasn’t been able to put together many pieces, he knows with unwavering certainty that this man he has so much respect has a goal for which he is ready to die.

Deidara will help. He might be just a kid from some village to Kuro, but to Deidara the man is everything he had been trying to find. He is powerful, but not cruel and that is something quite rare among shinobi. Kuro is a model for Deidara and even if his brash nature sometimes wins out, he also knows better than to discuss Kuro’s decision.

It seems that this surprises Kuro.

“You’re being oddly silent,” the man remarks as they leave the inn, Deidara following behind Kuro as he guides them to the entrance gate of Suna.

“If you say our priorities changed, then they did,” Deidara says, slightly annoyed.

Kuro chuckles, there’s a small smile on his lips and his eyes are warm. It’s a very different expression from the one he had worn when confronting Kabuto, this one warms Deidara’s body down to the tip of his toes.

“We’re heading east,” Kuro suddenly states as they leave Suna and Deidara blinks when it registers that the man means Konoha. That is definitely the last destination he had expected. Not only is Kuro most likely a Konoha deserter, but the shinobi they had encountered when saving the Seven-Tails had been from Konoha as well. That sounds like a recipe for disaster.

Deidara sighs.

He’s going to lose another tooth, isn’t he.

°°°

Kakashi doesn’t think he has ever felt this frustrated before.

He has been spending his days alternating between completing basic C-rank missions and looking after Kinoe, he feels worn out down to his very bones. He isn’t used to being on his guard so constantly and it’s truly tiring.

Ever since he had been let out of the hospital, the Third had forbidden him from taking on missions above B-ranks, saying that it was time Kakashi caught a break. He doesn’t feel like he is resting at all, though. The missions are boring, the reports even more, and most of the free time he has is taken up by Kinoe.

Over the years they had grown closer since the Yukimi Incident, and Kakashi thinks of him as one of his few real friends, not that he’d ever tell Kinoe. Still, the amount of time they have been spending together the past few months is suspicious and Kakashi really wants to leave Konoha and go on some week-long mission.

He is always on edge and no amount of time spent meditating or pouring out his emotions over Rin and Obito’s graves is helping him calm down.

Kakashi knows why he feels so frustrated, but he can’t do anything about it. There hasn’t been a day since his mission in Taki where he hasn’t thought about the rogue Uchiha to the point where his face has been burnt in Kakashi’s memory. He has spent entire days remembering every single detail, trying to put pieces together but none of it makes any sense.

He had even gone as far as to interrogate Fugaku, the head of the Uchiha clan, in order to discover if there was any Uchiha who was missing from Konoha but he had come up empty. Every single member of the clan was accounted for and there hasn’t been a rogue Uchiha since the legendary Madara deserted.

The man Kakashi had encountered could be an illegitimate child that had grown outside of Konoha, but it wouldn’t explain his knowledge of Konoha’s Kenjutsu and Taijutsu. He had fought like a Konoha-nin, there is just no way around it.

What is all the more frustrating is the way the Hokage has been adamant on keeping Kakashi far away from matters related to Akatsuki. The organisation is connected to the Uchiha, somehow, and yet the Hokage refuses to hear anything about the man and only discussed these kind of information with Jiraiya.

Kakashi sighs.

He needs to stop thinking about that and start focusing on his mission. He can see Kinoe growing more restless by the second and it’s making him feel on edge. Orochimaru’s hideout is sure unsettling but Kakashi doesn’t think it’s scary enough to warrant such a reaction out of a Root member.

It’s not even a complicated mission, and Kakashi wonders once more why they had sent another Anbu as his back-up to investigate Orochimaru’s former labs. Still, he is thankful that Kinoe came with him. His Wood Release is awfully convenient when it comes to opening locked doors.

It doesn’t explain why he can wield it though.

“This jutsu went extinct in Konoha ages ago,” Kakashi says absent-mindedly, but Kinoe doesn’t react much, not even responding.

Kakashi knows of another Mokuton user, now, but until he meets the Uchiha again, his chances of ever knowing just how the plant-man was able to use it will remain a mystery.

“It’s extremely important for the Hidden Leaf, it can harness the power of the Nine-Tails,” he adds after a few seconds of uncomfortable silence.

“So can the Sharingan,” Kinoe answers smoothly and because he is wearing his mask Kakashi can’t tell for sure but it feels as if Kinoe is staring at his hidden eye. A chill runs down his spine. There’s something very wrong with Kinoe.

Feeling uneasy, Kakashi backs away and goes for the door. He leaves the room they were in and enters the next one, trying to physically avoid the uncomfortable atmosphere around his friend. This room is much bigger, with a high ceiling and no source of light other than two large containers. There’s fog inside of them and it hides their contents but they both shines brightly, emitting an eerie blue glow.

Kakashi creeps closer and reaches out a hand to one container. It’s cold to the touch and even through the fog he thinks he can see something slithering along the glass.

“There’s something inside,” he calls out to Kinoe as he rubs at the glass to melt the ice that had gathered on the outside. Suddenly, he feels movement behind him and when he glances at the glass, he sees the reflected image of Kinoe rushing in, tanto raised high.

Kakashi turns around just in time to see his friend lowering the blade to his face. He darts to the side, barely fast enough to evade a killing blow, and the tip of the blade catches on his shoulder, slicing along his arm. The cut isn’t too deep, still it bleeds, but Kakashi doesn’t register the pain. All he can think about is the fact that his friend has just attacked him from behind.

“What are you doing?” Kakashi asks breathlessly as he backs away. His body is so tense that he can barely move his limbs, it feels like there’s lead running through his veins and the blood rushes to his ears so loud that he swears he can hear his heart beat.

Kinoe doesn’t answer. Instead, he flings a kunai at Kakashi and it’s purely out of instinct that he reaches for his tanto and deflects the weapon.

“Kinoe!” Kakashi calls out between gritted teeth, but his friend doesn’t seem to be willing to listen to anything he has to say.

The boy rushes in, long brown hair fluttering about as he closes the distance and clashes his sword against Kakashi’s. It’s been more than three years since the last time they spared, and even if Kakashi still has a few inches on Kinoe, the younger boy has definitely gotten a lot stronger and when he swipes his tanto the next time, the blow is much heavier and Kakashi’s sword flies out of his hands. He darts away, now unarmed, and tries to avoid Kinoe’s attacks as well as he can.

Suddenly, he is jostled sideways when a large rod of wood collides with his left shoulder. With his Sharingan closed, Kakashi’s left side is his weak point and it seems that Kinoe intends to fight dirty. But he won’t go down so easily. Kakashi swiftly pushes his head band up and opens his left eye, the Sharingan immediately sharpening his vision while it drains his chakra away.

Kakashi focuses and locks eyes with Kinoe, intending to use a Genjutsu but the kid is well trained and he immediately shields his eyes with an arm and dashes away. Kakashi takes in a wobbly breath and rushes for the door.

The dark corridors of Orichimaru’s eery base are cold and confusing, but Kakashi doesn’t care if he gets lost now, he needs to find some place where he can rest and think of a plan. As he takes a sharp turn to the left, Kakashi sees a small gap between a few pipes that are connecting the upper floors to the lower ones, and he slips into the hole to hide in the shadows of the metal rods.

Kakashi squats down and takes a band-aid out of his weapon pouch before slamming it on the bleeding wound of his shoulder. He hisses in pain, but it helps him stay grounded. He needs to think. Kinoe knows how to fight against his Sharingan.

Actually, that was probably his goal all along.

Kakashi grits his teeth. He had known that sending a Root member as his back up for a scouting commissioned by the Hokage was odd. Kinoe’s mission is probably to steal his Sharingan.

‘Fuck Danzo,’ Kakashi thinks bitterly.

Before he can decide how he is going to deal with this situation, he feels a rush of chakra to his left and darts out of his hiding spot. Wooden rods crush the pipes Kakashi had been leaning against a few seconds earlier, and he sees Kinoe approaching menacingly, eyes cold.

“Why are you trying to kill me?” Kakashi asks as he slowly backs away. He doesn’t want to fight Kinoe, he needs to figure a way out of this.

“It is my mission,” Kinoe answers in a bitter voice as he grips his tanto tighter. “What kind of mission sends a friend after a friend?” Kakashi shoots back, and that seems to make Kinoe pause, his grip on his weapon loosens, but he still takes another step towards Kakashi.

“If your orders are to kill a friend, then these orders are wrong,” he adds, and Kinoe’s steps falter.

The boy stops and looks down at the ground. For a second, Kakashi thinks he has given up, but suddenly Kinoe starts running in his direction, tanto raised high.

“Master Danzo isn’t wrong!” Kinoe shouts as he thrusts his blade towards Kakashi’s stomach. Kakashi deflects the blade with a kunai and dashes sideways, before throwing a dozen shurikens at his friend. Kinoe blocks most of them with his sword but one lands in his thigh and his leg waver, the weapon digging deep into a nerve.

“Killing a friend isn’t a mission,” Kakashi says again. There’s steel in his voice, and a hint of desperation. He doesn’t know how to convince Kinoe who grew up in the Root, worshipping Danzo and bathing in his twisted view of the world.

Kinoe reaches for the shuriken in his thigh and wrenches it away, blood pours out but he doesn’t even wince when he starts running towards Kakashi.

“Then why did you kill her?” Kinoe asks, and Kakashi’s blood runs cold. His entire body freezes and he almost doesn’t move fast enough to evade Kinoe’s blade. He glances at Kinoe, their eyes locking for half a second, and his friend’s next words make his heart ache.

“Why did you kill Nohara Rin?”

There’s a buzzing sound in Kakashi’s ears and he can’t hear Kinoe’s voice any more. In his mind echoes the singing of a thousand birds and for a split second, he swears his hand is wet with blood but when he glances down, all his sees is his skin, roughened up by their fight, but no dark red tainting his fingers.

He didn’t kill Rin. He couldn’t protect her, and she died because of him. But he didn’t kill her. He didn’t.

It’s a mantra he has been repeating over and over for the past three years, and it seems that every day it’s working less and less.

He didn’t kill Rin. He didn’t kill Obito.

‘But they both died because of me.’

A dull pain registers and Kakashi blinks. He looks down at his arm and realises that there’s a wooden rod creeping around him that suddenly tightens, holding him in place. He looks up at Kinoe, and his left arm is extended.

Pointed wooden spears shoot out of his palm, and Kakashi tries to wriggle out of the wooden hold but it’s no use, he feels tired, his body has no strength left and even if his eyes are wide open as he stares at his friend, all he can see are the two corpses of the people he had loved more than anything.

The spears are closing in and Kakashi closes his eyes. The image burnt into his brain doesn’t go away and he feels choked up. Such an irony, that he would go down by the hand of a friend.

But the pain never comes, and Kakashi’s eyes shoot open out of reflex when he hears the loud sound of something exploding very close to his face. His ears are ringing from the blast and there’s dust everywhere. The sound reverberates against the wall of the underground lab so loudly that Kakashi can feel his teeth rattle. The wood that held him prisoner suddenly loosens and falls to the ground.

“Is that guy Orochimaru?” A brash voice roars. Kakashi thinks it’s a little familiar and the exploding technique doesn’t leave much space for doubt.

The dust starts to clear, but before it does Kakashi searches his surroundings with his Sharingan, his heart beating wildly again.

“No,” a placid voice answers.

It sounds dull, and when Kakashi whips around towards the voice, and his eyes land on the rogue Uchiha from the Taki incident, he notices that he looks truly and entirely bored out of his mind.

Kakashi’s breath catches in his throat. The man glances at him, and once again their Sharingan lock onto one another. There’s a thousand questions swimming in Kakashi’s head, but he knows that now is not the time nor the place and he settles on studying the two newcomers silently, Kinoe long forgotten and the plaguing thoughts leaving his mind.

The Uchiha’s hair seems longer, it rains down past his shoulders in waves of charcoal black, catching in some holes of a battered grey cloak. The cloth is dirty and torn in so many places that it’s a wonder it hasn’t fallen apart yet. He doesn’t seem hurt, though, and Kakashi can’t really imagine the man ever being injured, considering how irrationally strong he is.

Kakashi glances down at the child accompanying the Uchiha, but the blonde kid isn’t looking at him, and Kakashi tears his gaze away from them to follow the boy’s line of sight. Kinoe is standing against one of the frozen container from before, a hand clutched to his shoulder. There’s a worrying amount of blood seeping through, he was probably hurt in the explosion.

“Who’s that masked brat then?” The blonde kid asks.

“You don’t get to call anyone a brat when you’re like, I don’t know, seven?” Kakashi says coolly, and the boy’s face suddenly colours red.

“Fuck you, shitface, I’m eight!” He shouts back, but then his eyes land on Kakashi for the first time and they widen comically. He points a finger at him and starts looking frantically between Kakashi and the Uchiha.

“He’s! He’s! That one dude from before!”

The Uchiha sighs. He puts a hand on the kid’s arm and forces it down before looking at him disapprovingly and the kid’s angry blush darkens further. His mouth opens, and Kakashi can already hear the high-pitched complaints that are about to spill out but before the kid can whine, a wooden spike slices the air between Kakashi and the Uchiha, lodging itself deeply into the wall so hard that it cracks.

Kakashi’s head wipes back towards Kinoe. He is breathing heavily, and the blood trickling down his arm is now dropping to the ground into a large pool of dark liquid. The metallic scent makes Kakashi’s heart clench.

“I’ll complete my mission,” he breathes out, but his voice is weak and his legs look unsteady. Kakashi grits his teeth. There’s too much going on at once, and he can’t think clearly. He can’t just let the two newcomers leave, he has questions, but helping Kinoe is his priority.

“What do we do? Kill them?” The blonde kid whispers, barely loud enough for Kakashi to hear, but he does and once the words register they send a cold feeling plummeting down Kakashi’s stomach.

It should be obvious, really, that these two are foes, but the fact that they saved his life remains and Kakashi had hoped that somehow he could convince them to follow him back to Konoha to have a nice little chat. For the time being, however, they don’t seem to be on the same side, and Kakashi will always prioritize his friends. Even when said friend is trying to kill him.

The next second, Kakashi is turning away from them, slowly backing away towards Kinoe, but suddenly there’s a loud crashing sound and the room is plunged into darkness. He whirls around quickly, his Sharingan allowing him to discern the shapes well enough to see that one of the large frozen container that emitted a blue light is now broken, water flowing out and wetting Kakashi’s toes.

There’s a large mass slithering out of the tube and Kakashi’s heart stops when he realises that it’s a large snake, a very, very large snake whose open mouth is raining down on an unconscious Kinoe splayed on the ground.

Kakashi gathers his Chakra, aiming for a Shunshin, but the Uchiha is faster than him and in a blink, his tanto slashes through the snake and the head falls down into the wet ground. The man then leans down to Kinoe and creeps an arm around his middle before dashing away towards Kakashi.

He quickly forms a few seals and breathes a thin trickle of fire up onto the wood stuck in the wall from Kinoe’s previous attack, basking the room in a faint orange glow. The blonde kid runs up to them as well, crouching down to peer at Kinoe’s mask when the Uchiha puts him down on the ground next to their impromptu bonfire.

“Did he use Wood Release?” The boy asks as he reaches out a hand towards Kinoe’s face, but before he can take the mask off, Kakashi slaps his hand away.

“Hey! We just saved your lives again!” He whines, but Kakashi glares at him and he shuts up.

“Don’t uncover an Anbu’s face,” the Uchiha says, and the words ring oddly in Kakashi’s ears. Like he has heard them before. Hell, he might have even said them before. It's a common Anbu rule. 

“Fine,” the kid says, pouting.

Kakashi looks between the two strangers with growing apprehension. “Why are you helping us?” He asks, but before the Uchiha can answer, the sound of water gliding and slithering reaches his ears.

The three of them turn towards the sound as one and suddenly the snake rises from the water. Now that the room is lit, Kakashi can see just how big it is, but it’s not what makes him blink in confusion. Its body seems to be made out of smaller snakes that intertwine to piece back it’s formerly sliced body together, and dark hair starts growing out of its head. It’s a horrifying sight, and Kakashi doesn’t think he has ever seen something quite this ugly.

“Didn’t you just kill that thing?” The kid asks, voice heavy with disbelief.

“It’s one of Orochimaru’s experiment, it won’t go down so easily,” the Uchiha replies, seemingly unfazed by the appearance of the monster before them.

Without adding anything else, the man draws his tanto once more and raises it in front of him as the snake charges again. Kakashi feels the man gather his chakra and he watches as it gets poured into his blade. The Uchiha darts forward to meet the snake head on and easily evades its fangs as he slips away before cutting deep into the creature’s body once more in a wide arc. There’s a sizzling sound when the blade meets the smaller snakes that compose the larger body and Kakashi notices that they are getting burnt by the weapon. The head is sent flying at Kakashi’s feet and he studies it for a second with wide eyes.

Without missing a beat, the Uchiha forms seals rapidly and aims a Fire Jutsu at the unmoving head. The room is eerily silent as the flames crackle and burn down mercilessly the remains of the snake’s head. The blonde kid suddenly moves from his crouching position and runs to the man’s sides to peek at the rest of the body laying still, the water reddening from the creature’s blood.

Kakashi glances at Kinoe and he takes a moment to wrap the boy’s shoulder with bandages. The cloth quickly turns red and Kakashi knows he needs to be brought to Konoha’s hospital sooner rather than later. He walks up to the two other ninja, leaving Kinoe behind only a moment to look at the monstrous snake, but the water around the monster suddenly starts to fume and Kakashi inadvertently breathes in. He immediately cringes back and clasps a hand on his clothed mouth and nose and sees the Uchiha do the same.

“It’s poisonous,” the man breathes out through his fingers and he quickly yanks the blonde kid back.

The three of them dash back next to the bonfire where Kinoe lays, but Kakashi can already feel his movements grow sluggish. He inhaled too much of the poison. The fumes start to rise up and spread out into the lab, so Kakashi doesn’t waste any second and he crouches down to grab Kinoe before he hitches him up on his shoulders. Thank god the kid is light.

He quickly dashes away towards the door and he can hear the water splashing behind him as the two other shinobi do the same. They flee the infected room and run up the spiralling corridors until they reach a room higher up, close to the entrance that Kakashi had gone through when entering the hideout. They are far enough that the poison won’t reach them any more, but Kakashi’s legs are starting to feel really unsteady, and he knows that it won’t matter much whether he breathes in more of the fumes or not. Even a single lungful is apparently potent enough to make true damage to the body.

Suddenly, there’s a heavy thud and Kakashi glances back to see that the blonde kid has collapsed. His breathing is heavy and unsteady, and he slowly curls into a ball, arms creeping around his torso. Kakashi can feel his own lungs starting to burn.

“I think I inhaled too much of that shit,” the kid breathes out as sweat gathers on his forehead.

The Uchiha glances back and forth between Kakashi and the boy sprawled out on the ground. The man’s own breathing seems to come out more shallow than what a small run calls for. Looks like the three of them have ‘inhaled too much of that shit’, Kakashi reckons.

The Uchiha crouches down and heaves the boy up on his back before he picks up running. Kakashi takes in a small breath that sets his lungs ablaze, hitches Konoe up his shoulders a bit more and rushes after the man. Seconds later, light from the outside comes pouring in and the four of them make it out of the lab through the round passageway leading to the forest.

The pure air of Konoha’s lush woods doesn’t make Kakashi’s breathing any easier, but at least he feels less anxious outside rather than trapped down in Orochimaru’s lab. He gently lays Kinoe down against a tree and watches from the corner of his eye the Uchiha do the same with the blonde kid.

Kakashi is about to take a step towards the two of them when suddenly his legs give out and he falls head first into the grass. His muscles start tensing up randomly and he feels his entire body heating up. He scrunches his eyes shut at the intense onslaught of pain in his lungs and he curls up reflexively, a hand clutched around his throat. He vaguely hears footsteps coming closer and the sound of rustling registers.

Kakashi forces his eyes open and he sees the Uchiha crouched down next to Kinoe, his hands rummaging through the boy’s pouch. Kakashi wants to tell him off, to shout at him to back away from his friend but his throat feels dry and hot at the same time and only a pained groan makes it past his lips. But to his surprise, the man doesn’t harm his friend, instead he applies a few more band-aids to Kinoe’s shoulder and although they immediately become stained in blood as well, they will slow the hemorragy enough for now.

Then, he stands up and slowly walks up to Kakashi on unsteady legs. He leans down, and for a second Kakashi feels his body grow taut in fear of receiving a killing blow but the Uchiha simply drops something next to Kakashi’s head and rushes away towards the blonde kid, hand clasped around some sort of vial. Kakashi turns his head, and on the grass lies a single glass syringe filled with a reddish liquid.

‘It’s antidote,’ Kakashi blearily realises, and suddenly it seems obvious why Kinoe would have some. Of course Danzo wasn’t going to send him to one of Orochimaru’s hideout to kill Kakashi without the necessary gait. Better safe than sorry.

For the first and most definitely last time, Kakashi is thankful that Danzo is such a paranoid mastermind. He slowly extends his arm to grab the syringe, gritting his teeth at the ache in his entire body, and stabs it to his arm without hesitation. It could be poison for all he knows, but considering that he is going to die if he doesn’t even give it a try, he doesn’t wait before pressing down to let the fluid enter his bloodstreams.

Slowly, his muscles stop cramping, and even if the pain in his lungs isn’t going away and his body is still overly warm, Kakashi can feel himself start to relax, his relief almost immediate.

“K-Kuro?” A wobbly voice calls out, and Kakashi has hardly enough strength to move just yet but he still pushes up on his elbow and turns his head.

The blonde kid is sitting up with a syringe still buried in his shoulder, and Kakashi can’t help but feel thankful when he notices that some colour is back on his face. But then his blood runs cold. Next to the kid, the Uchiha is laying unmoving on the grass, his long black hair swayed by the wind.

“Kuro? Kuro! Come on, don’t die on me now!” The boy cries out, hands shaking the inert figure. Kakashi hears more than he feels his heart, it’s beating loud in his ears and drowning out the sobs of the child.

“Did the antidote not work?” Kakashi rasps out as he slowly gets up, his entire body trembling from the exertion. The kid’s head whips around to glare at him. There are tears in his eyes, but they don’t do anything to cool down the fire in them.

“Didn’t work? You fucking idiot there were only two syringes!” Kakashi grows entirely still. His mouth opens, and closes again, he looks from the kid’s tear-stained face to the motionless Uchiha, and back at Kinoe’s pouch.

It’s empty.

Kakashi doesn’t understand.

Well, he does understand that there were two syringes because the pouch is empty and there were three poisoned shinobi when now there’s only one. What he doesn’t understand is why it’s the Uchiha who’s dying and not him. That would have been the obvious choice, were he in the Uchiha’s stead, he wouldn’t even have hesitated before saving his own life, and then his friend’s.

And yet, here they were, Kinoe breathing, his shoulder patched up, the blonde boy crying, the poison out of his system, and Kakashi standing inhumanly still as thoughts rushed to his mind.

There’s someone out of the four of them who is dying, and it’s the strongest shinobi Kakashi has ever met.

It’s not fair, and he has let too many people die already.

He grits his teeth through the pain and starts moving.

Chapter Text

Consciousness slowly drifts back to Itachi, still, he doesn’t open his eyes just yet. His body feels oddly heavy, but after inhaling so much of the venomous gas it was to be expected. He had been trained to withstand all kinds of deadly substances, especially the ones Orochimaru had come up with all thanks to Sasori, who had himself dabbled in poisons and worked on the notes Orochimaru had left behind after fleeing from Akatsuki.

Itachi had thought he would be able to survive the poison, but passing out hadn’t exactly been something he had expected. Still, he is alive, and that is a win for him. What isn’t a win is the feeling of a mattress against his back, and not the grass of the forest he had passed out in.

He can’t tell how long he has spent passed-out, but it had been long enough for someone to move him, and considering how close to Konoha they had happened to be, he is most definitely in the Hidden Leaf Village.

It feels wrong, oh so terribly wrong, for him to be back here before he had managed to finish his mission. He needs to slip out before the Third Hokage interrogates him or Deidara.

Deidara.

Itachi can’t feel the kid’s chakra nearby, and he can only hope that he has somehow managed to escape. He doesn’t think that the Hokage would be against using force when interrogating potential enemies, especially if Kakashi has reported that the two of them are involved with Akatsuki.

Itachi believes in Deidara, he knows the kid wouldn’t betray him, and he doesn’t even hold capital information, only guesses, but ninja can be ruthless even with an eight-year-old child. He has to find Deidara and leave before the situation gets even more out of hand.

Itachi slowly opens his eyes to a dark room. There are no windows, and the only furniture he can see seems to be the bed he is lying in. His hands are restrained by metal clasps tightly cuffed to the bed, but he can get away with a jutsu. Itachi tries to gather chakra, yet he comes up entirely empty, and his heart starts to beat faster.

He glances down to his chest, and sure enough, there are rolls of parchment plastered to his torso, the intricate patterns drawn on it glowing softly in the dark before they slowly die out. These are syphoning his chakra and as long as they are on his body, he won’t be able to use even the smallest drop. Itachi tries to struggle against the metal around his wrists in a vain attempt, it won’t budge at all.

He can’t get away. His brain is going into overdrive as he tries to come up with some way of escaping, but without chakra and his body bound, he has no means of even leaving the bed on his own. His breath is starting to come out faster and no matter how hard he tries to calm himself down, all he can focus on is the heavy feeling settling in the pit of his stomach.

He has fucked up, again, and he has no idea how he is going to get himself out of there.

The deadly silence of the room is suddenly broken by the sound of approaching footsteps and when Itachi tries to analyse a signature, he realises that he can’t feel the smallest wave of chakra. These seals won’t even allow him to sense anything.

The metal door is slowly pushed open, a small trickle of light illuminating the room, but before it is fully opened, Itachi closes his eyes and relaxes his body. He thinks he can distinguish the sound of two people entering the room and the footsteps come closer to him. He focuses on remaining motionless, but it proves to be extremely hard when a blinding light suddenly illuminates the room and hurts Itachi’s eyes behind his closed eyelids.

Then there’s a shadow that blocks the light from raining down on his face, and he feels a body leaning over him, studying him closely. “He is still out, Sir,” a voice says, it’s uncomfortably close and it takes everything Itachi has to remain relaxed and keep his eyes closed, his mind fighting with his body’s natural reactions when faced with a threat.

“No, he is pretending,” another raspy voice says.

It’s further away, but the distance doesn’t hide the familiarity of the tone. Itachi’s blood runs cold.

“Open your eyes, Kuro Uchiha,” the man says as he comes closer, and Itachi complies, dread settling in his stomach. Above him is the mask of an Anbu Itachi doesn’t recognize, but beside him is the face of a man he will never forget.

“Hokage the Third,” Itachi greets in a rough voice, his tongue is heavy and his throat is dry, it hurts to even speak but it doesn’t do anything to dwindle the fire in his eyes as he studies the old man’s silhouette clothed in the pristine white and red robes that better men before him have worn.

“I see you know who I am,” the man says with a small smile that Itachi definitely doesn’t trust one second. “This will make things easier.”

Itachi cocks a brow but remains silent. His entire body is tense. He feels utterly helpless and vulnerable which doesn’t make it easy to appear relaxed. He is sure that the Hokage must be sensing his distress.

“You are currently in one of the confinement room of Konoha’s hospital. We took the precaution of applying a few seals to ensure you wouldn’t leave before we could ask you a few questions,” the Hokage says in a voice so gentle that it astonishes Itachi enough to almost miss the way the Anbu retreats to a corner of the room before disappearing from sight.

Itachi doesn’t need to be able to sense Chakra to know that he is still most definitely in the room with them. There are probably a handful more Anbu lurking around. He is in enemy territory, surrounded, with his hands literally and figuratively tied.

All he can do is silently study the Hokage as he draws a chair from a corner to settle on it. He sits straight and tall, making him seem just as imposing as he had while standing up despite his small stature. The aura he exults is heavy and the smile he sports doesn’t diminish his intimidating presence.

“Your little friend has been asking about you a lot, he seemed very worried,” the Hokage states calmly, and nor the words nor his tone sound threatening but it chills Itachi’s blood all the same.

“What have you done to him?” He asks, his voice thinly laced with cold anger but the Hokage doesn’t seem the least bit worried, or offended.

“Nothing, he is currently resting in a room. We didn’t bother with seals considering that he doesn’t seem to be willing to go anywhere without you.”

Itachi bites back a curse. If he manages to get out of Konoha alive, he’ll need to give Deidara a lecture about saving his own skin. The kid should have left the second they didn’t apply any seal to him.

“We were going to have him interrogated but Kakashi was very adamant on waiting for you to wake up. He said you saved his life not once, but thrice. Naturally, I am very curious to learn why there is a Uchiha out there who is involved with Akatsuki, but we wouldn’t want to start our relationship on rocky grounds,” the old man explains gently with yet another smile. It oddly softens his features, making him look his age.

The first thing Itachi latches on is the repeated use of his clan’s name and it’s worrying, if expected, that they have drawn the conclusion so fast. Still, he won’t confirm nor deny the assumption, and deal with it later. For now, he focuses on the matter at hand.

He can’t make sense of what the Hokage says, and for a while there are no more words exchanged, the only sound in the room being his own uneven breathing.

‘It’s too good to be true’.

That’s the first coherent thought that surfaces above the background noise of his inner turmoil, but when he glances back at the Hokage, he sees that the old man is still smiling, the wrinkles around his eyes casting deep shadows on his cheeks.

“Why?” Itachi says at last. He isn’t even sure what he is asking, but it’s the only thing that seemed to be able to make it past his lips. The Hokage, however, doesn’t seem surprised by his question, and his kind smile only widens.

“You see, my boy, I am willing to give you a chance and trust you. From what I’ve gathered, you killed two Akatsuki members and saved the Seven-Tails. We seem to have a common goal and I wouldn’t want to make an enemy out of you when we could join forces instead,” the old man explains in a clear voice.

There’s no deceit to be found on his face and he seems entirely relaxed and truthful, but Itachi cannot simply put behind him the feeling of betrayal that squeezes his heart whenever he recalls the last words he had exchanged with the Hokage in his own timeline.

But this isn’t his timeline any more. This Sarutobi hasn’t yet ordered the murder of the Uchiha. He still trusts them, he hasn’t let Danzo mess with his brain and he doesn’t even know how terrible things are about to get in Konoha. His eyes are set on the threat of Akatsuki, and that’s why he is willing to trust a complete stranger.

“Of course, I have a few conditions. I cannot simply entrust a missing-nin with matters related to Konoha so I-”

“I want to see Deidara,” Itachi cuts in suddenly.

He won’t let himself consider the old man’s offer before he witnesses with his own two eyes that the kid is alright. It’s foolish to even entertain the idea of a pact with the Hokage, but Itachi has been running from Konoha for so long that he can’t help but see the appeal. Itachi wants to berate himself for hoping, yet he has been on his own for quite a while, and he longs for the feeling of belonging. He is tired of the loneliness and finding Deidara had been an unplanned but oddly welcome situation.

He doesn’t want to crave company, it makes him vulnerable, but the thought of being welcomed back in Konoha makes his heart swell in a way it hasn’t in a long time.

If Deidara is safe, and if the Hokage is being truthful when offering Itachi the chance to stay, he doesn’t think he’ll be able to refuse, no matter how unreasonable it is.

When Itachi glances back to the old man with his resolve strengthened, he sees that the old man is nodding towards the corner in which the Anbu had disappeared. The shinobi suddenly reappears and leaves the room without a word.

“The boy will be brought here shortly, in the meantime, let us discuss,” the Hokage offers as he studies Itachi, eyes roaming all over his body as if it held the answers he yearned. Itachi then realises that he has been stripped of his clothes and belongings, the only thing covering his chest being the seals and his shinobi pants replaced by the white trousers of a patient’s garment. He looks utterly unthreatening, and that knowledge makes his skin crawl.

“What’s your offer?” Itachi asks, partly because he wants to buy some time, wanting to see that Deidara is indeed safe, but also because he is genuinely interested to hear what the Hokage has to say.

“You know about Akatsuki,” the old man states and his firm voice leaves no room for argument. “I believe you probably know a lot more about them than we do considering you knew two of their members’ identity as well as their planned attack in Taki.”

He has to tread carefully. The Hokage is a wise and quick-witted man, Itachi knows that at the first misstep, the old man will see though the cracks of his not-so-well constructed half-truths. He doesn’t know the extent of the information the Hokage has on the organisation, and he will need to reveal only matters that could be found out by a spy. The last thing he needs is having to explain how he came back in time without sounding completely insane or too dangerous to be made into an ally.

“I am also under the impression that you are a very strong shinobi whose strength could help us take down Akatsuki faster. That is why I am willing to offer you a position as an informant. You would receive Konoha’s protection and we would use your intel to terminate the organisation,” the Hokage adds, his voice monotone and too collected to not have been a rehearsed proposal.

Itachi can’t tell if it’s a trap or not. It can’t not be a trap, it’s too good of an offer, but the small smile on the Hokage’s face never wavers and Itachi can’t help but be baffled by the fact that he is still alive, and that they apparently haven’t harmed Deidara.

‘Yet’, the most rational part of his brain reminds him.

“What’s in it for me? I have been managing just well on my own,” Itachi says in a detached voice that hides the sparks of hope he feels..

“Well, with our resources acting on your intel we would be more efficient in taking down Akarsuki, for one,” the old man chuckles with a small shake of his head. “But I suppose this isn’t enough to convince you to help us.”

It is a good argument. Itachi has only got two arms and too many things he needs to do. He could use the help, but he has no reason to believe the Hokage wouldn’t stab him in the back.

Itachi is still fighting himself when the Hokage lets out yet another warm chuckle that is at odd with what Itachi remembers of the man, before he speaks again. “I’m willing to listen to any request you might have. Surely, a missing-nin with no resources and a child to care for must have a few needs we could answer to.”

Itachi can see where the Hokage is going with this. He is hoping that by offering Itachi a warm bed, protection and food they might reach a consensus. Itachi doesn’t care for shelter. All he cares about is creating a safe world for his brother to grow up in.

He is suddenly assaulted by an idea that seems utterly foolish, and at the same time brilliant.

It’s a gamble, really, but Itachi doesn’t think he is going to be killed considering the information he has. He can risk it. Probably.

“I have a lot of information, various in nature, and not only concerning the Akatsuki,” he says slowly, carefully choosing each word that leaves his lips. His statement seems to greatly interest the Hokage whose face suddenly shifts into a considering frown.

“Do you know of the Root Anbu who was sent with Kakashi into Orochimaru’s lab?” Itachi suddenly asks, the old man’s face frown melting into a confused expression. Before he can answer, Itachi goes on.

“His name is Kinoe, he was sent by Danzo to assassinate Kakashi in order to retrieve his Sharingan,” he says and with the way the Hokage’s eyes widen at the information, it is most likely that Itachi spent very little time being passed out. Kakashi hadn’t made a full report yet.

“Why would Danzo give such an order?” The Hokage asks, his voice a lot more reserved and wary compared to before.

“Have you ever seen what hides behind his bandages?” Itachi answers with a question of his own that seems to surprise the Hokage even more.

It’s a dangerous game he is playing. This kind of information will be hard to prove, and it will be even harder to explain how he had gotten it. But Itachi is back in Konoha where Sasuke, his whole clan even, is being threatened by Danzo’s schemes and he won’t allow them to unfold again.

The Hokage doesn’t answer Itachi’s question, waiting expectedly but when he breathes out the dreaded word the old man’s eyes’ light shifts.

“Sharingan. Dozens of them”

The silence that forces its way into the room after Itachi’s words is a lot heavier than before. It makes Itachi’s body shiver and his heart beat harder. He can’t backtrack any more, he might as well get to the end of his insane plan.

He doesn’t wait before telling the Hokage about Danzo’s connection to Orochimaru, how the two of them were behind the inexplicable disappearances that have been happening for years. He tells the old man that these citizens were used for experiments, and that the successful ones, like Kinoe, were now used in Root.

If the Hokage does show some surprise at these facts, he doesn’t blink when Itachi discloses that the repeated assassination attempts and threats to his life had been made by none other than Danzo himself.

The man’s face remains closed off. He doesn’t speak up. It had all been Danzo’s doing, because the man had only one goal: becoming the Hokage and ensuring that Konoha remains strongest and rules over the other countries, even if he had to kill children and manipulate his friends in order to do so.

Once Itachi has told the Hokage everything he knows about how rotten to the core Danzo is, the silence comes back forcefully, hanging heavy in the room. It makes Itachi’s skin crawl and sweat gathers on his temples when the old man remains silent, his eyes stuck to his hands resting in his lap.

At last, he speaks, but the words are quiet, hesitant.

“Why should I believe you? Why would you tell me this?”

Itachi is surprised to be asked these questions instead of being killed right where he lies, but he doesn’t let it phase him and it’s with practised ease that he answers without missing a beat.

“I’m convinced you already suspected every single thing I just told you,” Itachi says in a calm voice that doesn’t betray how fast his heart his beating. “As for why, that’s is because this is my condition. Information on Akatsuki, in exchange for Danzo’s head.”

More than a gamble, this is a foolish endeavour that Itachi knows is seconds away from getting him locked up. Permanently. Or killed.

But how is he supposed to hold back? How could he have not taken his chance? Stopping Danzo is just as important to him as stopping the Akatsuki. There is no point in saving the world if his brother is all alone in it, his entire clan murdered because of Danzo’s schemes.

Itachi could have taken care of Danzo himself at some point, he is a fast and precise assassin after all, but if he could somehow get Sarutobi to handle Danzo himself, it would give Itachi more freedom. He wouldn’t be an enemy of Konoha, he could get their help with taking down Akatsuki faster and he would be closer to watch over Sasuke.

Itachi knows for a fact that Sarutobi is already aware that Danzo wanted him dead. It wouldn’t seem far fetched to acknowledge everything Itachi has said as facts if the Hokage were to look into reports from Root. Danzo has been betraying him for years in plain sight, barely hiding his traces because he believed Sarutobi too soft to take action.

Sarutobi is patient, and forgiving, but he isn’t soft, and Konoha’s safety as well as its prosperity have always been at the top of his agenda. If Danzo becomes a threat, head of Root or not, he would be taken down.

Silence stretches on for a long time. Seconds turn into minutes, and all Itachi can do is wait for the Hokage to reach a conclusion. He really hopes he isn’t going to lose his head for his brashness.

“Those are very bold accusations, and an even bolder condition,” the old man suddenly says as he stands up from the chair.

The neutral tone of his voice betrays none of the emotions he is feeling which really doesn’t help Itachi in calming down.

“I will consider your offer and verify the information you offered about Danzo. You understand that if I find out that these were lies, there will be no deal at all for you, Uchiha,” he adds as he walks up to the door, but before he opens it, the Hokage turns around to look at Itachi.

His eyes are cold and calculating, his gentle smile long morphed into a tight line of grim determination. Even without being able to sense his Chakra, Itachi feels cold all over by the pressure the man exerts, a raw strength radiating from every single pore of his deadly entity.

It’s a terrifying sight and Itachi is suddenly reminded of why this man, despite his age, had been regarded as the God of Shinobi until the very end. Another shiver racks Itachi’s body when the man glances away, all tension suddenly leaving him once he isn’t pinned under the stare of such a powerful man.

Just as the Hokage is about to go for the door, it is suddenly thrown open, and it’s with amazing speed that the Hokage steps out of the way and narrowly escapes the mass of blond air that hurls itself inside the room.

“Kuro!” Deidara screams, his voice halfway between a happy shriek and a relieved cry. The boy jumps onto the bed and flings itself at Itachi, leaving no time for the man to ready himself for the onslaught of affection he is suddenly subjected to as Deidara hugs him. “I thought you died! You’re an idiot!”

Hearing these words from a snivelling Deidara makes him feel oddly indignant considering how reckless the kid can be, and yet slightly touched to see how worried he had been. He doesn’t get to voice any complaints about the way Deidara is crushing him though, because the Hokage suddenly approaches and Itachi feels his guard rise up once more.

“For the time being, I would like it if you remained in this room. There is quite the number of Anbu studying your every move, it would be useless to try to run away,” he says as his hands hover above Itachi’s wrists, and all of a sudden the manacles fall to the ground and Itachi can push himself up into a sitting position, dragging Deidara up with him. Without another word, the Hokage leaves the room, and Itachi is left with Deidara and his thoughts in disarray.

The scrolls on his chest can only be deactivated by their twin seals, so they can’t be ripped away or cut down with a Jutsu, the seal would absorb the Chakra immediately. He is effectively trapped in a room with no other option but to wait.

‘At least Deidara is safe’, he thinks as his gaze drops to the child still wrapped around his torso. A smile makes its way to Itachi lips, he would have never guessed he could be so relieved to hear Deidara’s whining voice.

The kid sniffs back a few tears and leans away for a moment, eyes stuck to Itachi’s face as he studies the older man, a frown marring his red and wet face. He looks like he is about to start scolding Itachi, and the thought makes his smile widen ever-so slightly, but Deidara’s hands brush against Itachi’s back and the kid freezes. He peers curiously at Itachi face and digs his finger harshly against his spine who cringes away on reflex, words of protest already brewing in his head but Deidara speaks up before he can.

“You’ve got a tattoo?” He asks, and Itachi’s brows knit in confusion.

Deidara moves away from Itachi to peer over his shoulder and look at the man’s naked back, forcing Itachi to turn his head to study the child’s face. His blue eyes suddenly widen and there’s a light twinkling in them as he stares for a few seconds. “That’s soooo cool, I’ve always wanted to get tattoos too!” He exclaims, but the words ring empty to Itachi’s ears, his body feels oddly cold and his hand is strangely heavy when he raises it above the opposite shoulder to brush his fingers against his back.

He feels the bumps of his spine, but what grabs his attention are the ridges running along his back that have most definitely never been here before.

Itachi doesn’t need to look at it to recognize the pattern that runs from the nape of his neck to his lower back, swirling all over his spine and stretching over his shoulder blades. It’s not a tattoo, it’s a seal, the one he had used to turn back in time.

Itachi swears his heart stops.

°°°

Hiruzen feels worn out to his very bones. It’s not a pleasant sensation. He had thought that after talking with the Uchiha, he would leave the room with answers and his mind made up on whether or not he could be trusted.

Not only is he not sure if he can truly believe the man, but he also is left with a thousand questions swimming in his mind. The Uchiha knows much more than what Hiruzen had expected him to. It could be dangerous. What is all the more worrying is how accurate these information had been.

The missing-nin is right when saying that Hiruzen has already been suspicious of Danzo for a while. After all he had been the one to turn a blind eye when Danzo had ordered some Root members to assassinate him. From that point onwards, he had suspected the man to have less than honest intentions, but to actually think that he had been responsible for the disappearances, going as far as to work with Orochimaru...

These were serious accusations of a horrible betrayal that Hiruzen could not simply ignore. He had been lenient when it had come to Danzo for a few years too many.

It’s with a sigh that he pushes the door to his office open, his eyes immediately landing on the two men waiting for him there, seated on the wooden chairs facing his desk.

Kakashi looks terrible. Even if he had been administered with the antidote very quickly, it would take more than just an hour for the poison to completely leave his blood streams, and the deep bags under his eyes as well as the unnatural pallor of his face are telltale signs of how exhausted he must be.

This kid needs to catch a break.

Surprisingly enough, the man seated next to Kakashi looks just as tired, if not more. Hiruzen has never seen Jiraiya so exhausted. His usually cleanly shaved beard is starting to grow long enough for him to finally look his age. The years have been kind to him, but there are wrinkles now appearing on his face, made even more visible by the sunken state of his cheeks. Hiruzen needs to stop wearing both of them out so much.

“The Uchiha woke up,” he says as a way to start the meeting before slumping down on the chair behind his desk. The two men’s focus immediately narrows down to him.

“You should have called for me, I want to hear what he has to say,” Jiraiya says reproachfully, a forced smile on his face. Even in his current state of exhaustion, his positivity remains.

“You will eventually, for now we seem to have another issue on our hands.” At Hiruzen’s words, Jiraiya’s smile disappears instantly to be replaced with a worried expression.

Kakashi remains silent, but Hiruzen can feel his one single eye boring a hole though his skull.

“The Uchiha had very interesting things to say about Danzo,” Hiruzen states and both men’s face twist into confused frowns.

“Danzo?” Kakashi echoes dubiously. It surely would sound to be an issue brought up out of nowhere for the young man who isn’t aware of the repeated assassination attempts, but Jiraiya knows and it’s to him that Hizuren directs his next sentence.

“It would seem that he has been interfering a lot more than expected, if the Uchiha’s claims are to be believed,” Hiruzen explains, and if Kakashi’s confused expression doesn’t clear, Jiraiya’s certainly does.

“Has he been meddling with affairs related to Ame as I feared?” Jiraiya asks, his voice filled with steel and fire.

The matter of his three apprentices is still a tender subject and with what the Uchiha had just told him about Danzo, it would’t be far fetched to imagine he had something to do with the three kids' deaths. Still, Hiruzen doesn’t allow that thought to faze him.

“This has yet to be confirmed,” he dismisses before shifting his gaze to Kakashi. “The Uchiha told me that the Root member you brought back with you had been ordered to steal your Sharingan.”

Kakashi’s eye widens slightly and his gaze wavers, shifting down to his still bloodied hands resting in his lap. The Root member’s blood, most likely. The kid had been bleeding profusely from his shoulder when the young blonde boy had brought him in, Kakashi on his heels with the poisoned Uchiha on his back.

“Yes, I thought he had been sent as backup but he attacked me. I cannot say for sure if he was truly targeting the Sharingan, but it certainly looked that way,” Kakashi says, eyes stuck to his hands.

Hiruzen nods. He can’t overlook Danzo ordering a Konoha Shinobi to attack another, especially if the motive was to steal the Sharingan for himself. Once the Root boy wakes up, Hiruzen will make sure to question him as well. He needs as much information as possible before he decides on how to proceed.

“Pardon me, but what’s the link between Kakashi’s mission, the Uchiha, and Danzo’s potential betrayal?” Jiraiya asks, cutting the chase and effectively bringing Hiruzen out of his musings.

“The Uchiha claims Danzo is hiding Sharingans under his bandages. It would seem that the next one he wanted for his collection was Kakashi’s.” The Hokage’s words stun the two men in silence. Jiraiya has the decency to try to hide his surprise, but Kakashi’s mouth hangs open and his eye blinks rapidly in confusion.

Jiraiya hums, a hand rising to touch his chin, fingers brushing against his growing beard. It’s a gesture he has definitely picked up from Hiruzen, and it makes the man’s chest bloom with mixed feelings. He had never noticed his student growing old so fast. It is only yet another piece of evidence of how ancient Hiruzen himself is.

“If this is true, it is a betrayal we cannot ignore,” Jiraiya says with a pensive frown. His words make Hiruzen sigh. If only that was all there is.

“That’s no the end of the Uchiha’s claims. He is also under the impression that Danzo is responsible for the recurring disappearances, letting Orochimaru experiment on our citizens.” At this, Kakashi’s hanging mouth finally closes, and his eye glows with a determination Hiruzen hasn’t seen on his face in a while.

“Kinoe,” he suddenly says, making both men shift the look at him, “the Root member who attacked me. He is probably one of the kidnapped children that Orochimaru experimented on. He can use Wood Release.”

Once the words register, Hiruzen feels a very strong and very painful headache incoming. This is so much worse than he had anticipated. Jiraiya seems to think as much because he sighs deeply, a hand rising to rub over his tired eyes. The two of them had already discussed the possibility of Danzo being involved in dark secrets, but Hiruzen had wanted to believe that the man he had grown up with couldn’t possible had wandered so far off the right path.

He doesn’t drink often, but Hiruzen suddenly craves a cup of very strong sake.

“What are you going to do?” Jiraiya asks, and Hiruzen looks away from his worried frown to stare at the portraits of the former Hokage. His eyes land on the youthful face of Minato, and not for the first time since he had to take back the hat, he wonders what the Fourth would have done in his stead.

Hiruzen takes his decision, and it’s with a sigh that he voices it to the other two men.

“I’m going to have my most loyal Anbus look into records. If what the Uchiha said is true, I will have Danzo stripped of his functions, as well as his shinobi status. He will be allowed to choose between death and exile.”

His words makes a heavy silence crash into the room. It resonates louder than Hiruzen had expected, and he feels his blood run hot in his veins. A Hokage has to take drastic decisions, and he has been too kind with matters regarding Danzo. He isn’t in a place where he can allow kindness.

He is a ruler, and he can’t tolerate anyone betraying him as much and as consistently as Danzo has apparently been.

Deep down, Hiruzen hopes Danzo will chose to leave Konoha and lay low. As far apart as they had grown during the last few years, the two of them had known each other since they were three feet tall, and in his own, distorted and corrupted way, Danzo only ever had Konoha’s best interests at heart. But if he chooses exile, it would leave the question of whether the Uchiha would still accept the deal.

He had said he wanted Danzo’s head, but Hiruzen couldn’t simply comply to such a harsh request. He needs to be the one to make demands and hold power over the Uchiha, or he would be the submissive party in their exchanges. He can't allow that.

“What do we do with the Uchiha?” Kakashi suddenly asks, breaking the tense atmosphere that had settled and bringing Hiruzen out of his thoughts.

“He is willing to cooperate if Danzo dies,” Hiruzen answers without missing a beat and Jiraiya’s face immediately slackens into a shocked frown.

“Why offer Danzo the possibility to leave, then?” Kakashi inquires before Jiraiya can recover from his surprise.

“Power dynamics,” Jiraiya dismisses with a wave of his hand in Kakashi’s direction, “no matter that, what in the world does the Uchiha gain by seeing Danzo die? He is a threat to Konoha, not to him.”

Hiruzen should have known that Jiraiya would immediately dive into the crack. Hiruzen doesn’t get it either. Well, he could understand that letting live a man sporting the Sharingan when he isn’t an Uchiha is an offence to the entire clan, but this one Uchiha isn’t from Konoha, he has no ties to the clan and he wouldn’t gain anything from Danzo’s death besides revenge for some distant cousins.

Hiruzen sighs.

“I’m still figuring that part out,” he admits reluctantly and Jiraiya’s mouth immediately morphs into a thin line. He should know better than to take action without taking into account all the variables, but in the end what does it matter why the Uchiha wants Danzo dead? If even only half of what he had said about Danzo is true, then they need to get rid of him anyway and if Hiruzen can convince the Uchiha to settle for the man’s exile instead of his death, they would have access to the Uchiha seemingly endless intel.

It still raises the question of how exactly he has gotten his hands on said information, but Hiruzen knows he won’t get to entirely piece back together the puzzle that this man is just yet. He needs to be patient, and attentive. These are details that he could take care of later.

For now, he has to either clear Danzo’s name or get rid of him. Then would come the Akatsuki. As long as Hiruzen can take advantage of the Uchiha, he would come out on top in the end.

°°°

Kakashi leaves the Hokage’s office with a foul taste in his mouth. He had no idea that Danzo was this rotten, and he feels suddenly glad that Sarutobi has never forced him into political matters. He is unfitted for all these secrets and betrayals.

It has been decided that for the time being, Kinoe will be pulled out of Root and join the Anbu under Kakashi’s command as soon as he wakes up. It leaves Kakashi with nothing to do but wait for the Hokage to take care of Danzo. Once that is done and dealt with, the Uchiha will be an ally.

It makes Kakashi feel all kinds of ways that are mostly very troublesome. He still isn’t over the fact that the man had saved his life twice, before suddenly knocking him out only to reappear out of nowhere and save his life again. He can’t get out of his head the sight of the man’s motionless body as he laid in the grass, the luscious bright green clashing terribly with the rapidly growing pallor of his face. Who in their right mind doesn’t take the antidote to a poison that could kill them?

Kakashi feels indebted in a way he has rarely been before and it makes him extremely uncomfortable. He feels guilty even. He remembers Deidara’s terrified face as he had dragged Kinoe to Konoha, his eyes stuck to the Uchiha’s face the entire way back. Kakashi sighs. He’ll stop by the Uchiha’s room, say thanks, maybe even apologize to the kid if he isn’t too annoying, and then move on with his life.

He doubts the Hokage will allow him to go on Akatsuki-related missions, and with Kinoe being entrusted to him, Kakashi won’t have the time to be distracted by the Uchiha.

Kakashi brought him to Konoha, and that somehow eases a pain in his chest that is a few years old. He won’t allow himself to dwell too much on the fact that if Obito had survived, he would be around the man’s age. He won’t let himself wonder if he’d look like this foreign Uchiha.

Kakashi breathes in deeply, and clears his mind as he exhales. He is tired, and he knows the second his back hits a mattress, he is going to sleep for next two days. He’s going to be late handing in his written report. Again.

Kakashi takes the stairs down and walks into the left corridor, headed for the room he had dropped the unconscious Uchiha in barely two hours ago. When he reaches the door, he takes a second to gather himself, and to breathe in deeply, the scents of the hospital barely filtered by his woollen mask. It smells of antiseptics and blood, a mix that has always put him on edge.

As he breathes out, Kakashi raises a hand to knock on the door. He doesn’t wait for an answer to step inside the room and he instantly feels ill-at-ease with the tense air hanging around their foreign guests. The Uchiha is sitting up in his bed, back propped up against the barren wall of the room. He isn’t wearing a shirt, and Kakashi’s eye lingers for a second too long on the man’s chest partially covered in scrolls but not so much that they hide the few scars curling around his ribs and arms. It’s obvious for a Shinobi to have some, but Kakashi still feels surprised by how vulnerable it makes the Uchiha seem.

That feeling is most definitely reinforced by how skinny the man is. Kakashi considers himself to be rather lean, even thin, but the Uchiha is scrawny in a way that screams barely recovered illness.

Kakashi tears his eye away from the man’s chest at last and closes the door behind him as he raises his gaze to look at the man’s face. His eyes are black, the Sharingan blocked by the scrolls, but there’s still light in them as he stares back at Kakashi, unafraid.

There are a few blades of grass lost amongst the dark silky strands of the man’s hair, and Kakashi would find it funny if not for the withering glare the child seated on the chair next to the bed levels at him. Deidara is studying him silently with barely concealed resentment and hatred, but Kakashi can’t blame him. If he had been made prisoner in a foreign country by the guy he had saved three times, he’d be pretty pissed too.

Kakashi clears his throat as he leans against the door. He notices that Deidara’s chakra isn’t sealed and that the Uchiha’s hands aren’t bound. It’s a peace offering from the Hokage, but it also makes them dangerous enough that Kakashi won’t risk coming any closer.

“What the fuck do you want?” Deidara asks in a biting voice as he crosses his arms in front of his chest, the gesture as childish as it is uselessly defensive.

“Deidara,” the Uchiha warns in a low voice, giving the kid a side along reproving glance.

Kakashi sighs. He is too tired to even rise to Deidara’s taunts and lose his temper.

“I just wanted to thank you for saving my life,” he says in a low voice, words careful and measured.

Deidara cocks an eyebrow, he doesn’t seem to buy Kakashi’s words but Kakashi doesn’t really care about the kid anyway. His gaze shifts to the Uchiha to find that the man is studying him silently, face carefully blank but not cold, simply considering, before it slowly breaks into the smallest of smiles. It doesn’t reach all the way to the Uchiha’s eyes but it seems genuine enough and Kakashi feels his breath stutter for a second, struck with a sudden realisation.

The Uchiha is beautiful, in the way that only deadly things can be. There is a hint of danger, a refined brutality to his lithe body that clashes oddly with the softness of the curve of his lips.

Kakashi’s eye registers the movement of the man’s mouth, but the hint of pink that flashes between his parted lips makes Kakashi’s brain shut down for a second and he doesn’t hear the words.

“Sorry, what?” He says, refusing to acknowledge the way his voice breaks and how his face is growing redder by the second.

“He said ‘you’re welcome’, are you deaf now, as well as dumb?” The kid challenges and Kakashi forgets his embarrassment to glare at Deidara.

He grits his teeth, breathes in and out to calm himself and keeps his gaze on the blonde kid instead of the Uchiha since it’s probably a terrible idea to look at him when he feels so mortified with his hormone-raging body’s reaction.

At last, Kakashi sighs and he gives the kid a roll of his one visible eye when Deidara sticks his tongue at him. He grabs the handle of the door without turning around, not trusting enough to give either of them his back, and he steps out without another word. He has told them what he had come for, and he really doesn’t feel up to confronting either of them a second longer.

He is tired, and he wants his bed so he is going to go back to his house and spend a long time asleep so that he doesn’t have to think about anything else and conveniently avoid mulling over his awkwardness. Still, when Kakashi is finally back in his room, safely tucked under the covers of his bed, he can’t hold his mind back from wandering.

He had thought that he’d fall asleep the second he lied down, but he tosses and turns, mind going from the discussion in the Hokage office, to Kinoe’s attack, and finally to the Uchiha. It’s too much information in such a short amount of time and it takes him long hours in the dark of the night to process through all of them. It’s quite a while later that a restless sleep finally finds him, his mind tired of over-analysing the man’s intentions and what they could mean for Konoha.

He dreams of black hair and even darker eyes.

Chapter Text

When Kakashi wakes up the next morning, it is to the frantic sound of someone pounding on his door so loudly that he fears it might break down. He barely has time to put on his ninja outfit that three Anbu come crashing in his living room. They all try to speak at the same time and it comes out in a confusing mess of barely understandable words. He makes out “Danzo” and “ran away”, and Kakashi already knows that his day is going to suck.

The drowsiness brought about by a terrible night’s sleep isn’t completely out of his system when he makes it inside the Hokage’s office, but he can’t waste time being unfocused when the Hokage is so obviously stressed out.

With the help of his most trusted Root members, Danzo has managed to get away before they could get to him, and he hasn’t forgotten to burn any piece of evidence that could have incriminated him when he disappeared. That left hundreds of Root ninjas without their Leader, and Konoha without its only way of trading information with their tentative ally, Kuro Uchiha.

The man had been clear, Danzo’s head in exchange for information concerning Akatsuki so Kakashi is rightfully terrified to think about what may happen next with their half of the bargain now unable to be completed.

The Hokage is pacing, taking rapid strikes in the office without even stopping for half a second as he walks around Kakashi and Jiraiya, the Sannin sitting equally silently. They both wear heavy frowns and all Kakashi can do is sit uncomfortably in the tense atmosphere, his brain running a mile a second to try and find a way to alleviate his own anxiety.

“So, what do we do about the Uchiha?” He finally asks, his voice overly loud in the otherwise silent room and both men’s head immediately snap up in his direction.

“We don’t do anything about the Uchiha, finding Danzo is top priority,” the Hokage dismisses easily, but Jiraiya doesn’t seem to agree.

“He isn’t going to accept this,” he says with a shake of his head.

“Actually, he doesn’t seem nearly as bothered as we are,” Sarutobi answers swiftly, finally stopping his pacing to stand in front of the two of them, eyes grave.

Jiraiya falls silent as he glances at the Hokage, a pensive expression on his face as he analyses the old man’s words while Kakashi’s features remain stuck in a confused frown.

“I told him earlier that Danzo had ran away, he simply said it had to be expected and was satisfied enough with him being out of Konoha for the time being,” Sarutobi explains calmly, but his monotonous tone and distrustful gaze denotes just how exactly he feels about the Uchiha’s statement. The Hokage doesn’t believe that one second, and Kakashi doesn’t either.

“For the time being?” Jiraiya echoes, his face disbelieving, “does he plan on coercing us into agreeing to bigger conditions once he has given us the intel we need?”

The Hokage sighs as he walks away from them to sit on his chair behind the desk. The man rubs a wrinkled hand over tired eyes before shaking his head.

“I don’t think so. For now, I have decided to release him and prove our willingness to collaborate by providing him with housing accommodations.”

The Hokage must have lost his mind.

“What were you thinking?!” Jiraiya shrieks, tone not yet accusing but clearly disapproving. He rises up from his chair to stand at the old man’s desk, his arms crossed over his chest. “We don’t know who he is or where he’s from, and you’ve let him go unrestrained to roam Konoha?”

“Jiraiya, we’re in no position to demand anything from him when we’ve let what he wanted from us slip through our fingers. We need his help if we want to take Akatsuki out,” the Hokage calmly retorts as he surveys the man towering over him.

“I hope you’ve got your best Anbu on him at all times,” Jiraiya sighs, walking away from the desk to drop back down on the chair, a deep frown marring his features.

“Not yet,” Sarutobi answers before sending a meaningful glance to Kakashi.

Oh no. Oh no.

Jiraiya follows the Hokage’s eyes to stare at Kakashi as well, and Kakashi really wishes from the ground to swallow him right where he is. Maybe he should have stopped asking so forcefully to be given difficult missions because that one was definitely going to be unpleasant.

“I have currently three Anbus taking turns to keep me informed of his position at all times while never leaving him unsupervised. Kakashi I want you to follow him as well.”

Kakashi swallows down a defeated groan. The Hokage surely doesn’t need to waste four Anbus on watching over one single ninja.

“Shouldn’t three be enough?” He asks in a small voice, wincing when he catches the grim line of the Hokage’s face once the words are out of his mouth.

“I want you to follow him around, not shadow him. Keep him company, make him feel welcomed in our village. It’s a different thing knowing there are people watching you from having someone stuck to your sides at all times. My Anbus can’t get close enough to hear him or register smaller gestures,” Sarutobi states, and it leaves Kakashi no room for arguing.

He sighs. Hopefully, Deidara and the Uchiha don’t spend all their time together, because Kakashi isn’t sure he’ll be able to deal with the kid for hours on end.

°°°

Itachi has been rummaging through the restricted section of the seals for an hour now, and he can’t find anything about the Time-Turning Jutsu he used. The Anbus watching him are careful and keep their distances, probably in hope that Itachi wouldn’t notice them, but it also means they won’t follow him into buildings and Itachi has always been very good at going around unnoticed.

Accessing the restricted section had not proven to be extremely difficult, especially considering that he’s been there before, and that he knows every single Konoha surveillance trick. Still, if he spends any longer here, the Anbus might start to get suspicious. Besides, he isn’t getting anywhere.

He has searched thoroughly, but the scroll is gone, and he couldn’t find the seal on his back depicted anywhere. He probably should have read that scroll thouroughly before he used it, but it had been very long, and very complicated, and he had had very, very little time to act. He merely hopes that whatever that seal did to him, it isn’t lethal because dying from a side effect at this point would just be lame.

Itachi sighs and cloaks himself, getting his breathing under control and after careful inspection, slips out of the room once he hears the next patrol leaving the corridor. He makes a swift job of leaving the restricted floor and he picks a random empty room to uncloak himself. Within the next minute, he is out of the seal station with no one to suspect he had roamed places where he wasn’t allowed in.

Shinobi stare as he walks down the main street. Civilians wouldn’t exactly pay attention to a new face, but trained Ninja sure do. It makes him uncomfortable. After taking off the chakra-muting seals, the Hokage had offered a standard shinobi equipment, minus the headband, effectively outing him as a Ninja to anyone who bothers to look for more than a second at him. It makes moving around stressful, and Itachi can't even fully enjoy the simplicity of being allowed to walk in Konoha.

It has been many years since he last was able to take a stroll down the main street, surrounded by the various smells of food stalls and tea shops. It is a bright day, the sun casting deep shadows over the tall buildings that Itachi had grown up surrounded by. There is a hanging sense of happiness in Konoha that Itachi never really had the time to pay any attention to, but tries to, now. Even when the war had been over, he hadn’t been allowed any rest from missions and would rarely get to simply walk. It feels good, relaxing, and it would be even more so if his presence didn’t make others feel so on edge.

Itachi takes a left up to the quiet road that leads to the Memorial Stone. There are less people here, mostly children and elders who enjoy the warmth of the sun. Itachi can barely feel the presence of the Anbus following him. He can’t tell how many of them are there, and the second he loses his intense focus on their chakra signature, they fade out to mesh with the others that populate Konoha.

There is a warmth in the city that isn’t only due to the sun shining down on the city, showering it with its rays. There is the sound of laughter and the singing of birds, people going on about their own businesses, entirely unaware of how terrible things had gotten in a different time. Itachi will make sure that it never happens again.

Seeing Konoha in its beauty and tranquillity doesn’t feel as bitter as he had expected it would be. He feels almost content to be here, it soothes a wound that is a decade old and its a powerful reminder of why exactly he has come back. Danzo may have managed to slip through his fingers, but he could take care of the man later. For now, Sasuke is safe, and Itachi is free to focus on Akatsuki.

Itachi glances back down from the cloudless sky to stare at the Memorial Stone. It reflects the sun’s light like a pristine mirror, the ridges of the carved names casting deep shadows over the dark rock. He has never liked to spend much time around the stone, too grim of a reminder of just how many people he had lost to the war, especially after Shisui’s death. It really had been the last straw for him, pushing him over the edge of a cliff he had been about to fall head into ever since he had joined the Anbu.

The things he had done and seen there were forever engraved in his mind, but Shisui’s presence had been like a balm of soft and bright happiness that had held him together. Once his light had been gone, Itachi simply broke into a mess of darkness.

He raises his hand and brushes a finger over foreign names of people he has never even met before, until it stops on Obito Uchiha’s. He feels a shiver run down his spine, the name alone calling forth terrible memories of his time spent with Akatsuki. Itachi activates his Sharingan to burn the sight of the name into his memory, vowing to himself, but also to all of his precious people that he left behind, to stop Obito.

A sudden shift in the air makes Itachi wrench his hand away from the stone as he whirls around, long hair obstructing his vision for half a second before the slouching frame of a worn Kakashi comes into view. The young man’s eye meets his and he pales slightly, rising both hands in surrender.

“It’s just me, drop the Sharingan please,” he says and Itachi blinks, hardly aware that he even left it activated. He sighs and closes his eyes as the chakra leaves them.

When he opens his eyes again, the world doesn’t seem as sharp, but it is a lot more colourful and Itachi is yet again reminded of how easy it had been for him to forget what the world looked like without his Sharingan, over-using it to the point of going blind.

“You know some of these people?” Kakashi asks with a jerk of his head towards the stone, his tone is mild, probably going for a friendly chat but Itachi knows better. He knows exactly why Kakashi is here.

He had found it weird that the Hokage would only assign Anbus to watch him from afar. Giving him a babysitter seemed a lot more like something Sarutobi would do.

“No,” Itachi lies easily.

It would be too much of a giveaway if he said he used to know Konoha-nin. He needs to keep his ties to the Hidden Leaf Village as scarce as possible.

Kakashi hums as he comes closer and stands besides Itachi. He is looking down at the stone, where Itachi’s fingers had been a few seconds ago, and he knows without a doubt whose name the younger man is looking at. Kakashi is trying hard to keep his face neutral as he studies the one name that probably haunts him to this day, but Itachi can easily catch the tight lines around his one visible eye.

It’s probably an unconscious gesture but as he lifts a hand to run through his silver hair, his gloved fingers catch on his Hitai-Ite for just half a second, pressing into the metal hiding his gifted Sharingan. For Kakashi, it is probably more of a curse.

Itachi sighs and steps away from the Memorial Stone, a heavy feeling in the pit of his stomach. For someone as accustomed to death as he is, he is still terrible at dealing with loss, especially other people’s and he can’t find any word of comfort to offer to Kakashi. Nothing he could say would make the pain go away, not a deeply rooted one like the one the young man hides in his heart.

Itachi walks away without looking back, but seconds later he can hear his own steps echoed as Kakashi joins him on his journey back to the apartment he shares with Deidara. He doesn’t bother asking his babysitter why he is here. It’s obvious enough, and with how closed off and hollow Kakashi’s face is, it’s probably better to give him a moment to himself.

Unfortunately, Kakashi doesn’t leave once Itachi reaches the apartment and picks up Deidara for their daily spar. He stays through the training, watching them from a close distance that sets Deidara on edge a lot more than the kid would like to admit.

He complains that the wind his blowing hair in his face, and that’s why he can land any punches, then he says the sun blinds him when he throws shurikens but through all his brashness, Itachi can see the way the kid keeps glancing back warily over his shoulder to stare not so discreetly at their guest.

Itachi isn’t feeling as bothered as Deidara by the onlooker, but it does makes him feel more self-aware. He can’t allow to slip up in Kakashi’s presence and if he sticks to their sides for a while, it will hinder Itachi’s plans. He had meant to look into other parts of the Seal Station and hopefully find what the hell exactly is on his back, but that can only be done if he’s alone.

He guesses that looking into Root reports at their hidden headquarters to find the smallest of hints of where Danzo might have gone is also something he’ll have to postpone, just like his research in Orochimaru’s lab.

Deidara suddenly trips over his own feet with a loud yelp, crashing head first onto the ground.

“T-T-There was a root!” He cries, face red with shame and embarrassment as he struggles back to his feet, a few smudges of dirt on his face. Kakashi snorts loud enough for both of them to hear him and Deidara whirls around, fists tightly clenched as he stomps over to the ninja.

“Whatcha laughin’ at, fuckface?” He roars, the insult forcing another snort out of Kakashi as he studies Deidara, the twinkling mirth in his one visible eye as plain as day.

“A root? There are no trees around,” he says in a monotone voice that does a bad job of covering his obvious amusement.

Deidara blushes crimson and splutters, obviously offended and at a loss of anything to say to defend his pride, and chooses instead to grab a rock and throw it at Kakashi’s face. The man easily evades it, his eye widening dramatically, a hand splayed over his heart as if deeply hurt.

“A surprise attack! How mean!” He bemoans and Itachi doesn’t even bother holding Deidara back when the rid launches himself at Kakashi, Chakra already gathering in his palms.

He turns away from the two of them and walks up to one of the three wooden pillar on the training ground and hides in its shadow. Seconds later, the sound of detonation reaches his ears and he sighs.

It’s going to be a long week.

°°°

Kakashi swears under his breath.

One minute, that’s how long it took for the Uchiha to completely disappear.

Kakashi can’t find him anywhere, and he has looked in every single place he could come up with, from the dango shop to the dumpsters behind the Academy, going as far as to uncover his Sharingan to help in his search.

Kakashi had received one of Konoha’s messenger bird, the small scribbled words telling him to go to the Hokage’s office and to bring Uchiha Kuro along, and when he had looked up, he had found the road empty of the man’s presence.

He had done quite a good job of sticking to the Uchiha’s sides over the past three days, barely catching any sleep because he had tried to keep up with the man’s impossible schedule. It’s as if he simply doesn’t need sleep, always up with the sun and roaming around Konoha as soon as the first rays shine upon the village.

Thankfully, Deidara mostly keeps to himself, only joining the Uchiha for their daily spars so Kakashi doesn’t have to hand around the kid for too long, but staying close to the man is just nerve-wracking. He hadn’t done one single threatening move against him, mostly choosing to completely ignore his presence, but Kakashi couldn’t help but feel on edge, always awfully aware of the few seconds when their eyes briefly meet, each time expecting to be met with pools of red instead of the raven black his eye always land on.

Kakashi sighs deeply.

The Hokage is expecting them and even if he has a tendency to be always quite late, he doesn’t think the old man will find it funny this time - not that he ever does. The message did mention to hurry.

He squints as he looks up at the sun, high above the stone face mountain. It’s almost noon, and he should have been in the Hokage’s office over an hour ago. His gaze settles on the face of the Fourth Hokage, a pin prickle of brief pain striking his heart for half a second and his jaw clenches.

Stone is an awful choice of material to carve out Minato’s face, too cold and bland to compare to the man’s warmth and gentle personality. Kakashi still longs for his teacher and guide’s advices, for his presence and kind words. He hasn’t yet stopped thinking about how his life could have gone if he hadn’t lost both his best friend and his mentor in such rapid succession, but wondering about this life he’ll never get to know only pains him. That’s why he avoids this mountain, just like he avoids Minato’s son. They look too much alike and Kakashi is terrified of meeting the kid’s ocean eyes.

He is about to tear his eyes away when he notices movement atop the mountain and he pushes more chakra into his Sharingan to sharpen his vision. It looks like someone is up there, but it could as well be a trick of light.

Kakashi is tired, he has ran all over Konoha and he doesn’t think he has much to lose if he wastes another few minutes looking up the mountain, and a few Shunshin later, he goes from looking up at the stone faces from glancing down at the village of the Hidden Leaf in its entirety.

It comes as a complete surprise to see the Uchiha sitting there, legs dangling in the void, perfectly content to simply lounge in the sun, looking down at the bustling city of Konoha with a peaceful smile on his face.

Kakashi has half a mind set on being angry and frustrated at the man for making him waste so much of his time and energy, but the second his eyes land on him, every single word of reproach he had carefully prepared vanishes and his mind goes blank.

It's impossible that the Uchiha hasn't noticed him, he is too good of a shinobi for that, but he remains impassive, lips set in a gentle smile that Kakashi has never seen on the man's face before. He looks entirely at ease, not scared of the gigantic height looming under him, one foot lazily balancing in the precipice.

His trademark charcoal hair bristles with the strong breeze and his clothes ruffle. If the wind was only that much stronger, he could probably fall but the prospect doesn't seem to scare him in the slightest. At last, he glances back, heads turning slightly so that his eyes land on Kakashi from above his shoulder.

"Not joining me this time?" He asks, face still calm and impassive, but there’s a very faint playfulness that could also be exasperation in his voice that roots Kakashi to the spot.

He hadn’t thought that his presence bothered the Uchiha, if anything, he had looked entirely unconcerned but now that Kakashi sees what he had chosen to do once left alone, he feels like he is intruding on a private moment of peacefulness that most shinobi don’t get to enjoy.

He feels a little bad.

Kakashi clears his throat and glances away, unable to formulate an answer as long as his eyes are stuck on the man.

"That's not why I came to find you," Kakashi says but he takes a step forward anyway until he looms over the void, his eyes immediately attracted to the small houses deep down.

He isn't scared of heights in the least, but the sight will forever be impressive. He sits down next to the Uchiha in silence, keeping his legs crossed in front of him as to not tempt fate were the wind to pick up in strength.

He glances sideways at the man next to him only to find that the Uchiha isn't studying him like Kakashi would have thought him to, the way he often does, with intense and sharp eyes as if he were doubting Kakashi's friendliness.

Instead, the man is gazing up at the sky, eyes slightly squinted as he stares at the sun. Kakashi glances up as well and he is met with a breathtaking swathe of endless blue. It's a cloudless morning and the sun is shining bright, illuminating the green of Konoha's forest more than ever.

How many times had he looked at the sun to check the time today and didn’t notice such a beautiful view? Actually, how many years has it been since he last took some time to enjoy simple pleasures?

The thought brings an unpleasant wave of self awareness.

He feels the way his heart is beating slightly fast than usual, he hears his deep breathing, he feels the ache in his limbs, but he also feels the warmth of the sun on his face, the way the wind caresses his face softly and the smell of nature.

"Konoha is so peaceful," the Uchiha says, breaking Kakashi’s focus.

"Would you like it better if it wasn't?" Kakashi questions as he glances back at the man.

The Uchiha glances away from the sun to look at Kakashi's face. There is the smallest hint of a smile on his face and Kakashi feels a little light headed to be the one the man directs it to.

"No, I like it this way, it's nice," The Uchiha says, his voice only a whisper, the words almost lost to the wind.

Kakashi stares, he tries to analyse the sentence to find a hidden meaning but there doesn't seem to be any. Uchiha Kuro is probably one of the strongest shinobi Kakashi knows, he is deadly and merciless, precise and effective. Kakashi has seen him kill two men and he probably has ended a thousand more lives, but he also saved one helpless little girl.

In the end, as terrifying as he is, he is also no more than a man. A kind man who takes some of his day to simply enjoy the beauty of life, as fleeting as it is. It is just as sobering as it is bewitching.

Kakashi doesn't think he has ever met someone who seems as complex and yet so simple. There is no end to the secrets this man holds, but under all that raw strength and deadly beauty, there is also a twisted kind of purity that Kakashi himself hasn’t been able to retain within him.

He can’t help but wonder what it is exactly that has happened to the Uchiha for him to be the way he is, and when their eyes meet again, Kakashi suddenly feels breathless in a way he never has before. It makes his chest hurt a bit.

Kakashi yanks his eyes away forcing his sight back down to look at the citizens of Konoha instead. He doesn't think he could handle looking into the Uchiha’s eyes too long. They are a weapon, but more than their deadliness, it’s their beauty that makes him uncomfortable.

"The Hokage has summoned us," he mumbles, almost sad to break the moment to force them back into the reality of their lives.

They are shinobi, first and foremost.

The Uchiha sighs, but stands up all the same. The smile is gone from his face and Kakashi looks at him long enough to catch the curt nod he gives him.

"I'll be on my way, then," he says in a neutral voice that is at odds with how he had looked just seconds ago but before Kakashi can mourn the loss of this vision or even say a word, the Uchiha has teleported away, leaving him alone atop the mountain.

Suddenly, the wind feels a little colder, and the sun a little less warm, and Kakashi doesn’t waste another second before he follows suit.

°°°

Itachi sighs as he lands atop the Academy, gathering enough Chakra for another Shunshin that will leave him standing in front of the Hokage’s office. He had never thought that he could be one to enjoy the wasted time in between missions but after spending three whole days doing nothing but pointless yet oddly enjoyable things, he has developed a new perspective on the matter.

He still feels uneasy that he had spent so long doing nothing productive, but it had been a welcomed change of pace to be able to enjoy life, if only for a few days. He has a goal he needs to accomplish and he will remained focus on seeing to it.

He feels slightly mellowed out, a bone-deep feeling of satisfaction at finally being able to rest and sleep at night without fearing for his life.

But now is not the time for resting any more, and Itachi is ready to pick up his quest and even more determined to accomplish all of his objectives.

He stands for a few minutes in front of the Hokage’s door, giving himself a moment to gather his thoughts and be ready for anything that the cunning old man might throw at his face when the air shifts faintly, a small sparks of chakra the only indication of a newly added presence in the corridor.

Kakashi walks up to him, avoiding his eyes on purpose as he makes a show of staring at the door very determinedly. He suddenly looks very awkward and uncomfortable with his presence, as if he hadn’t spent countless hours shadowing him and poking fun at Deidara.

With a shake of his head, Itachi raises a hand to knock at the door, and waits until he hears the Hokage’s voice from inside the room to open the door and step inside, Kakashi on his heels.

Neither of them get to sit down and the door is barely closed before the Hokage immediately speaks up.

“Kuro, I would like to move on with the eradication of Akatsuki. We do not have Danzo, but we cannot waste more time. I have received word that a Jinchuuriki from Kumo disappeared.”

Itachi frowns. The Nibi and the Hachibi hadn’t been attacked for many years, deemed too well protected in the Land of Lighting. Obito must be growing reckless, probably more frantic than before after receiving word from Zetsu that someone is hunting them.

“Kumo is too far away, we won’t make it in time to save the Jinchuuriki,” Itachi answers in a low voice, already thinking about Obito’s next target.

“Do you know where they might strike next?” The Hokage asks, and Itachi closes his eyes to focus.

Obito’s plans have changed, that much is obvious. He can’t possibly know which one they will be going for next, but chances are that it will be a weaker Jinchuuriki. Taking one from Kumo must have resulted in casualties for Akatsuki, or at least wounds. They won’t come for the Kyuubi or the other Kumo Jinchuuriki right away.

That leaves the Ichibi, the Sanbi and the Rokubi. Itachi suddenly opens his eyes, mind reeling from the sudden thought.

“The current Mizukage is the Sanbi, he has been put under a Genjutsu by the head of Akatsuki,” he says, and he can see both men’s eyes widen.

“That puts the Jinchuuriki of the Rokubi in a very precarious position.”

Obito can come pick up the Rokubi whenever he wants, Yagura will serve the kid on a silver plate. Utakata must be around thirteen or fourteen, and with the help of the Mizukage, taking the young boy away from Kiri will be awfully easy.

The Hokage seems to think for a few seconds and Itachi is convinced that the old man is wondering how he knows about that, but he chooses not to question it. Sarutobi remains silent for a few more seconds, eyes bright and calculating as he looks for the best course of action.

“I will send a team to Kiri. If the Genjutsu is broken, the Mizukage will make sure to protect both the Sanbi and the Rokubi, I’m sure,” the Hokage says with a glance at Itachi, one eyebrow raised as if to ask confirmation and Itachi nods.

Yagura is a powerful man, and a dedicated Mizukage. The only reason his reign ended up being seen as the worst in the history of Kiri had been because of what Obito had forced him to do through the Genjutsu. If it is broken, the Mizukage will most definitely be able to protect the Bijuus.

“Then it’s decided. We need a team that can easily break the Genjutsu. How strong is it?” The old man asks as he sits behind his desk, taking out a scroll to write down the mission.

“Extremely strong,” Itachi says, he doesn’t want to divulge too many information about Obito’s identity just yet, but underestimating his skills will only result in the mission failing.

The Hokage stops writing to look at Itachi, eyes searching.

“Is it as strong as one launched by the Sharingan?” He asks and Itachi remains impassive even as his heart starts beating faster. The Hokage is smarter than what most people give him credit for.

“Stronger than most,” he answers, neither conforming nor denying that the mysterious leader could be an Uchiha.

The Hokage hums, clearly hiding his surprise if he feels any and doesn’t even miss a beat to formulate his response.

“Then I’m sending you, Kakashi and Shisui. You three are most definitely the strongest Sharingan users in Konoha right now. If anyone can cancel the Genjutsu, it’s you.”

Itachi doesn’t want to give away the slightest indication of what goes on into his mind the second Shisui’s name registers but he can’t help the slight twitch in his fingers and the way his breath catches.

It’s an unexpected turn of event, even if he should have seen it coming from a mile away. Sending the three of them is the most sensible thing to do. Itachi holds capital information that will be vital for the mission to go smoothly, Kakashi is one of the Hokage’s most trusted Anbu, and of course Shisui is their best Genjutsu user.

It is the perfect team for this mission, but the thought of having to remain in close proximity with the one person he had loved most above all else when he had never even gotten to completely finish mourning him makes his heart clench painfully. He is nowhere ready to face Shisui head on.

His mind is reeling as he thinks of what it is that he could say to convince the Hokage not to put him on the same mission as Shisui, the deeply buried feelings for his friend rising to the top so forcefully and so loudly that he almost misses Kakashi’s words.

“Is it wise to send all three of your strongest users at the same time?”

His sentence is barely finished that the Hokage bristles and retorts in the next breath, “Konoha is not defenceless, we can handle ourselves without you here. Plus, if the Akatsuki chief is as strong as Kuro says, it is safer to send our best against him.”

This effectively shuts Kakashi up and makes Itachi’s stomach churn. He can’t think of anything to say.

“Do remember that your mission will be to free the Mizukage, and nothing more. If the situation gets out of hand, prioritize your safe journey back to Konoha over breaking the Genjutsu. Loosing you would be problematic,” the old man warns, but Itachi doesn’t agree.

Itachi would rather lose a limb during this mission than face Shisui.

That’s what’s problematic.

°°°

Kakashi sighs as he heads for the main gate of Konoha, a barely awake Shisui trailing behind him. The teen stifles a yawn behind the back of his hand, tears gathering at the corners of his dark eyes.

Kakashi notices how similar the shape of Shisui’s eyes is to Kuro Uchiha’s, almond-like with long and dark lashes that flutter close to high cheek bones as the boy’s eyes close on yet another yawn. It is to be expected that they look alike, they do share genetics but it still somewhat comes as a surprise to see it so clearly.

‘Maybe they are closely related’, Kakashi can’t help but think.

“So, what’s he like this foreign Uchiha?” Shisui asks, voice kept light but Kakashi notices how the sleepiness is gone from the teen’s eyes, his posture no longer slouching as the gate finally comes into view.

Scary, is the very first word that comes into Kakashi’s mind, but he bites down the word because it doesn’t even begin to capture the complexity of the Uchiha’s character. The next adjective he comes up with is beautiful, and he is most definitely not going to say that.

“I think we can trust him, we have a common goal and he is very strong,” Kakashi says instead, choosing not to dwell on his embarrassing thoughts for too long. He’ll blame them on his ending puberty and the load of hormones that come with it.

“You think we can trust him?” Shisui echoes, a frown marring his features as he glances at Kakashi.

“He saved my life when he had no obligation to do so, and he has been nothing but amicable so far. Still doesn’t explain how in the world there’s an Uchiha out there that no one knows about, so yeah, he’s an ally for now, but stay alert,” he warns and hitches his heavy bag higher up his shoulder.

The journey to Kiri isn’t too long, most of it will be on a boat anyway, but Kakashi likes to be well prepared and he made sure to pack enough food and weapon to last him for at least the double of the expected travel time. You never know what might happen, and a shinobi is never too careful.

Still, asking them to depart before the sun rose was just plain sadistic and Kakashi makes a mental note to give in his report at least a week late. A childish retaliation, but he has to get his fun somewhere and he is convinced that their newest Uchiha won’t be the one providing it during this mission.

The second they reach the gate, Kuro flickers to existence beside them. He had probably been waiting for them for quite a while, if the dark circles under his eyes are of any indication. The man usually looks cold and aloof, but Kakashi doesn’t think he imagines the way he seems even more on guard than usual, body stiff and eyes unwaveringly sharp despite his obvious exhaustion.

“Didn’t sleep well?” Kakashi asks in lieu of a greeting, his tone polite as he tries to make conversation but the Uchiha doesn’t even spare him a glance, answering with a dismissive nod.

“Hi there, nice to meet you, I’m Shisui Uchiha,” the teen offers in a cheerful voice that sounds way too happy for the tense mood surrounding their mismatched team.

“Kuro,” the man offers back without even glancing at Shisui, the teen’s smile slightly wavering when faced with such a cold reaction.

Kakashi notices the lack of surname added, and it suddenly clicks that the man has never actually introduced himself as a member of the Uchiha clan despite looking the part. He files away that information for later consideration.

Without another word, the man turns around and heads for the road leading to Konoha’s flourishing forest and both Kakashi and Shisui follow him in a tense silence.

Kakashi really hopes the mood changes, because travelling all the way to Kiri in such an awkward silence is bound to make him go insane.

Evidently, the mood remains awfully awkward. They have been running through the Land of Fire for three days already, now close to the shore that serves as border with the Land of Water and the Uchiha has remained distant and closed off the entire time, only speaking to them when the time to assign the rounds and watch duties for the nights came.

Tonight is the Uchiha’s turn to be first watch and Kakashi stares at him as he walks away from their camp to set up a few traps further away. He can feel Shisui drilling a hole through his skull, much like he has been for the past three days but they never had managed to be alone with their mismatched rounds and so Kakashi had been left on his own to wonder what was going on the teen’s mind.

But now that they’re alone, Kakashi can feel Shisui bouncing with barely contained excitement and the second the Uchiha is out of ear shot, the teen jumps up to his feet rushes to Kakashi’s sides to whisper in his ear.

“You didn’t tell me he looked like…. Like this!” He hisses and Kakashi splutters, somehow managing not to choke on his drink as he coughs up a few times.

“What?” He squeaks, voice going a few octaves too high.

“Did you see him,” Shisui adds in a louder voice as he backs away from Kakashi to sit down with a thoughtful look on his face.

“Don’t be jealous you’re handsome too,” Kakashi croons in a falsely soft voice, but the compliment doesn’t make Shisui smile. Instead, the teen levels him with an unimpressed stare.

“I’m not jealous,” he deadpans flatly with a roll of his eyes.

It’s Kakashi’s turn to stare without a word, his judgement loud in the silence. Shisui sighs, rolls his eyes once more and Kakashi is surprised they haven’t gotten stuck behind his skull yet.

“That’s not what I meant,’ Shisui starts again, voice a lot more serious now. “Don’t you think he’s… like… familiar somehow?”

Kakashi feels his heart miss a beat and he can’t help but be reminded of how he keeps thinking of Obito every single time he stares too long at the man’s face. They don’t look much alike, the hair a shade too light and the slope of his nose too straight.

Kakashi knows that the only reason he is sees a similarity is because he is still very much haunted by his friend’s death and he isn’t about to say something so depressing aloud.

“Not really, I mean he does look like a Uchiha but beyond that...” Kakashi trails off, keeping his voice carefully neutral but Shisui isn’t paying attention to him.

His gaze is focused on the spot the man disappeared into a few minutes ago to set the traps. “What about… his chakra signature?” Shisui says but his voice is soft, tentative, and unsure. At last, he shakes his head with a small smile. “Nevermind,” he whispers as he rolls down to his side, his back to Kakashi, the conversation clearly over.

It leaves Kakashi feeling unsettled. He has a good nose, and the Sharingan allows him to see Chakra but feeling it and recognizing signatures has never been his strong suit. He hasn’t been able to notice much beyond the fact that the Uchiha’s chakra waves could be incredibly strong.

Kakashi sighs as he lets himself fall backwards, his back colliding softly with the sparse grass that grew so close to the shore.

Another day and they’d reach the border where they’d need to find a boat to finish their journey to Kiri. He needs all the sleep he can catch right now. Sleeping on a boat is never as comfortable as on a steady ground.

If getting to Kiri proves to be rather easy, it doesn’t come as a surprise to anyone, really, that it all turns wrong quite quickly once they step into the Hidden Village.

Kuro wants them to check on the Rokubi first, because there is no point to this mission if the Akatsuki has already come to pick him up so he leads them to a remote temple and as soon as he confirms the presence of the Jinchuuriki inside, they leave for the Mizukage’s manor.

Kakashi doesn’t even question anymore how the man knows where to find the Mizukage’s residence, let alone where they keep the Rokubi.

Getting inside the manor is awfully easy, but Kiri has never been known for its security beyond the mist that surrounds the village and with how hated Yagura is by his people, it’s no wonder that the number of guards inside the building is incredibly low.

If his Hokage was a boy with murderous intent that orders the graduation exam to involve children killing one another, Kakashi doesn’t think he’d want to be on guard duty either.

Once they reach a large hall built on high columns, Kuro takes a moment to remind them of the plan. They’ll meet the Mizukage, have Shisui break the Genjutsu, and then let Kuro do the talking. Kakashi feels like an extra, but it’s just as well. He really doesn’t want to be the reason why such an important mission fails were it not to go the way they expect it to.

Of course, it doesn’t go the way they expect it to.

Yagura is sitting on a large stone throne in the middle of the otherwise empty hall. He sits straight, not even the slightest twitch in his muscles and he so obviously looks like a mindless puppet that Kakashi wonders how no one questioned the man’s more than odd behaviour.

He doesn’t react even as they come close enough for Shisui’s Sharingan to activate, but the moment the teen’s eyes bleed to red and settle on Yagura, the Mizukage’s body suddenly twitches back to life, all of his muscles suddenly taut as if strings had been pulled.

He lunges for Shisui with his weapon, an elegant black rod with crooked ends, one of which gets dangerously close to violently ripping one of Shisui’s eye out.

Kakashi dashes forward but Kuro is faster and he yanks the teen backwards, gripping his shirt tightly as he pushes Shisui out of the way and rushes towards Yagura a second later.

His tanto is drawn and the weapons clash with a metallic sound that rings loudly in the empty hall. Kuro’s arms twitches under the force of the Mizukage’s powerful blow, yet the man’s face is set in a mask of indifference, the pinkish eyes devoid of any thought or emotion.

It’s a dreadful sight, and when a sea blue chakra coils around the Mizukage’s rod, Kakashi feels his blood run even colder. The air seems to cool down and the quivering breath that Kakashi draws in chills his lungs.

That’s the chakra of a Jinchuuriki upclose and it’s much more terrifying than anything Kakashi has ever faced before. It wraps itself around Yagura’ club like a snake but before it can reach Kuro’s tanto, the man backs away, landing in front of Kakashi and Shisui.

“Are you going to just stand there?” Kuro urges.

Kakashi sucks in a harsh breath that makes him cold all over and drops into a fighting stance, quickly taking a kunai out of his weapon pouch. His hands tremble but it’s a familiar ritual now to empty his mind and think of nothing but the mission, and his hands steady.

“I didn’t have enough time to break the Genjutsu,” Shisui states calmly and when Kakashi glances at him he sees that the teen doesn’t look scared in the least, his face set in a determined frown and body ready for another attack.

Kakashi hasn’t often worked with Shisui before, but the kid’s reputation precedes him and no matter how he plays the fool and acts cheerfully, he is the strongest Uchiha in Konoha and has probably done enough missions to rival even Kakashi despite being three years younger.

“The Genjutsu seems to have been set so that Yagura would attack anyone with a Sharingan,” Kuro says mildly, his detached tone at odds with the determined expression he wears.

Kakashi doesn’t have any time to ponder on the implications of this fact, though, because in the next second Yagura lunges for Shisui yet again with his club aimed at his face, obviously targeting the Sharingan.

This time, the teen is ready for the attack and he easily avoids it as he crouches down, rushing through seals as he jumps away to aim a Great Fireball at the Mizukage.

Yagura’s face remains set in stone as he traces a wide circle on the ground with the smaller curved end of his club, the surface glistening like a mirror out of which a perfect replica of Shisui comes out, hands rushing through the same seals to counter the fireball with one of its own of equal strength.

They loudly crash against one another, warming up the cold room instantly and Kakashi has to shield his face from the heat. Smoke rises high but in one swift move his head band is pushed up and he can see through the fumes easily with the Sharingan.

As impressive as that trick is, Yagura won’t be able to use it if he uses his rod to counter blows and Kakashi rushes in close, his kunai aimed for the Mizukage’s thigh.

Their chances of winning this fight without wounding him at all are close to none, so Kakashi will aim to incapacitate first and then see if there’s a way to end this without too much blood spilt.

Yagura easily blocks the kunai with his rod and gracefully whirls around, bringing the larger end around to slam it into Kakashi’s unguarded side. He isn’t fast enough to move out of the way entirely, and his arm rises up reflexively to soften a blow that never lands, stopped short by Kuro’s tanto.

Kakashi glances sideways at the man, catching the calm of his eyes and the neutral expression on his face and he is suddenly reminded of what it feels like to do mission with a team that has got your back.

But Kakashi has no time to waste on feeling nostalgic, and he swiftly teleports behind the Mizukage. He takes advantage of the fact that Yagura’s rod is out of the way to use a Doton Jutsu, the ground rising up to trap the man’s legs. Then, Shisui rushes in and with his own tanto, he delivers a blow to the club as well, the added strength of the two Uchiha sending the weapon flying out of its wielder’s hand and it falls in a loud clutter on the cold ground.

The only sounds that can now be heard are four sets of heavy breathing, and even if Yagura is trapped and out of breath, his face remains impassive.

“Quickly, before he can use the Sanbi’s chakra-” Kuro starts, but Shisui is already moving in, Sharingan set on his target.

Kakashi takes a step back, relaxing minutely but his relief is short-lived. Suddenly he feels a flicker of chakra to his left and a second later, there’s a fireball crashing in the room, so large and so powerful that Kakashi can’t even waste a second thinking about his comrades.

He hurls himself out of the way, the warning that leaves his lips immediately drowned by the loud crash of the fireball connecting with the ground. The blow of the collision sends him reeling, a scorching heat warming his entire body uncomfortably and he is sent sprawling on his side, rolling until his back hits a wall.

He moans in pain at the impact, the feeling of a bone cracking so strong that he almost hears it. At least one of his ribs broke but as long as it doesn’t pierce a lung, he’ll have to make do. He struggles back to his feet, a flare of pain in his middle powerful enough for his vision to whiten for a second.

Once his head finally stops spinning, Kakashi tries to take in his surroundings but even his Sharingan is useless with the amount of smoke in the room. He tries to take a breath but he chokes on the black fumes, throat burning.

The ceiling makes an ominous sound and seconds later, rumbles come crashing down, opening up a hole out of which the smoke begins to fade. As the room starts to clear, the damage dealt to the building becomes so apparent that Kakashi wonders how it hasn’t entirely crumpled. There are close to no columns left standing and the ceiling has collapsed in different places.

Among the chaos, Kakashi can’t find his team and his heartbeat quickens. He looks at where Shisui and Yagura had stood but all he sees is scorched ground and the rushing of blood to his ears is loud enough to drown out the flickering sound of a few remaining flames.

Kakashi searches around wildly until his eyes finally land on Kuro and the terror in his heart alleviates. The man looks a little singed but otherwise safe, supporting a barely standing Shisui. His legs look unsteady and a good portion of his arm seems mildly burnt but he is alive and that’s all that matters for now.

Kakashi dashes up to them, extending an arm to support Shisui as well and the teen flashes him a weak smile.

“’S not nice to start a party without inviting everyone, you know!” A whiny voice complains, breaking the silence that had preceded the roaring of the fire.

Kakashi looks to the source of the sound, the smoke almost completely cleared now, and his eyes land on a still expressionless Yagura, next to someone he has never seen before.

The man wears the telltale Akatsuki robe and if that does set Kakashi alert, he can’t note anything else of concern. His face is hidden away by an orange mask with a swirling pattern, leaving only one dark eye visible, a mop of dark hair atop his head. He seems entirely unthreatening.

The masked shinobi raises a hand to scratch at the back of his head, the other waving at them in a childish greeting. He then glances at Yagura, an offended sound leaving his lips and he reaches for the Mizukage’s hand, forcing the man’s hand into a wave as well. The arm falls limp to Yagura’s side the second the man lets go of it, and that seems funny somehow to the newcomer who chuckles brightly.

Kakashi carefully glances at Kuro, hoping to judge from his expression if this man is dangerous or not, because their new opponent’s carefree words and dumb attitude could be an act for all his knows, but what he sees on the Uchiha’s face chills him on the spot.

There’s a fire in his eyes that is at odds with his usual mask of indifference, and Kakashi thinks he doesn’t imagine how the man’s body seems taut, muscles tense in apprehension.

Kuro levels their enemy with a determined stare, every ounce of his attention glued to the masked shinobi’s figure, studying even the smallest gestures.

“Tobi,” the Uchiha suddenly calls, voice echoing loudly in the large room. Even if the name doesn’t ring a bell, the way Kuro’s guards have risen higher than Kakashi had ever seen them, he immediately classify the newcomer as ‘extremely dangerous’.

Their opponent doesn’t seem phased in the slightest by Kuro’s cold tone and he cocks his head in confusion, a puzzled sound leaving his lips.

“Who are you and why do you know my name?” He asks in a high and childish tone but it doesn’t fool Kakashi any more.

This man feels wrong, there is something off about him that sets Kakashi on edge and one glance at Shisui tells him that he isn’t the only who feels that way. The teen’s face set in an assessing and careful frown, his posture defensive as he cradles his injured arm to his chest.

They should have taken a medic nin with them, Kakashi curses, but his mind is suddenly back to the matter at hand with Kuro’s next words.

“I know more than that false name,” he says, his voice slightly less steady than before. “Should I call you Madara? Or maybe your birth name would be better?”

At that, the masked shinobi suddenly grows deathly still at the same time as Kakashi glances confusedly at his companion, but a flicker of malevolent chakra forces his attention back on their enemy.

The man, Madara, has abandoned all playfulness, the lines of his body are taut with a surge of deadly power that makes Kakashi’s hairs stand on end. He barely has the time to rush through possibilities, trying to piece together what he knows that the masked man speaks up.

“You’re the one who killed two of my men,” he says and his voice is suddenly a lot deeper, the threat that he represents made a lot more obvious with the phrasing.

‘His men’, Kakashi mentally echoes. This is the leader of Akatsuki, and Kakashi can only hope this isn’t his last day on earth.

“Kakashi, Shisui, you’ll have to handle Yagura on your own. Break the Genjutsu, I’ll deal with Tobi,” Kuro tells them in a low voice.

Kakashi doesn’t get any time to protest that Kuro shifts the weight Shisui had been resting on him onto Kakashi. With his arms full of lanky teenager, Kakashi can only watch as Kuro takes a step forward, a hand on the hilt of his sword.

Kuro unsheathes his tanto, and in a cloud of dark hair and green konoha uniform, he teleports between Yagura and the leader of Akatsuki, aiming a kick at Yagura’s back so fast that Kakashi only sees a blur and the Mizukage is sent flying towards the two of them.

Kakashi has suddenly an armful of two men and he is so busy trying to restrain Yagura that he almost misses how Kuro’s tanto dives deep into their enemy’s chest, but he does notice the lack of blood.

The blade seems to simply pass through the man as if it hadn’t met any resistance and in the next second, their air around them seems to warp, swirling on itself until they both disappear.

That leaves Kakashi with a Mizukage to handle and a very weakened Shisui to protect.

His day can’t possibly get much worse.

Chapter Text

The air warps and shifts, the world itself seems to be spinning and collapsing on itself until it all comes to a stop and even if Itachi feels slightly dizzy, he doesn’t waste another second and lunges at Obito.

He has never travelled through space with Kamui and it’s about as unpleasant as he had thought it would be, but it’s far too little to make him stop for more than a moment.

Obito is used to his Sharingan, though, and he isn’t unsteady the way Itachi is when his kunai crashes against Itachi’s tanto. The force of Itachi’s blow is weaker, and Obito easily pushes him away, quickly following with a kick that connects hard with Itachi’s arm, a sick crack echoing in the empty hall they had been teleported to.

Itachi jumps back, his right hand rising to clutch at his left elbow, the pain blindingly bright.

“Who are you?” Obito asks and his voice is no longer playful but dark and threatening.

His eye is red, but Itachi doesn’t feel the least scared to stare right into the bloody colour of his Sharingan, his own activated.

“Kuro,” he answers without a pause. It’s becoming easier to let the name leave his lips.

He isn’t really ‘Itachi’ any more, not in this world at least. Here, he is nothing but a wayward soul lost spurred on solely by his one and only purpose.

“I don’t know you, but if you interfere with my plans I’ll kill you,” Obito states and it sounds like a promise to Itachi’s ears but he doesn’t feel scared in the least.

“Why, Obito?” He asks, and the second the name leaves his lips Obito’s chakra comes out pouring in wave of killing intent so potent that Itachi can almost taste it. “Why destroy the world instead of trying to save it?”

The younger man doesn’t answer, choosing instead to lunge at Itachi but his movements are no longer precise and calculated, but rather disorganized and frenzied. He is growing reckless the more Itachi flaunts his knowledge of his plans.

Riling him up isn’t Itachi’s objective, though. As much as he despises Obito for letting himself get so easily manipulated and being a threat to Sasuke’s happiness, Itachi firmly believes in the goodness that lies in people. He is a pacifist at heart, no matter the amount of blood on his hands, and he won’t kill Obito without trying to change his mind first.

A fist comes flying to his face but Itachi easily avoids it before charging with his tanto aimed to Obito’s middle. He knows how to fight against Kamui, he has spent countless hours thinking about its strengths and weaknesses and so, when his weapon disappears through Obito, Itachi follows suit, passing straight into the man’s entire body.

Itachi whirls around, rushing through seals one handed as he begins to count. The moment his body is out of Obito’s dematerialized one, Itachi launches a Fire Bullet Jutsu that also goes right past the man, colliding with a wall and rising dust in the process.

Itachi doesn’t even stop for a second, throwing shuriken faster than the eye can see, alternating between shuriken-jutsu and kenjutsu to force Obito to maintain his dematerialisation. Itachi knows that the longest he can hold it is for five minutes, but that had been ten years later and with a more rigorous training. This Obito doesn’t fully control his Mangekyou Sharingan, probably doesn’t even know its limits but Itachi does, and he is going to take advantage of that.

Suddenly, one of Itachi’s shurikens lodges itself deeply into the man’s thigh and he snarls out a pained groan. It has barely been two minutes and Itachi allows a small smirk to bloom on his face.

The tomoe of his Sharingan swirl before shifting, taking the shape of three spiralling curves and as all of his chakra focuses to his right eye, a small trickle of blood falls down his cheek.

Obito’s Akatsuki robe suddenly catches fire, the black flames wrapping around his body as he screams in pain. Amaterasu has never been one of Itachi’s favourite Jutsu to use, too wild and unpredictable, as well as uselessly painful but he has taken a vow, and never again will he let his emotions blunt his resolve.

Itachi calls off the flames as he dashes towards Obito, thrusting his tanto deep into the man’s shoulder as the last of the smoke disappears. The force of the blow coupled to his own weight sends the fearsome leader of Akatsuki sprawling on his back, one shoulder pinned to the ground by Itachi’s blade.

The blood that pours out from Obito’s shoulder isn’t enough for him to lose consciousness and Itachi mercilessly sends a warm trickle of heat through the conducting blade, the flesh of the man’s shoulder hissing and melting away from the fuming metal. Obito cries out, his eye no longer open but scrunched up in agony.

“Give up this mad idea,” Itachi says again, his voice calm and measured despite the agitation he feels. Obito cracks his eye open and Itachi tries to read his expression through the swirling patterns of his mask, but all he sees is the man’s right eye. The crazed look he finds there is more than enough for him to understand that he won’t be able to get to Obito no matter how hard he tries.

“It’s not madness, that’s all this cursed world deserves,” Obito snarls and Itachi lets a sigh leave his lips.

“You should know how it goes. An eye for an eye and the world goes blind,” he says but the words are barely out of his mouth that space warps again and Obito disappears, only leaving under Itachi a pool of blood and the tip of his blade stuck in the ground.

Itachi curses under his breath. He hadn’t realised that so much time had gone by since Obito had last dematerialized. He draws his tanto out of the ground and readies his stance, senses stretched and focus unwavering. His Mangekyou Sharingan is still activated, but with his sight restored and no terminal illness hindering him, his reserves are much bigger, allowing him to wield his Dojutsu with much more fineness.

He won’t go blind as easily nor as quickly as before, and if talking doesn’t work, Itachi will always resort to his most comfortable weapon, Tsukuyomi.

There’s a spark of Chakra behind him so strong that it’s only out of habit that he calls forth his Susanoo instead of trying to avoid. The Jutsu crashes against the half formed bones, the smell of smoke immediately filling his nose. He whirls around but Obito’s presence has disappeared once more and Itachi suddenly understands.

Obito won’t remain dematerialized until the power runs out any more. Instead, he’ll hide in his alternate space-time until he can use it again, and only come out to attack, rendering Itachi’s strategy useless. Well, it’s a good thing Itachi is always thinking two steps ahead.

If Obito his goal is to stay dematerialized, it only leaves one other way of hitting him. Obito has to materialize to land an attack, and in that split second, he is vulnerable.

Itachi calls off the Susanoo and purposefully takes a defensive stance that leaves his left shoulder unguarded. Obito’s first hit had badly bruised his elbow, so choosing this arm to be sacrificed seems to him like the best course of action to take.

He can only hope that Kiri’s medic nins aren’t as incompetent as their Sensors.

There’s a flare of chakra to his left and Itachi’s breathing slows. His mind is oddly calm and his body relaxed. He feels a sense of peacefulness swallow him and when the feeling of intense and blinding pain blossoms in his shoulder, he welcomes it.

He doesn’t even blink as he whirls around, faster than even Shisui and in that split second of blurring movement, his eyes catch Obito’s.

He sees it widening in fear when the realisation that he just lost this fight sinks in.

Obito’s arm is still extended, the fire launched from his palm burning painfully at Itachi’s arm but his tanto come slicing down mercilessly all the same, cutting Obito’s limb cleanly off.

The younger man jumps back with a demented scream, his other hand clutching at his shoulder from which blood is gushing out at an alarming rate. His Sharingan fades back to deep black, his legs growing unsteadier by the second.

Obito’s mask remains untouched, hiding all of his face but the visible eye is getting glassy and it’s enough for Itachi to realise that he only has a few seconds left if he wants to stop his nemesis.

tachi bites down on his lip to prevent any sound from leaving his clenched jaw even as the pain in his own shoulder flares. He wastes half a second to look at it, the entirety of the top of his uniform has been burnt, leaving clearly exposed to the eye the horrifying sight of his melted and frizzled skin. All of his arm hurts and he can’t even feel his fingers nor move his hand whatsoever.

He grits his teeth and looks back at Obito, raising his tanto one handed.

“Too bad the Eternal Tsukuyomi’s seals require two hands,” Itachi remarks, unable to keep the smugness out of his voice and Obito lets out a harsh and pained gasp.

He glares at Itachi, frame shaking but before he passes out, Obito gathers the last of his chakra reserves while the air begins to distort. Itachi takes in a shallow breath as he dashes forward, but his limp arm is jostled in the movement and a flaming pain makes his steps falter. He is a second too late in reaching Obito and just as his tanto is about to slice the orange mask of his opponent, he disappears into thin air.

Itachi stares at the empty space before him, and he crumbles to his knees. Blood is leaking from his right eye and his entire body feeling like it’s been dumped in a furnace of agony.

Itachi can feel consciousness slipping away. He’ll need to train using Amaterasu and Susanoo during the same day, he’s obviously getting rusty if such a short fight had drained him so much.

Deidara will probably make fun of him. Or cry.

°°°

Shisui might have injured his arm and Kakashi might have broken a rib but they work flawlessly together and surprisingly enough, it doesn’t take them too long to incapacitate the Mizukage. In the next second, Shisui has launched his own Genjutsu, countering the Akatsuki Leader’s and Yagura falls down limply as if the strings forcing him into moving had just been snapped.

The Mizukage’s rod clatters to the ground and the man remains impossibly still sprawled on the ground, but Kakashi is convinced he is fine, his breathing is even, and they haven’t roughened him up too much.

“I’ve used Kotoamatsukami, and since Kuro isn’t here I’ve given the Mizukage background information on the situation through my Genjutsu. If he wakes up, he won’t attack us, he’ll think we’re his allies,” Shisui says in a tired voice as he takes a wobbly step towards Kakashi.

The plan hasn’t gone the way they had expected it to, but Kotoamatsukami is an amazing Genjutsu and thanks to Shisui, they have managed to see the mission through anyway. Kakashi is immensely thankful to have Shisui on his side.

Kakashi walks up to his companion and crouches down in front of the Mizukage before he hitches the man up on his back. He is small and light, his stature closer to a child’s than a grown adult’s and it’s much easier to have him on his back compared to when he had had to drag Kuro to Konoha.

Thinking about the man suddenly reminds Kakashi that he had simply vanished alongside the leader of Akatsuki and that prospect is extremely worrying.

“We need to move, guards are bound to come at some point with how noisy we were,” Shisui says as he glances around, seeming to take in the destruction inflected upon the graceful manor. It’s falling apart, it’s a complete miracle it hasn’t collapsed yet.

A loud crashing noise forces both of their head to snap up before they slowly look back at one another. That’s never a good sound to hear when you’re missing your strongest ally and there’s a kidnapped Mizukage on your back.

Carefully, Kakashi jumps up through one of the holes in the ceiling to land on the roof of the manor and he glances around. There’s a tower of smoke coming from one of the external walls, near the main entrance.

He squints, reserves far too low for the Sharingan to stay activated, but he doesn’t need it to see the shape of a Great Fireball crashing against the manor, making it shake all the way to the roof. A second later, Shisui is also up there with Kakashi and he follows his line of sight. His Sharingan activates and his face pales.

“That’s Kuro over there, he’s fighting the masked man from before,” Shisui says, and with how his voice trembles Kakashi almost forces his Chakra to gather enough for the Sharingan to turn on on its own again. He is about to ask the teen for more details when Shisui suddenly gasps.

“T-That’s a Susanoo!” He shouts and when Kakashi glances at him, he sees that the teen’s eyes are wide, his mouth hanging open as he stares at the fight that’s too far for Kakashi to see.

Without adding anything, Shisui’s form flickers and he disappears. Kakashi curses him and his lightening speed Shunshin as he picks up running, the Mizukage a slowing weight on his back.

When Kakashi finally reaches the source of the smoke, it has mostly cleared and he can easily see the results of the fight on the palace. One of the wall has a hole punched through it, most of the ground is blackened and scorched, there’s blood everywhere and is that a fucking arm...?

Kakashi blanches and he looks around, searching wildly for Shisui or Kuro, the smell of iron and burnt skin suddenly overwhelming. His eyes land on two similar mops of black hair and he quickly closes the distance that separates him from the two Uchiha, but the closer he gets, the bigger his worry grows.

His eyes zero-in on Kuro’s left arm, it’s bent at an odd shape and he is pretty sure he can see a bone popping out at his elbow but what really makes his throat constrict is the smell and the colour of his skin. It has been burnt to a crisp and it takes a lot out of Kakashi not to retch.

He glances at Shisui instead, but the teen isn’t watching Kuro’s arm, instead his eyes are stuck to his back, wide and confused, his mouth hanging open. Kakashi follows his line of sight to see that most of the man’s shirt has been burnt down, uncovering the smooth expanse of his back, a black tattoo swirling from the small of his back to his nape.

Kakashi takes a step closer but freezes in his track. That’s not a tattoo, it is most definitely a seal but it is much more advanced than anything Kakashi has ever seen in his entire life. He is pretty sure the line are forming words meant to be read but somehow Kakashi can’t make out any sense out of them, as if the letter had been written mirrored, or in the wrong order.

It’s a confusing sight for sure, but with the state of Kuro’s arm, Shisui needs to snap out of whatever he is thinking about because they have much pressing matters to deal with than some seal.

“Shisui, we need to get the hell out of here. Remember the mission,” Kakashi grits out.

The words leave a bitter taste in his mouth because fuck this mission, what they need right now is a medic but it will all have been in vain if they get captured for assassination attempt. Clearly, they’ve just saved the Mizukage and the Land of Water but he doesn’t think this is what people are going to think of first if they stumble upon this gruesome scene.

“… You’re right,” Shisui says at last, and with a deep breath, he glances away from Kuro’s back, Sharingan finally deactivating after such prolonged used, but the teen doesn’t let exhaustion weigh him down and he carefully tries to pick Kuro up.

Shisui is tall and lanky for his age, all long wild limbs, but Kuro is a few inches taller and very much a dead weight. The teen’s legs buckles when he settles Kuro on his back but Shisui is nothing if determined and driven, and with a curt nod towards the edge of the village, he begins to run, Kakashi on his heels.

With how the beginning of their mission has gone, Kakashi is convinced that the second the Mizukage wakes up, the man will still be under Akatsuki’s control and attack them. With Kuro knocked out, his arm fried, and Shisui’s hurt as well, Kakashi knows they don’t have very good odds at defeating Yagura once more.

Yet, when the Mizukage blinks his eyes open, he doesn’t lunge at them, or start screaming. He sits up silently, surveys his surroundings and when his eyes land on Kakashi and Shisui, sitting side by side in the shadow of a large tree with Kuro on the ground behind them, his face turns assessing and considering.

“You broke the Genjutsu,” he says, his voice is high but not soft or gentle. It has that commanding tone that people in power always end up using.

Kakashi gives him a small nod and bows slowly out of politeness. That man is still a Kage, even if their two villages have never been on friendly terms.

“You’re from Konoha,” Yagura states again, and this time his voice is less cold, and a bit more curious. “Why did you help?”

Kakashi bits back a sigh. This is supposed to be Kuro’s time to shine, he would have used his well mannered speech and smart words to explain the situation, using his natural charm to get the Mizukage on their sides but Kakashi isn’t Kuro. He is terribly awkward with the diplomatic aspect of some missions.

Kakashi glances worriedly to his left where Kuro lies in the grass, unmoving. His chest falls and rises slowly at irregular intervals. He needs immediate medical attention. Kakashi knows he sucks at this, but it’s either he tries or Kuro dies.

Kakashi fumbles over his words, his explanation is a bit off and he is missing some elements but Yagura already knows about Akatsuki so it makes things easier. They learn that he has actually been aware the entire time. He couldn’t control his body nor what he said, but he could see and hear everything that happened.

While they talk and he tries to make a steady ally of the Mizukage so that he’d accept to let them stay while Kuro recovers, Kakashi catches the way Shisui keeps staring at the older Uchiha. He doesn’t say anything, he doesn’t even look like he is listening at all, only focused on glaring a hole through Kuro’s chest.

It’s distracting, and Kakashi finds himself getting irritated that the teen is being so unprofessional in front of the Mizukage.

Kakashi is getting so side-tracked that he almost misses Yagura’s next words.

“You have my utmost thanks. I shall provide for you anything you may require, and I will consider forwarding my gratitude to the Hokage. We could both use one more ally against the threat that is Akatsuki,” he says and Kakashi finally feels like he can breathe again.

The mission is a success.

The Mizukage is safe, the Genjutsu is broken, he will make sure that the two Bijuus stay in Kiri and he is even willing to become Konoha’s ally. Maybe Kakashi isn’t as terrible with words as he had thought himself to be.

He should perhaps pursue a career in politics, it’d probably be easier on his heart than missions with Kuro, considering how reckless the man apparently likes to be.

Kakashi doesn’t even feel ashamed to ask for their best medic nin, after all it is because of Yagura that it had come to this in the first place, and Kakashi would really like to keep Kuro’s arm attached to the rest of his body.

The hospital in Kiri is much different from the one in Konoha. It is barren and there are fewer rooms, the number of doctors and nurses is also alarmingly small, but Yagura reassures them that Kuro is being treated by their best, and that his chances of recovery are high. Only then does Kakashi allow his body to relax.

He is still very worried when he sits in a corridor of the intensive care unit, Shisui silent next to him. The teen has yet to speak, he has kept quiet ever since they had discovered Kuro and as much as Kakashi wants to berate him for letting his feelings get to him, he refrains from doing so because of how unusual it is for Shisui to act like this.

“I need to talk to him the second he wakes up,” Shisui suddenly says, and Kakashi jumps slightly. “Alone,” he adds, and the tone of his voice doesn’t leave room for any argument that Kakashi might come up with, although he has quite the number of them.

Firstly, Kakashi is in charge of this mission, so technically, Shisui does whatever Kakashi tells him to, not the other way around, and secondly, Kakashi is Shisui’s direct superior in Anbu, being a Captain and his senior by three years so he has no reason to comply to the younger boy demands.

And yet, he considers it. He sees the fire in Shisui’s eyes and the grim set of his mouth, he thinks of how silent as well as visibly upset he has been acting, and how unlike him it is.

Kakashi sighs, but he nods all the same. He is curious, obviously, yet he also knows when to back off.

That should give him some time to think about what he’s going to write to inform the Hokage of what had happened.

°°°

It has been two entire weeks since Kuro left and Deidara has never been this bored in his entire life. He hadn’t even been allowed to know anything at all about the mission so he can only wait.

The first few days, he had been angry to have been left behind in a city he didn’t even know, alone in their small shared apartment with no one to look after him but the old and quite weird baby sitter they had entrusted him to.

But days had turned into weeks and the longer Deidara waits, the more his anger vanishes to let worry grow in its stead. He believes in Kuro and he knows his strength but he can’t help thinking about the worst possible scenarios.

If Kuro were to die, Deidara wouldn’t have anything left. He abandoned his village and country to join a stranger on his quest and while he doesn’t regret it in the slightest, it leaves him with no one else to trust but Kuro.

Deidara sighs and stops polishing his kunai to glance at the old man sitting beside him, nose deep in a book whose cover makes Deidara cringe in disgust every time he sees it. He’s a child, yes, but he is also a shinobi who has been hanging around older men for years so he knows porn when he sees it.

“You’re disgusting,” he mutters quietly, but the old man hears him and looks away from his book to stare at Deidara with a lecherous smirk.

“You’re too young to know how truly artful this masterpiece is,” he says, but Deidara begs to differ.

There’s nothing artful about a book on sex, and he doesn’t think that he’ll change his mind any time soon. There’s only art in explosions anyway.

“When are we going to do something interesting?” Deidara asks instead because he has learned in the past days not to question the old man’s peculiar tastes in literature.

Before there’s time for the man to answer, a kunoichi wearing a white porcelain mask flickers into existence beside them. Deidara has since learned that these ninja are from the Anbu, the special operation force of Konoha and while he still doesn’t exactly know what they do, he has easily understood that it’s usually secret stuff or dangerous stuff. So, interesting stuff.

He jumps to his feet, kunai and book long forgotten but the Anbu doesn’t spare a glance at him and immediately rushes to the old man’s side, kneeling down with her head bowed respectfully.

“Jiraiya-sama,” she greets, “you have been summoned to the Hokage’s office for urgent matters. Please go see him immediately.”

The old man’s face turns serious and he closes his book. He gives a curt nod to the Anbu who immediately disappears, and then glances at Deidara.

“I trust you know your way back to your home,” is all he says before he disappears too.

Deidara curses under his breath, gathers his belongings and starts running back to the village. The forest they had been sunbathing in isn’t that far from Konoha, but Deidara knows he is much slower than the old man.

He had underestimated him at first, thinking that the Hokage had appointed him someone’s granddad because of a shortage of babysitters. What was his surprise when he realised he had actually been hanging around one of the Legendary Sannin of Konoha.

His early amazement and awe had been quickly blown away by the reality of the old man’s personality, though. He is a pervert and an idiot, but he is also most definitely a better shinobi than Deidara, so he doesn’t waste a second and runs with all his might.

He won’t beat him to the Hokage’s office but he might be fast enough to hear some of what they have to talk about. What are the odds for it to be about Kuro? Deidara doesn’t know, but he won’t take any chances. The smallest piece of information would be a victory for him. He is going mad with worry so he won’t let this opportunity slip through his fingers.

Deidara lands on the roof of the Hokage’s office without a sound. He breathes in deeply, tries to calm his heartbeat and crawls towards the edge. There’s a window sill under him, and he soundlessly drops on it, hidden behind the wall but close enough to the window to hear the words exchanged.

His heart his thundering in his chest and it’s loud enough in his own ears that he is worried the two old men might be able to hear it.

Deidara doesn’t know what the penalty is in Konoha for breach of secrecy, but he knows that he is better off not being caught. He pricks up his ears and prays not to be noticed.

“So what’s next,” Jiraiya asks, and Deidara can’t see them but he can tell that the man sounds relieved and that eases his own worry.

“We’ll have to wait for Kuro to wake up to find out,” the Hokage says and even if he sounds just as relaxed as Jiraya, the words freeze Deidara to the spot.

“He’s just been moved to a recovery room in Konoha’s hospital, right?” Jiraiya says in a loud voice, but Deidara doesn’t even wait for an answer and he jumps off the window, legs trembling and heart hammering in his chest.

°°°

A few seconds go by in silence, Jiraiya smirking happily. “Was that really necessary?” The Hokage asks with a sigh, but Jiraiya’s smile only widens.

Two weeks is a short time to grow fond of someone, but there’s something in Deidara’s brashness that reminds him of Kushina, but with Minato’s colouring. He could have been their son, and being forced to look after someone resembling them so much has helped him make peace with his responsibility towards Naruto as well.

He should have never abandoned his godson the way he did. He should have taken him in, told him stories about his parents and raised him to be an amazing shinobi, just like them.

Taking care of the blond brat Kuro had brought with him has made him realize that it isn’t yet too late to brighten up an orphan’s life. Jiraiya will look after Naruto, from now on, and it’s only thanks to Deidara. Letting this kid be reunited as fast as possible with Kuro isn’t nearly enough of a thank you gift compared to what the brat has unknowingly done for him.

“Yeah, it was necessary.”

°°°

Itachi's consciousness slowly drifts back to him, and it’s the second time in barely two weeks that he wakes up in a bed when the last thing he remembers is passing out outside.

It’s getting old, but this time the realisation doesn’t come with the feelings of anger and panic he had felt the first time. This time, it means that Kakashi and Shisui succeeded in breaking the Genjutsu because if they hadn’t, he’d be dead and not in the recovery room of Konoha’s hospital.

It immediately helps Itachi in calming down. They succeeded, and it’s another step closer to his goal. With a sigh, Itachi pushes on his right arm, trying to sit up, but the second his puts weight on his left shoulder, a blinding pain flares from the tip of his fingers to his collarbone and he flops back down on the pillow.

“I’d advise against using an arm that was almost burnt to ashes so soon, give it a few more weeks,” a teasing voice says and it surprises Itachi that he hasn’t even noticed someone being in the same room.

But then his eyes land on Shisui sitting in one of the corner, and his surprise shifts to a much more complicated mess of feelings.

It’s been hard, incredibly hard, to travel alongside Shisui. Itachi had missed him much more than he had realised.

He had missed the sleepiness in his puffy eyes when he woke up after taking first watch, he had missed the wild curls of his unkept hair, he had missed his soft voice and his warm laugh, but most of all, he has missed the feeling of his kind eyes staring at him with unguarded love and affection.

His throat feels tight, and he can’t help but wonder what ‘Kuro’ has done to deserve such a look.

“You really thought you could fool me?” He asks, and suddenly the warmth Itachi feels freezes and he’s cold all over. “I thought you had more faith in me, Itachi.”

Itachi’s mouth opens and closes, he blinks a few times and he tries to fight off his sleepiness because this is a very horribly dire situation that needs his entire focus if he wants to get out of it unscathed.

He can’t think of anything to say, the anaesthetic still slowing his brain too much for him to come up with something plausible. He stares at Shisui in silence, but the teen’s eyes don’t lose their warmth and his smile doesn’t waver.

Then, he stands up and leaves the corner of the room to walk up to Itachi’s bed. He looks down at him kindly, but there’s a hint of sadness to his face that makes Itachi’s heart clench painfully.

“You grew up real big, became all strong and deadly,” Shisui says with a hint of playfulness that doesn’t reach all the way to his eyes and Itachi doesn’t even know where to begin. "Though I guess you always were quite deadly."

He has no idea how the teen even figured it out. He has been rather careful but he should have known better than to underestimate Shisui. He isn’t even sure if it’s worth the trouble of trying to deny it. He knows his cousin is much smarter than that.

Shisui sighs and his smile drops, there’s only sadness and worry left on his face. “How about you tell me exactly how bad it had gotten for you to go as far as to mess with time?”

Alright, no point in trying to deny it, Shisui already knows everything.

Surprisingly enough, Itachi doesn’t feel like he is drowning or about to explode. If anyone could have found out and not freak out, it is Shisui. Still, Itachi needs to know what gave it away if he wants to try to keep his identity under wraps for the rest of the world.

“How?” He rasps out, his words instantly dissolving into a coughing fit, throat raw and dry from disuse. Shisui immediately fetches him a glass of water that Itachi downs in a second, handing back the cup with a word of thanks.

“On your back, there’s a seal. If you look at it with the Sharingan it becomes readable,” Shisui explains at he sets the glass down.

Itachi frowns. It doesn’t make much sense for an Uzumaki seal to require the Sharingan to be readable, but it’s a vital piece of information nonetheless.

“What does it say?” He asks, and Shisui whirls around to study him with wide eyes.

“You don’t even know?” He shoots back and when Itachi lifts his right shoulder in a half shrug.

With Deidara always around, and his lack of free time, he had to postpone his researches on the seal. And well, he hadn’t thought to look at his own back with his Sharingan activated.

Shisui only sighs in defeat before he speaks again, choosing to ignore Itachi’s lack of answer.

“It says something like ‘Granted was the wish, Turned was the time...’ and something about a promise… Anyway, it just suddenly made sense why you looked familiar and why I recognized your chakra signature even though we had never met. You’re the Itachi from the future.”

Of course Shisui would be able to piece everything back together with so little clues. At least, it means that for now, his identity would remain a secret, and that comes as a relief. Itachi doubts anyone else is intimate enough with his Chakra signature to put the pieces together.

“Why didn’t you tell me?”

Shisui’s sudden words make Itachi’s breathing hitch. There’s so much sadness in his cousin’s voice that he doesn’t even dare raise his head to look at his face. More so than the sadness, it is the disappointment that breaks his heart.

Shisui isn’t disappointed in Itachi, he is disappointed in himself. Disappointed that Itachi doesn’t trust him enough to confide in him, the same he always did without hesitation.

“I...I just, I’m sorry, Shisui,” he says, his own voice weak. He can’t find the words to express what it is he feels. “I didn’t think it’d be very smart to reveal such crucial information when I didn’t have Konoha’s trust.”

“I’m not Konoha, Itachi,” Shisui counters.

He doesn’t say ‘I’m your cousin’ or ‘I’m your best friend’, but Itachi hears it all the same. If there is one person in the whole world that Itachi knows he never needs to doubt for even one second, it is Shisui.

There’s a beat of silence during which all Itachi can hear is the sound of his heart beating like drums, but suddenly Shisui laughs.

“Damn, I seriously can’t believe there’s a way to turn back in time. Who is the madman that even made that up?” The teen asks with a giggle.

Itachi chuckles, leave it to Shisui to always find a way to make him smile. “I don’t know, but it was an Uzumaki.”

Shisui’s grin immediately disappear to be replaced by a serious expression.

“An Uzumaki seal that you have to read with the Sharingan?” He asks, but Itachi has no answer.

It is odd, to say the least, but unless they find who created the Jutsu, they will probably never know so he simply shrugs. Shisui doesn’t seem satisfied but he seems to decide to let it go for now, and he instead reaches for Itachi’s hair.

“You could have at least used a Henge, you look too much like yourself,” he says as he tugs lightly on the strand. Itachi pushes his hand away with a frown on his face.

“With the number of times I’ve passed out already, using a Henge would have been even more suspicious. Imagine Kakashi’s face if my appearance had suddenly changed while he carried me to Konoha,” he says flatly.

Shisui booms out a laugh. “Yeah, I heard about that. How did the great Itachi manage to get taken out so easily?”

Itachi bristles, ears reddening in shame at being chastised like a child despite now being five years older than Shisui, but his embarrassment doesn’t last. He had missed bantering with his cousin, just like he had missed his loud laugh and his teasing tone.

Itachi suddenly feels overly emotional, he can’t help but feel like he has been given back his light, and the world seems much brighter with Shisui in the same room. Itachi doesn’t even want to imagine how he’ll feel if he sees Sasuke.

The sudden sound of rushing footsteps gathers Itachi’s attention on the door and a second later it is thrown open so powerfully that it crashes against the wall and bounces back immediately, slamming against the newcomer's face.

Deidara falls to his knees, both hands clutching his forehead that has just been hit with the doorknob.

“Ow fucking shit, hell, fuck, shit,” he mutters, face red and tears gathering in his scrunched up eyes. There’s a sudden rush of warmth blooming in Itachi’s heart and when the urge to smile strikes, he doesn’t force it down, choosing instead to call out Deidara’s name with much more softness and affection that he had ever believed himself capable of.

The kid’s head snaps up, blue, teary eyes meeting Itachi’s dark ones.

“I’ve told you many times to stop swearing so much,” he says with a small smile, but Deidara’s face falls, eyes roaming all over Itachi’s frame and stopping for a long moment on his bandaged arm.

The tears do fall, this time, and within seconds his entire face is wet and swollen, bottom lips trembling and voice shaking as he speaks up. “What happened to you?”

Itachi exchanges a look with Shisui, not entirely sure how much of their mission is confidential but before any of them can find an answer, Deidara walks up to Itachi’s bed and raises a trembling hand to the healing limb.

“Actually I don’t care what happened, you’ve got no excuse. You’re a good ninja so don’t get hurt again,” he says in a voice that is probably meant to be authoritative but between the red of his face and the sniffles that cut off his sentence, the kid doesn’t sound very assertive.

“He’s cute, I see why you love him,” Shisui says and Deidara echoes in a faint and disbelieving voice ‘cute…?’, just as Itachi repeats “...love?”

“May I know what’s going on in here?”

The three of them turn to look at the door-frame where Kakashi is standing, the shape of a smile clearly visible under his mask. Itachi notices a few cuts on his face that seem almost healed but no graver injuries. He has half a mind to be relieved to see that they’re all alright but then, Shisui’s words start to sink in and Itachi forgets his relief.

He looks at the child next to him to find affection blooming in his chest. When he looks at his cousin, he finds that same loving light in his gaze, and when his eyes finally land on Kakashi, Itachi feels something shifting in his heart. He sees a smiling young man and even if more than half of his face is covered, Itachi thinks he can distinguish a softness he has never seen before in Kakashi’s eyes.

There’s something unusual burning in his stomach, but it’s not something painful. Quite the opposite, in fact, and when Itachi does finally answer Kakashi’s question, his choice of words surprise even himself.

“Just a happy reunion.”

Kakashi’s visible eye widens and he blinks a few times, before chuckling and shrugging.

“Don’t let me interrupt you,” he says as he begins to walk away, but Deidara jumps away from the bed and rushes to Kakashi’s sides to grab his sleeve.

“You join in too, I hate you but Kuro tolerates you so I guess that makes you an ok guy,” the kid says, looking everywhere but at Kakashi’s face.

Shisui chuckles, and Kakashi lets out a bright laugh. Itachi can’t contain his own amusement and he raises a hand to hide his grin, fondness blooming in his chest at the sight of their mismatched party. His long-dead cousin, his previous distrustful mentor, and a kid he had been hated by, all three now on his side.

He’d never have thought he’d ever feel at home in Konoha, but he’s found people that make him feel comfortable and even if he isn’t yet prepared to put his feelings into words, he can at least tell them this.

“Thank you.”

Kakashi stops laughing, Deidara stops screaming and tugging hard enough on Kakashi’s arm to break a lesser man’s bone, and Shisui’s giggles stop to be replaced by a warm smile.

“No need to thank us, Kuro,” his cousin says with a wink, and if Kakashi remains frozen, Deidara is only a blur to the eye with how fast he jumps back on the bed to glue himself to Itachi’s chest.

“Just don’t be an idiot again!” He warns and even the snot dripping down his nose seems endearing to Itachi.

°°°

“What a heart-warming scene,” the Hokage whispers to Jiraiya. The man shifts his position to stand a bit more comfortably against the tree trunk, a smile on his face.

“It is,” he agrees, eyes stuck to the four people in the hospital room.

They can see just enough inside the room to catch their wide smiles and it calms both of them down to witness such purity and affection.

Hiruzen had been worried about Kakashi and Shisui. They are both too young to be holding such high ranking positions within the Anbu. Kids their age shouldn’t be neck deep in world problems and murder.

He hadn’t even been sure that they were both capable of smiling in such a carefree manner. And that’s not even mentioning Kuro. Hiruzen had thought him to be a man made from anger and sadness, someone who could be a cure as much as a poison for Konoha, and the entire world faced with the Akatsuki threat.

It looks like he had been wrong again.

“I’m going to go see Naruto.”

Hiruzen's head snaps up, eyes meeting Jiraiya’s tired ones. There’s no end to surprises it seems.

“I want to take care of him, I should have done so years ago,” Jiraiya says with a sad smile.

Hiruzen doesn’t see what has suddenly made him change his mind but he is glad he did. As the Hokage, he doesn’t have enough time on his hands for an orphan, even if it is Kushina and Minato’s, but no child should have to grow alone in a world like theirs.

“I’ll see if I can reduce the number of missions I send you on for a while,” he offers, and Jiraiya’s face lights up.

With a few words of thanks, the man disappears, probably rushing to Naruto’s side as fast as possible.

A smile blooms on Hiruzen’s face as well. He hasn’t had such a good day in years, filled with laughs and love, happiness and positivity.

He can only hope it’ll last.

°°°

Itachi has been out of the hospital for only half a day and he somehow misses it. Or rather, he misses the quietness that had come with the barren room. He had stayed a whole week in the intensive care unit until he got moved to another room for a few more days before being finally released.

His arm still needs care, it will for a while, but Itachi hasn’t lost his mobility or precision. If his training with the Shuriken had proven this fact, it had also been painful and Itachi knows he will have to take it easy for a while.

It will scar, but Itachi has quite the number of those already like every shinobi and that prospect doesn’t phase him.

What does, however, is the yelling and shouting, a cacophony of hell ringing in his ears and already forming a terrible headache.

“Kuro~ come on, we’re having fun!” Shisui screams in his ear, his voice barely audible above the background noise of Gai singing and Genma shouting.

“Shisui, you’re drunk,” Kuro states coldly, but the teen only laughs.

“You should be too,” Shisui retorts, his voice much more slurred than it usually is, meshing with the loud background music.

Itachi will never again agree to go to a party, especially one hosted by Gai. He had never managed to get used to the man’s flamboyance and it appears that it grows proportionally to the amount of alcohol in the man’s bloodstreams.

“LIVE EVERY DAY AS IF IT’S YOUR LAST!” Gai wails again, and Itachi has to block off his ears with his hands to protect his hearing, a gesture he started adopting about twenty minutes ago.

“See, that’s fun,” Shisui insists again but between the tone of his voice and the smell of booze sticking to him, he doesn’t sound very convincing.

“You’re too young to drink,” Itachi argues but Shisui rolls his eyes and stumbles away from him.

“You’re ten-years-old to me, you can’t tell me what to do.”

And with that, he walks away on unsteady legs, leaving Itachi to wearily study his surroundings to make sure no one heard them. Thankfully it seems that he is the only one sitting at the table, the others gathered in the middle of the living room transformed into a dance floor.

Everyone is drunk, everyone is loud and they’re all having fun.

Itachi gets it though. They could have died on this mission, so when Gai had offered to spend the entire night drinking between friends, of course Kakashi and Shisui had been delighted to finally get the opportunity to evacuate the tension. Itachi had thought it might do him some good as well.

Never again will he let his cousin convince him to join them.

Itachi doesn’t feel like he belongs. The people here don’t trust him, they don’t try to include him, and he doesn’t expect them to. Even if they did, Itachi would just feel awkward to have to pretend he doesn’t know them.

He knows every shinobi here, from their name to even their secrets. He isn’t surprised when he sees Raido down ten shots and remain impassive, winning his contest against Gai. Itachi is even less surprised when the man starts doing push-ups as a punishment for his loss. He doesn’t even blink at Genma and Hayate kissing, even if it gathers quite the number of whistles from the other youngsters.

Itachi suddenly feels much too old. He has been drunk before, but he isn’t the fun kind of drunk. He gets depressed and can’t think of anything but his parents’ murder, not quite ideal to have fun.

Maybe, once he becomes closer with them, he’ll be able to join in. For now, Itachi thinks he is better off away from the music if he wants to keep his hearing intact. He won’t go home just yet even if promised Deidara he wouldn’t come back too late. Itachi would rather be here to watch over Shisui.

He needs a quiet room where people won’t bother him. Inside Gai’s tiny apartment, it might be harder than it sounds and Itachi sighs, the sound immediately drown out of a choir of screams.

He might as well spend the night in the bathroom.

°°°

Kakashi thinks he hasn’t seen Kuro in a while. He can’t be too sure because his memory is a bit fuzzy. He can’t even tell if he’s been singing with Gai for five minutes of two hours. With how raw his throat, it is probably the latter.

He looks around the living room, but the Uchiha is nowhere to be seen. Most people have already gone home, or crashed on the couch and the floor, passed out and in various states of undress. Genma’s sleeping on Hayate’s laps and it would probably be much cuter if he wasn’t drooling all over the man’s pants.

Kakashi wants to sleep on Kuro’s laps too.

Yeah, he’s drunk.

He should probably be looking for Shisui instead, the kid is only fifteen and it’s probably a bad idea to leave a drunk child unsupervised, especially a shinobi child.

But it’s Kuro Kakashi wants to see.

He wants to take a look at his long flowing hair, his trademark charcoal eyes and his sweet smile.

He probably needs another drink. Or sleep. Or even better, to take a piss. That sounds like a reasonable idea.

Kakashi makes his way to the bathroom, unsteady and so slow that the 30 seconds commute to the next door takes an embarrassingly long time. Kakashi gently pushes the door open and looks inside. Only a small lamp is turned on, but it casts enough light for him to notice Kuro standing at the sink, eyes locked onto his own reflection in mirror on the wall.

"You gonna throw up?" Kakashi blurts out. Not very distinguished, but his brain is a puddle and he has a hard time putting one feet in front of the other as he enters the bathroom.

"I’m not drunk, you know,” Kuro answers, and with how entirely collected he looks, he probably hasn’t even had one glass.

Kakashi shuts the door behind him and approaches the other man. His dizziness is slowly getting better, he feels more focused with all of his attention centred on the man he had been wanting to see so badly.

"You hiding from Gai, then?" he asks with a voice that sounds a lot steadier than what he had thought it would be.

He’s doing a good job at acting like he’s sober, he thinks, but suddenly Kuro laughs, eyes crinkling. It's a deep and rich sound, and Kakashi suddenly feels dazzled by his smile.

“You’re drunk,” Kuro says, but Kakashi thinks he sounds fond.

He has half a mind to deny the accusation, but with how beautiful Kuro looks, Kakashi isn’t able to think straight. For someone so pretty, he doesn't nearly smile as much as he should. Kakashi almost voices the thought, weighting the odds of Kuro taking it well but he’d feel too embarrassed to face the other man after admitting something like that.

When he glances back at Kuro and he sees that the man is staring back, gaze soft.

“You’re very drunk,” he corrects with an amused smile that sends sparks flying in Kakashi’s stomach.

"You’re beautiful," he answers instead, the words slipping out before he can stop them.

The look of utter surprise and bashfulness that blooms on Kuro’s face is worth the regret and self-hatred Kakashi will most definitely feel tomorrow when he’ll wake up sober and with a terrible headache.

‘But with his embarrassed face burnt in your memory’; a tiny voice says in the back of his mind and Kakashi tells it to shut up. He doesn’t dare to look up again at Kuro, the man standing right next to him. They are very close, close enough that they both fit in the mirror and when Kakashi finally raises his head, his eyes meet Kuro’s reflection.

His face is just as red as before, and he looks unsure, confused. Somehow, Kakashi thinks it suits him, so at odds with his usual confidence and pride, yet in harmony with that odd purity he hides.

It’s a good look on him, it makes Kakashi want to see more of his more reserved side. One he thinks not many people have seen before. Kakashi wants to see it all so bad.

He needs to calm down.

Kakashi takes a deep breath and holds it for a few seconds before he lets it out. He instantly feels dizzy and almost regrets this decision and his takes his next breath through the nose. He is instantly met with the scent of the man standing next to him.

They are awfully close to one another, but even without that, Kakashi’s nose would allow him to pick up his smell. They had spent long nights in close quarters on their way to Kiri, and it’s yet another piece of the man that Kakashi will forever carry with him.

Kakashi looks back up at the mirror in front of him and his eyes immediately lock onto Kuro’s. He had been staring at Kakashi through the glass, and his heart rate suddenly picks up once more. The red of Kuro’s cheek is obscenely obvious against the white of his natural complexion, and Kakashi has to remind himself that reaching out to touch Kuro is probably a terrible idea.

It’s getting harder the longer they stare at each other.

Fuck it all.

Kakashi reaches out, he turns away from the mirror and lets his hand rise up to Kuro’s face. The man doesn’t back away, but his eyes do widen slightly. It’s not an outright rejection and that’s all he needs to gather enough courage to run his hand through Kuro’s hair.

Kakashi breathes in deeply, catching the subtle scent of his shampoo, letting the strands ripple past his fingers like silky soft ink. It’s nothing amazing, nothing out of the ordinary, to touch someone’s hair, but suddenly it isn’t just that any more.

It’s the first time Kakashi reaches out to touch Kuro with the only intent to touch. Not to catch, not to hit, not to harm. Just to touch. And it’s the first time Kuro has allowed him to.

When Kakashi’s hand settle at the base of Kuro’s nape, his breath catches and his eyes close. Kakashi swears his body temperature rise a few degree when he notices that Kuro is nibbling down on his lips. He can’t tell if it’s the alcohol that has suddenly transformed his blood into lava. He can't tell if it's because of the alcohol that there’s an inexplicable urge rising up in him.

There’s a fire in his brain and butterflies in his stomach, his whole body feels like it’s trembling with tension and yet he doesn’t dare shift in the slightest lest he’d scare Kuro away.

But Kakashi wants, he wants so bad. He thirsts and desires in a way he never has before.

So he doesn’t think, he’s done enough of that and it hasn’t gotten him anywhere, he’ll just face the consequences tomorrow.

Kakashi takes a step further into Kuro’s personal space and tugs at the man’s nape with one hand, the other tugging down his facemask. He has to straighten up and tilt his face up to reach Kuroo. Their lips touch for the first time and everything seems to stop.

Kakashi notices the utter silence of the entire apartment, the way Kuro isn’t moving an inch and he starts to freak out but suddenly, Kuro sighs into the kiss and relaxes. It was all that was needed for Kakashi to give in. He pours his everything into Kuro, he runs a hand up his hip, bringing their bodies closer as he caresses his nape slowly. He feels every slight tremble in Kuro’s body, the hesitation with which his mouth opens to whisper yet another sigh.

Kakashi feels light-headed. It’s too much and yet not enough, he’d never known a kiss could feel like this. The brushing of their lips has kindled a seeping fire that has now taken over his entire being. He needs more, he needs to be closer, he wants to feel all of Kuro.

His hand tightens on Kuro’s hip and the man moans, of all things to do.

Kakashi snaps.

He pushes up against Kuro, slamming the man against the door of the bathroom. He moans again and Kakashi doesn’t wait for another one to slip his tongue inside Kuro’s mouth. They dance together, touching and discovering each other with curiosity.

Kakashi doesn’t want to push too far, but he doesn’t feel like he could stop even if he wanted to. The feeling of Kuro’s lips against his is addictive. He can hear all of his breaths, smell the sweat that has started to gather down his back, feel each and every one of his shivers every time Kakashi’s hand on his hip squeezes.

“Kakashi,” Kuro suddenly calls as he gently pushes Kakashi away. He sounds utterly wrecked, voice rough and lips kissed red, eyes blown.

Kakashi dives in again, letting his teeth run over Kuro’s lips, biting down gently, the man immediately rewarding him with yet another shiver and a stuttering breath.

“Kakashi, wait... the door,” Kuro tries again but whatever it is he is trying to say, it doesn’t register in Kakashi’s fuzzy brain.

“Stop fucking, you idiots! Shisui is missing!” Gai’s voice is certainly what Kakashi needed to calm his raging boner.

He slowly backs away from Kuro, admiring the man’s beauty in all of it’s glory. His pale skin has taken on a pink hue that spreads all the way down to his now loose collar. Kakashi can’t help but wonder how down far it goes.

“What?” Kuro calls as he slams the door open. He is out of breath and with how dishevelled they both look, there’s no avoiding the obvious conclusion everyone is going to make.

Kakashi almost regrets it, but the sound the man was making are still ringing in his ears and he can’t find the heart to feel even slightly bad about it.

“We can’t find Shisui anywhere, he isn’t in the Uchiha compound and no one has seen him since he left ages ago,” Gai explains, and suddenly Kakashi’s brain catches up to the situation, the feeling of Kuro against him suddenly forgotten.

“Wait, Shisui is missing?” He asks, and both men turn to glare at him.

“Yes, Kakashi, we need to find him,” Gai tells him, but before Kakashi can try to think of a course of action, he feels and hears more than he sees a loud explosion that shakes the earth to its core.

A wave of Chakra crashes against them and Kakashi shivers in fear. He’s never felt such potent malice in his entire life.

Kuro calls a single name, and it’s enough to chill Kakashi to his bone.

“Madara.”

Chapter Text

Shisui is drunk. He knows he is. He has never been before, but he can tell. His mind is fuzzy and he isn't able to control his thoughts or his actions as well as he usually does. He is giggling for no reason, blood hot lava in his veins and vision fuzzy like never before.

His steps are unsteady and he has to prop a hand against the nearby buildings to keep walking in a somewhat straight line. Before he knows it, he is outside, roaming around Konoha like he owns the place, a dumb smile on his face as he wanders about the streets.

He can't really tell where he is going but he is having fun. It's a new feeling unlike any he’s ever experienced before. He suddenly understands why adults drink so much. It’s easier. It's like he could do anything, like it wouldn't have any consequences.

And so he heads towards the cemetery, because what else could he do when he is completely wasted, really. The place is dark and silent, but it’s what Shisui needs. There’s a sense of calm and serenity that never goes away inside the cemetery of Konoha.

The moon is high, but its light isn’t enough to show the name on the tombs. Shisui knows many people who’ve been buried here, and he doesn’t need any light to know who rests where. He has been here more times than he can count, from an age too young to completely understand what death means. But he isn’t here to mourn or reminisce on those lost lives. He simply wants to feel at peace.

It’s a complicated mess, inside his heart. He has too many things to think about, things he’d rather never have to question ever again. About Kuro, or Itachi, he isn’t even sure any more which is which. Who even is he, himself? If Itachi went back in time, does that mean that the Shisui in his world died, that he’s gone? That he’ll never be this man? Has this man ever existed, in the end?

It’s giving him a headache.

His fingers trace the shape of the names carved into the memorial stone. Was his written there, in some other world? Will his Itachi, his young ten-year-old cousin who has yet everything to discover about life, be added to this endless list of their dead who perished for Konoha? Would that be because of Kuro, who has changed the shape of their world? Who is he, even, to decide to do such a thing?

Shisui’s head snaps up, suddenly torn out of his thoughts by a faint noise. The movement messes with his vision and he almost tumbles over.

He feels a presence, and it’s only his long years of training that allow him, even wasted as he is, to realise that it isn’t some night bird or lost cat. It’s a shinobi who is most likely trying to hide their presence but struggling to do so. The chakra waves come in and out like crashing on the shore of his mind, and the fact that he is drunk is suddenly forgotten.

It could be an enemy, it could be a Konoha shinobi, it could even be an academy student who’s having some 4 a.m training on his own but Shisui feels an inexplicable urge to check and put his mind at ease.

He needs the adrenalin, he needs something to occupy his mind so these relentless thoughts about Kuro stop.

He tries for a Shunshin but he ends up much closer from his initial location than expected. Pouty and slightly ashamed, he walks unsteadily toward the bushes at the edge of the forest.

It all happens too fast for his drunk brain to catch up. He goes from looking behind the bushes to staring up at the moon, the heavy weight of another human pressing him into the ground.

The light catches on the man’s face and Shisui winces. There are terrible scars marring the right side of his face, and his left eye socket is simply empty but free of any blood so Shisui guesses it to be quite old of an injury. The sight is gruesome and Shisui feels a heavy pain in his chest when faced with the distorted features of this young man who looks barely older than himself.

“Don’t move, don’t make a sound, or I’ll kill you,” he says and while his voice is cold and threatening, Shisui doesn’t feel scared in the least.

The man’s chakra is weak, he is exhausted and Shisui is convinced he could easily take him out. He just hopes it isn’t the alcohol in his veins making him overconfident in his own abilities.

For a few seconds, none of them speaks or moves, Shisui remains still, staring up at the face of his opponent without a word. He studies the deep ridges in the left side of his face, the dark hole where his other eye should be, mixes up the two sides to see what he’d look like without the scar and two eyes and a sudden realisation strikes him.

The man looks familiar, and it isn’t because Shisui knows him but because he is a Uchiha.

It’s his clan, it’s people Shisui has grown up surrounded by and he can recognize within a heartbeat their particular shade of black hair and eyes, the slope of their noses, the shape of the eyes, it’s all there in this man’s face and even if he’s just been told to keep quiet, the words leave his mouth before he can stop himself.

“You’re from the Uchiha cl-,” he says in a whooshing breath that is suddenly cut short when the man applies more pressure to his stomach to keep him stuck to the ground.

“I told you to shut up,” the man spits in his ear, but as terrified as Shisui should feel, there’s only wonder and curiosity on his mind.

“What happened to your eye?” he asks and he is expecting the man to get angry at him for speaking up again, yet he doesn’t.

He falls silent and raises a trembling hand to his face, his fingers brushing lightly against the deep scars around his empty socket. His eyes are wide and confused, as if he had just realised what had happened to his face.

“My mask...” he says in a trembling voice which makes him seem much younger and a lot less dangerous than mere seconds ago.

Shisui is still drunk, and there’s nothing to stop him from acting on his impulses on a daily basis so with so much alcohol in his system, he definitely isn’t about to back down. He raises his hand and points at the man’s scars with a small smile.

“Don’t look so scared, scars are awesome. I’ve got one above my hip, wanna see?” For a few seconds, the man simply blinks at him, a bewildered look on his face. But then, it breaks in a small twisted smile that looks awfully close to endearing for a drunk man. That face would be chilling and terrifying to anyone else.

“You’re completely insane. I’ve got you trapped, I could kill you, who cares about your damn scar,” the man says and even if the aggressive tone is making its way back to his voice, Shisui isn’t fazed in the least.

“You look cute when you laugh,” Shisui says, but this time the man doesn’t laugh. He freezes, eyes wide open and mouth slack.

“You are fucking insane,” he whispers, but the bite to his words seems to be less harsh and more confused.

“Drunk, know the difference,” Shisui answers with his most idiotic smile. He knows no one can resist him when he plays the fool, not even some unknown, angry Uchiha man. It’s one of his best qualities if he could say so himself.

As Shisui is chuckling, something drops on his cheek and he realises that it’s warm, fresh blood trickling down from the man’s hand. He suddenly doesn’t feel so merrily drunk any more.

“You’re hurt,” he says as he forcefully sits up, the other man letting out a startled cry when Shisui grabs his arm and repositions the two of them so that they are sitting side by side.

“Let go!” he orders in a loud voice, eyes filled with pain while he struggles to get his arm free of Shisui’s hold.

“No, I want to help you,” Shisui states with a smile as he grabs some band-aids from his weapon pouch.

He never leaves his house without it, even when going to a party and he has never been as glad to have this habit. For a while, it’s a stupid struggle between an injured man and a wasted teenager, the stranger growing weaker as time goes by and his complaints quieter.

In the end, it is Shisui’s determination that wins, and in a matter of minutes, the man’s arm is entirely bandaged, a few spots already tainted red with fresh blood.

Shisui is far from sober, but not enough not to notice the odd colour of the man’s arm. It is much whiter than the other, and the holes out of which blood is pouring are shaped like nothing he’s ever seen. It’s nothing more than a punctured limp limb, ugly and messy, as if thorns had ripped apart the skin.

“What happened to you?” he ends up asking, and while he isn’t expecting an answer, it still stings when all he gets is a glare filled with hatred.

“You helped me out of your own volition, I’m not indebted to you. Leave me the fuck alone,” the man spits and yeah, Shisui’s feelings do get a bit hurt but he plasters a grin on his face anyway.

“True, but I’m cute, so tell me.”

The man stares, and stares. He doesn’t say anything for a few seconds and Shisui is starting to grow worried when suddenly, the man chuckles. It’s not exactly a laugh, too shy and short, but it’s bubbling out of the man’s mouth hidden behind a hand as if the sound could be forced down. The man’s eye crinkles and Shisui’s own grin becomes more genuine.

“You’re weird. You’re by far the most senseless person I’ve ever met,” the man says, but with the remains of a smile on his face and the slight tilt in his voice, Shisui takes it as a compliment.

“It’s my best trait-” he begins to answer but his voice dies out. He feels as if the air is weighing down on him, there’s an unshakable feeling of fear and terror gripping Shisui.

It’s hard to breathe and hard to think. All that’s on his mind is running away. He turns towards the stranger but the man isn’t looking at him. All emotions have been wiped away from his face as he stares straight ahead, a terrible look of calm and misplaced serenity that chill Shisui’s entire being.

“He’s coming.”

°°°

Obito grips his newly reformed arm with force, the white and sensitive flesh almost tearing under the pressure of his fingertips. His breath is shallow and irregular, the crisp air of the night alike burning acid in his lungs. He can’t keep running, but he is way too close to Konoha for comfort.

It’s almost laughable that when in panic, his Sharingan would drop him near the cemetery of all places, right where he had fought and lost against his former teacher.

What would Minato think if he could see him? Obito thinks he’d be disappointed. He makes a sorry sight, his hair a mess of dried blood and mud, his right arm limp and unmoving where he cradles it against his chest. The proud colours of the Akatsuki robes have been dirtied by his run through the forest and his fight with his pursuer, the red clouds no longer shine under the moonlight.

Obito sheds the coat, it’s slowing him down and if he understands what the hell just went down at the base then he won’t need it any more. He has been betrayed, or he betrayed them, he can’t be really sure until he has taken the time to recall the events and analyse what happened.

Obito bites down on his lip hard enough to draw blood, a small pained moan echoing through the forest. He chokes down a pitiful sob that threatens to leave his lips and instead focuses on his fury. Even without the Akatsuki, he can still fulfil his goal. He’ll find a way. Surely.

‘You’re just a toy that I’ve been playing with...’

Obito locks his jaw, knuckles whitening.

‘...the Tsukuyomi jutsu was a lie...’

He’ll make Zetsu pay. He’ll lick his wounds patiently until he is strong enough to defeat him. He’ll take him down along with his surrealist and insane plans of bringing back this goddess to life. Obito won’t be his toy any more, he’ll rebel and just make do on his own.

‘The Tsukuyomi jutsu was a lie I’ve been feeding you and Madara.’

A sob does leave his throat this time. He has spent five years training hard enough to avenge Rin and all those who have perished because of their corrupted world. He fought his best friend, forsook his village and is responsible for his teacher’s death, all for the sake of rewriting the world with a promised Jutsu that was never meant to save the people he loves.

All of that for what? So that a humanoid plant with mommy issues could bring back to life a monstrous goddess?

It’s all really laughable. The truth always seems to be.

Obito takes a look at his arm, the blood has finally stopped pouring out at an alarming rate, but he has lost too much already. He can’t control his chakra as well as he usually would and his vision feels slowed and hazy.

All drowsiness is forcefully pushed away when Obito picks up the sound of footsteps. They’re light and controlled, but the stranger is visibly making no effort to go by unnoticed with the amount of noise made.

Probably not a shinobi then, Obito decides, and within the next second, he has left his hideout behind the bushes to slam into a lanky young man. They both go down, the younger boy with a high yelp of fear and surprise, Obito with a grunt of pain when his arm gets yanked during the fall.

Obito takes no more than a second to study the man he has just pinned to the ground and it’s enough to chill his bones. He’s clearly an Uchiha even with the curls, the shapes of the lashes and the slope of the nose too distinctive not to be recognized by Obito.

But of course, it isn’t just any Uchiha, it is Konoha’s latest genius, Shisui, whose immaculate record of successful mission has only ever been rivalled by their other genius, Kakashi.

It’d be a tough fight for Obito on a regular day and an impossible one with these odds. He’s suffering from severe blood loss, he only has one arm to fight and Zetsu is on his tail. He needs to get out of here.

“Don’t move, don’t make a sound, or I’ll kill you,” he tells Shisui, going for intimidation first, but the boy doesn’t seem phased in the least.

His cheeks are slightly red and his eyes unfocused as they roam around Obito’s face. For a second, he fears Shisui could somehow recognize him even if they have never even talked. After all, they were both Uchiha orphans that no one wanted to look after. Shisui’s eyes are warm even as he stares fearlessly into his right eye. A small smile makes its way onto his face and his eyes crinkle.

“You’re from the Uchiha c-”

Obito’s blood freezes and he digs his knee deeper into the young man’s stomach. The teen lets out a choked sound of pain and his sentence is cut short. Panic runs through Obito’s entire body. He isn’t well enough to fight someone as strong as Shisui, he needs to find a solution now that’s he’s been recognized to get the hell out of Konoha before more problematic people come. He needs a way out, he needs to-

“What happened to your eye?”

Obito’s entire body feels like it’s been dumped in a pool of ice.

Shivers are racking his body as he raises a trembling hand to his face. The wind picks up and he feels it on his lips, can almost taste the sweet smell of Konoha’s oaks. His vision isn’t obstructed the way it usually is and suddenly Obito understands why Shisui has so easily recognized him. His mask has been destroyed in his fight against Zetsu.

It’s the first time in many years that his face is revealed to the world.

Obito’s eye stop to stare right into Shisui and what he sees in them roots him to the spot. They stop to study the right side of his face deformed by the scars and the empty eye socket. Obito knows how bad it looks, he’s seen it countless of times by now and he can never push down a vague sense of disgust when faced with his own features.

Shisui doesn’t look queasy at all though, simply curious and confused. Obito didn’t think he’d ever meet someone who’d see his face and remain as unperturbed as Shisui.

“Don’t look so scared, scars are awesome. I’ve got one above my hip, wanna see?”

°°°

Itachi had been ready for almost anything when he had felt the sudden surge of deadly and cold power that is Obito’s Chakra. Another attack on Konoha, a raid to get his hands on the Nine-Tails, the beginning of some sort of guerilla war, anything really, and none of them included Shisui defending Obito from White Zetsu.

Kakashi comes to a halt behind him, the two of them standing a few hundred meters away from the fight. They’re not close enough that the three men would detect them while fighting, but not far enough that Itachi could be unsure about what he is seeing.

Obito looks pretty worn down and is staying back while Shisui fights Zetsu, his tanto slicing unsteadily through the air. It’s an insult to Shisui’s real technique that he weaves aimlessly his weapon like this. He’s very obviously drunk, and while this half of Zetsu isn’t the deadliest, it isn’t exactly weak either.

But there’s not enough time now for Itachi to wonder why the hell Shisui is defending Obito. He needs to do something. He clenches his jaw and fists, and lingers to look back at Kakashi and check the man’s expression but it looks as if he hasn’t noticed his supposedly long-dead best friend bleeding on the ground so Itachi guesses he’ll be fine for now.

He dashes in, a hand falling to his hip to reach back for his tanto as the other starts rushing through seals. He aims a Fireball at Zetsu, hoping the attack to be more effective against someone plantish in nature, but his opponent disappears into the ground, leaving only a few strands of grass to be singed. Kakashi joins Itachi on the battleground, Sharingan activated as he looks around them, searching for Zetsu’s hideout.

Itachi glances back at Shisui. His cousin’s hair is wild and there are a few cuts on his face but otherwise he looks healthy for someone as drunk as he is. Itachi distinctly remembers his cousin downing five shots in quick succession before starting a rather invigorated dance about an hour ago.

“Where did he go?” Shisui asks and Itachi focuses on the task at hand.

“He can disappear into the ground,” Itachi explains and suddenly, there’s another person staring hard at him.

Itachi looks over his shoulder to glance at Obito. The man’s face is entirely exposed and had he not known who he was already, Itachi would have stared for a second too long. The scars are a horrible sight, they run deep and leave stark shadows on his features.

Itachi has never seen the man unmasked before. He vaguely remembers what he looked like as a child and has seen pictures, but the adult and scarred version of Obito, this one Itachi has never seen and it is yet the one he knows best. How ironical.

His right eye socket is entirely empty, leaving an eerie hole where his other Sharingan should shine a bright red. Obito’s other eye is filled with rage, but it’s not directed at Itachi. He is furious, more angry at the world than Itachi has ever seen him.

“Why are you helping me?” Obito asks, voice tinged with confusion.

Kakashi turns to the sound of his voice and studies him for a second without reaction. For a moment, Itachi thinks he won’t recognize him. After all, Obito is supposed to be dead and it’s been a good five years. But he only has one Sharingan, he looks like a Uchiha and the right side of his body still shows the repercussions of the Kannabi Bridge incident.

There’s a slight widening of Kakashi’s eyes and a sharp intake of breath. His entire body grows taut, but before he can act, or Itachi can try to salvage what he can of this terrible situation, Zetsu grows out of the ground right in front of them, a giant plant mouth opening wide before it closes on Obito’s entire body.

Shisui is as always faster than any of them even wasted and in a flash of movement, his blade comes slicing down through the outer shell of the plant, revealing Obito’s limp arm. Kakashi rushes in and digs inside the mush of green to grab Obito and drag him out of the gruesome prison of Zetsu’s body.

Their opponent screams in pain and rage as he disappears into the ground once more. Itachi glances at the three other men, Obito is cradled in Kakashi’s arms, his body limp and Chakra weak. Shisui is digging through his pouch, fishing out a first-aid kit a second later that he uses to tend to Obito’s wounds.

It’s a tearing sight, to see his friends care for their enemy unknowingly. In a different world, this man was going to end them all.

Itachi grits his teeth and readies his stance, tanto gripped tightly in his hands. He doesn’t have the time to question whether he is doing the right thing, or what exactly led them to this point. He has people he wants to protect and he shall do so even if it means standing up for someone he hates as well.

It doesn’t take long for Zetsu to reappear but Itachi is expecting him this time, and he stays close to the three others. The second the tip of his giant mouth comes out of the ground, he slices down hard and another bit of Zetsu’s head comes flying. He screams in agony, immediately going back into the ground.

“Kuro, we need to trap him up here,” Shisui tells him as he finishes bandaging Obito’s arm and Itachi knows, but he can’t think of a way to do that.

“Or I could send him somewhere he won’t bother us,” another voice says and Itachi turns around. Obito has woken up and is now staring straight at Itachi with a guarded eye.

He looks pitiful, really. Most of his clothing is torn apart, revealing deep scars, old and newer ones, some that are still fresh pink, some that have just reopened and are now bleeding profusely. His hair is a mess, and his face looks ghastly, eyes both wide, one an empty socket, the other a pool of exhausted black. There’s still some of his fury left, but it’s only a shadow of what Itachi is used to.

Something happened, something big that he hadn’t planned. He hates when things don’t go the way he wants them to. Yet, it seems to happen more and more frequently this days.

“How many people can you send there right now?” Itachi asks instead, because it is indeed a good idea to use Obito’s Mangekyo Sharingan to trap Zetsu. He won’t be able to merge with the ground there, as it isn’t made from organic elements whatsoever.

“Two, three maybe,” he answers with a dark smile, and Itachi understands. Obito wants to send the two of them along with Zetsu. They’ll be free to clear up this situation once Zetsu is done and dealt with without Kakashi or Shisui to get in their way. But they’ll be stuck together until Obito is strong enough to send them back.

It’s a dangerous plan that requires Itachi to trust Obito. It could be a ploy for all he knows, designed so that he’d follow Obito in his dimension where all of Akatsuki is waiting for him.

“Send me with you,” Kakashi suddenly says and Itachi’s head snaps away from Obito, all thoughts of treason forgotten.

“No,” Itachi rushes to say, and Kakashi looks up to study him with a confused expression.

“No you don’t get it, I think I know this man and-”

“Not now, Kakashi, he is the leader of Akatsuki and one of his men is trying to murder him. Explanations will come later,” Itachi tells him and the younger man immediately shuts up, both eyes open wide like saucers.

A small breathy sigh leaves his lips hidden behind his mask, Itachi can distinguish them trembling all the same.

“The second Zetsu appears, teleport the three of us,” Itachi orders, and Obito nods.

He is being oddly complacent so far and Itachi is starting to really question his decision. Before he can change his mind, though, a speck of green appears between his feet and Zetsu comes rushing out, arms extended towards Itachi’s face.

Before his claws can reach him, though, the world starts spinning and a terrible sensation of falling through the void grips him. He comes crashing down, legs buckling and unsteady, a hand braced against the ground to push himself up.

He feels like throwing up but suddenly there’s a hand grabbing his arm and it’s only his honed reflexes that allow him to whirl around fast enough to cut off the limb with his tanto before he gets harmed.

Zetsu wails and stumbles away from Itachi, cradling the stump to his chest. The white skin starts moving and reassembling until another hand grows out of his cut off wrist, a disgusting wet sound echoing in the space.

Although he had been aware of this secluded space accessible only thanks to Obito’s Sharingan, Itachi had never been there and it’s about as empty and dark as he’d expected it to be. It is a puzzling place, made of different columns and squares flying through space. It’s a disorganized mess that looks like nothing he’s seen before. Itachi can’t help but wonder if the place arranges itself based on Obito’s mastery of his Sharingan, or his own mind palace’s stability.

“I didn’t think you’d go as low as to ally yourself with the enemy, Obito,” Zetsu says, and Itachi follows his line of sight to see Obito sitting down a few feet behind Itachi, a smile on his face. It’s twisted and dark.

“You betrayed me first, you insane mongrel,” he shoots back and for a second, Itachi lets himself hope that he actually hasn’t fallen head first into a trap.

Zetsu comes rushing in, and without anyone to protect or having to worry about Obito betraying him, Itachi is focused and determined to put an end to this fight as fast as possible. He summons his Susanoo, feeling his own powerful Chakra surge up and cradle him like an old friend.

The glowing red ribs of his Susanoo shield him from Zetsu’s claws and his opponent falls back, hand burned by the surrounding ethereal fire. Chakra gathers in his eyes and the tomoe of his Sharingan spin until they stop to form the intricate shape of his Mangekyou Sharingan. Itachi focuses, and Amaterasu is launched, black fire appearing out of his thin air in a track that rushes towards Zetsu.

A few ambers catch on his leg and in a matter of seconds, the fire has spread and soon, the anguished and pained cries of Zetsu are drowned out by the sound of the roaring fire.

There’s nothing to burn inside Obito’s dimension, nothing but Zetsu and the creature writhes and screams, falling to his knees and extending his hands towards Itachi, crawling towards him in a last attempt to launch an attack.

The black flames of Amaterasu are unmerciful and soon, his limbs turn to ashes, a horrible stench of burned skin hanging in the air.

“Kaguya shall live even if I die, Obito, Madara will come back, I will come back!” Zetsu screams, and Itachi can’t make sense of what he is saying but Obito seems to do.

He takes a step towards Zetsu, fists tightly shut and eye burning with a hatred more potent than any Itachi has seen before.

“I don’t care about you or your Goddess, just die like the dog you are, scum,” he spits venomously as he gathers the last droplets of his Chakra to launch a Fire Ball Jutsu that shakes the entire dimension with its surprising strength.

The ground Zetsu had been resting upon vibrates and soon, cracks appear. Itachi jumps back, quickly followed by Obito and a few seconds later, the entire block of stone crumbles, fire spreading and licking up every single piece of the marble.

Zetsu disappears under the rumbles just as the entire floor breaks and crashes to the endless pits of Obito’s time-space. It was an easy fight, almost too easy, but whether Zetsu died or not doesn’t matter if he remains trapped inside Obito’s Jutsu.

All thoughts of Zetsu are quickly pushed aside though, because Itachi is too focused on making sense of this exchange. The big change he hadn’t planned involves a betrayal, and some Goddess. Itachi turns to Obito, his Sharingan still activated a potent threat. The man doesn’t exactly cower under his glare, and it’s only because he looks honest and all malice is gone from his eye that Itachi hesitates before using his Tsukuyomi to get answers.

No one who has gone through what Obito has gone can remain entirely sane. He is an unstable man that could probably lose all sanity very easily if triggered. Itachi can’t trust him, he knows that. But for a second still, he hesitates.

“Explain yourself,” Itachi allows but Obito’s eyebrows furrows and he looks confused.

“I think you’re the one who needs to do some explaining,” he says and Itachi almost scoffs at his boldness.

“I’ll tell you what you need to know after you’ve explained how you ended up betraying your own organisation,” he lies easily, falling back to his Anbu trained mindset. Itachi needs to hold the upper hand and he won’t pause before deceiving his target.

“I didn’t betray anyone. I overheard Zetsu’s two halves talking together, about some mystic plan to resurrect a Goddess. They confessed the rest once they realized I’d been standing there. I don’t know who you are but we are not enemies any more. The Infinite Tsukuyomi was a lie.”

Itachi can only blink. Obito’s voice is a bit on the frantic side, but he sounds uncomfortably truthful. Yet, the information doesn’t seem to be able to get processed by Itachi’s brain. It just doesn’t make any sense. Obito has created the Akatsuki in order to launch the Infinite Tsukuyomi. Everything he’s ever done, everything Itachi has had to do… It has all been for this forsaken Jutsu that should have ended their whole world.

And now Obito expects Itachi to just nod and accept the fact that it’s all been for nothing?

Itachi doesn’t get angry. He never does. But in that instant, he is furious. There’s an all-consuming anger that is slowly taking hold of his mind and body. The massacre of his entire clan, the traumatism he had to inflict upon his own beloved brother, Shisui’s suicide, Itachi’s decision to go back in time… Every single one of Itachi’s deepest and darkest nightmares has happened because of Obito’s mad desire to recreate a world of lies and illusions. With a Jutsu that- what? Never existed?

‘The Infinite Tsukuyomi was a lie.’

Chakra wells up in him, like an overflowing source of fury and mania that can’t be stopped. His vision seems to waver, and he can hear his heartbeat echoing in his mind. It’s all he can hear, and it’s maddening.

Itachi can’t even think of anything to say. The only thing on his mind are his mistakes and wrongdoings that are all linked together by the existence of this man, Uchiha Obito.

Itachi distantly realises there’s a warmth cradling him, and when his vision finally comes into focus once more, it’s blindingly sharp. He can see the flames of his Susanoo, the threads of Chakra it radiates and the way they lick at Obito’s body. The man is shaking.

“Hey hey, what… What- what’re you doing? I’ve just told you we were-” Obito starts but the sound of his voice is drowned out by the clamour of his heart.

Itachi’s breathing is shallow, his thoughts feel jumbled and he barely notices his Susanoo readying its stance. Its grip on the hilt of its sword tightens, its flaming Chakra flaring in response.

Obito’s eye widens. His body starts to dematerialize but Itachi is fast, too fast for his own brain to catch up. He is spurred on by some mad desperation and just before Obito can leave the time-space, his own hand reaches out in synch with his Susanoo’s.

They reach as one Obito and merge with his Chakra as the man’s silhouette swirls. Itachi doesn’t heed the lurching feeling of changing dimensions this time. He doesn’t even waste a second looking around to see where Obito dropped them. Itachi doesn’t feel the wind on his cheeks. He doesn’t care for the sweet smell of nature or the voices screaming behind him. They’re calling someone, they’re calling for ‘Kuro’.

Itachi reaches for his weapon and he mercilessly stabs Obito’s stomach, blade plunged far enough that the tip is visible through Obito’s bloodied back. He is deaf to the cries of his friends.

Obito screams but the sound gets cut off. He throws up a disgusting mixture of red fluids that stain Itachi’s clothes but he doesn’t have the mind to care. Itachi thrusts the blade out, forming an elegant circle with a flick of his wrist to get rid of the blood tainting his weapon, old habits showing in time of needs.

Obito crumbles to his knees, arms gripping his middle in a vain attempt to stop the blood from flowing.

A bright pain blossoms in his cheek and Itachi goes from looking down at Obito to looking up at the stars. Shisui throws himself at him again, another fist hitting him on the other side of his face. The pain is bright and for the first time in what feels like a while, Itachi can think clearly again.

The pain is strong, he probably has broken something in his fall and Shisui’s knees are digging in his stomach.

“Are you completely insane?!” Shisui screams in his face and Itachi can’t come up with a reasonable answer.

“He needs immediate medical attention,” comes Kakashi’s wobbly and desperate voice.

Itachi looks over and it feels like another punch when he sees Kakashi carefully cradling the body of his old friend.

“No,” Itachi begins, but his thoughts are a bit behind. None of them has enough time to spare him with how urgent the situation is.

“Shut up,” Kakashi bites out as he turns around to glare at him. His eyes look a bit wet, but its could be a trick of the moonlight. Itachi feels sobered up all of a sudden.

“Kuro, what were you thinking?” Shisui asks him but Itachi has no answer. The longer he stares at Kakashi’s devastated face the heavier the guilt in his stomach feels.

“Shisui, just leave him alone, we need to get Obito to Konoha’s hospital,” Kakashi says in a rush, voice wavering over the man’s name. Itachi can’t even move.

Shisui stands up then, and he doesn’t even spare Itachi a glance before he rushes to Kakashi’s sides. They both grab Obito’s unconscious body and lift him up, a flow of blood pooling on the ground in their wake as they try to move him.

Itachi manages to sit up and his hand bumps against something wet. When he looks down, all his can see is red. Red on his clothes, red on his hand, and red on his tanto that lies abandoned in the bloodied grass next to him. The gore is starting to dry, leaving a disgusting metallic smell.

The guilt is eating at him more than his fury had been and it leaves him confused and helpless. He doesn’t know what he is supposed to do.

Before he can even try to stand up, Shisui has managed to secure Obito on his back and disappears with a Shunshin. Itachi shifts his eyes to Kakashi but the man isn’t looking at him either, he doesn’t stop to glance back and disappears as well, leaving Itachi alone in the woods with only his rushing heart as a companion.

°°°

Kakashi feels like his heart has been torn right out of his chest. It’s too painful to look at Obito’s sleeping face. He sees in the deep ridges on his left side the deaths he couldn’t prevent. He sees Rin when looking at Obito’s unconscious body and it’s driving him mad. He can feel new tears gather at the corner of his eyes, it’s a shame because he has just stopped crying.

Kakashi sighs as he tears his gaze of the best friend he had believed to be long dead and takes a step back from the bed. He should probably sleep. It’s with another sigh that he leaves the hospital room, closing the door behind him with only dark thoughts on his mind.

“Are you going to be ok?” Shisui asks him as soon as their eyes meet in the corridor.

“I’ll have to be anyway. I’m just a bit lost,” he answers and it’s mainly the truth.

Kakashi isn’t sure how he’ll cope tonight, but he’ll be alright. Especially after he’s talked with Kuro. He can’t get the vision of his blade plunging deep into Obito’s body out of his head. He thinks he understands why, though. Right before he had disappeared, he had left with enigmatic words as the only thing Kakashi could think about while they were off to some other dimension taking out a dangerous enemy.

‘This man is the leader of Akatsuki.’ Only one sentence that had wrecked everything Kakashi had known about the world.

Obito’s death had been a major turning point in his life, it had been the reason why he had changed his entire vision of what it was like to be a ninja. He had been shaped and built upon this event. His entire being had been constructed upon a pillar of lies.

“You should probably rest,” Shisui tells him with a concerned gaze and Kakashi can only agree. The thing is that he definitely won’t be able to rest until he’s heard explanations from someone.

“I want to talk to Kuro first,” is what he tells Shisui as an answer and the boy’s eyes soften.

“We both need explanations from him, Kakashi, but you also need to rest.”

Kakashi knows, but he has made up his mind already. He has often left things be, choosing to remain in the dark and let people decide for him what he should and shouldn’t know. He has trusted Kuro without even knowing who he was but this time, he won’t simply let him get away without at least telling him about Obito.

“I know, but I also need to know what’s going on,” Kakashi says and Shisui smiles sadly, but there’s understanding in his eyes as well. For someone as young as he is, Shisui has always been extremely mature. Behind his dumb smile and lame jokes is a well-trained shinobi.

“Alright, I’ll stay and watch over him if you’d like,” he offers with a nod towards the door of Obito’s hospital room.

“Thanks,” Kakashi tells him with a genuine smile. It’s tearing at his heart to leave Obito’s sides right after learning he had been alive. But his heart is screaming at him to find Kuro, too.

It’s with his resolve strengthened but his mind still a mess that Kakashi teleports out of the hospital and grimly decides to start looking around. Konoha is huge, and finding Kuro will prove to be a challenge. He won’t be giving up until he has found the man, he knows he won’t be able to rest until then.

The sun is starting to rise over the horizon and Kakashi still hasn’t found Kuro. He is growing desperate as well as worried. He has checked everywhere, from the graveyard to the Hokage’s office and even at Kuro’s home where he’d only found a groggy Deidara, upset to have been woken up.

“We’ve looked everywhere, maybe he left Konoha,” the kid says and Kakashi is once more reminded of why exactly going to Kuro’s house had been the worst decision he’d made so far. He definitely didn’t need the kid’s dry humour now.

Deidara had wanted to come look for Kuro with him as soon as he had realized why the man wasn’t in the house. At least he is a bit more tolerable when something important is going on.

“He wouldn’t have left without saying anything,” Kakashi tries, but he doesn’t even believe it himself.

“No, he definitely would have,” Deidara says and even if there’s strength behind his words, Kakashi can see the sadness brought by that thought in his eyes. Kakashi can relate. “All we can do now is guess where he could have gone.”

Call him childish, but Kakashi doesn’t even want to consider the idea that Kuro has indeed left Konoha. He will look down to his own childhood bed if it means leaving no stones unturned.

“Did we check everywhere?” Deidara asks in a sigh and Kakashi blinks at him, struck with a sudden thought.

They had checked the obvious places so far, mainly the Uchiha compound and the area around the cemetery, but not other households’ compounds. After all, why would Kuro go anywhere near Kakashi’s old house?

But once that thought has stricken, Kakashi finds that he can’t push it down, and he barely hears his own voice telling Deidara to start looking around the mountain. Kakashi doesn’t even hear the kid grovelling, he is already gathering Chakra and he is already a few Shunshin away when Deidara sighs.

The street up to the Hatake compound is horribly familiar, and Kakashi has time to reconsider his decision twice on the short way to his childhood home. Although well known, their clan is relatively small. There’s only Kakashi left, actually. With the ever expanding streets of Konoha, the few blocks of empty Hatake houses seem even smaller.

His house is still as he left it, many years ago. As soon as Kakashi had gotten his mission rewards, he had started renting out, desperate as young as he had been still to get out of the suffocating atmosphere of his home.

Kakashi didn’t think he’d ever pass that tall wood and paper door ever again. Yet, there he was, entering the childhood house that held so many painful memories. He refuses to think about what this all implies and instead tries to focus on the reason he’s here.

Kakashi doesn’t even stop to check the living room out. He knows his father’s blood isn’t there any more. He’s the one who cleaned it up after all. Still, he doesn’t want to take a step in there, and he makes a beeline for his bedroom.

Kakashi doesn’t know what he expects to find there, but it’s certainly not Kuro, in the flesh, clothes still dirty with blood, to be sitting on his barren bed. Maybe Kakashi has a prescience gift he never knew about that had drawn him there.

Still, he can only hang awkwardly at his own bedroom door, hand still on the doorknob as he stares helplessly at the reason of most of his worries. Kuro looks back evenly, he doesn’t cower under his stare and even in the darkness of the room Kakashi can distinguish two twin pools of black returning his stare.

“I’m sorry, for intruding,” Kuro offers, of all the things he could have said, and Kakashi can’t help a dry chuckle. Before he can voice his annoyance though, the man speaks up and his usual bored tone is nowhere to be found. “Is he going to make it?”

Kakashi takes in a curt breath, lets the words wash over him and tries to breathe out evenly before he answers.

“Yeah, he’s out of the woods for now,” he tells him, and Kuro seems to relax almost imperceptibly.

For a while, none of them speaks or moves, only the silence being heard in a bedroom that Kakashi remembers too well. He doesn’t get to start spiralling down his deepest nightmares because Kuro gets up. The man moves closer, slowly but with confidence, so that he can stand next to Kakashi

“I owe you an explanation,” Kuro starts, and he’s close enough that Kakashi can notice the ridges under his eyes. They seem darker than usual. “I can’t tell you everything, I don’t even know the full story, but I’ll try to make it clearer for you.”

“I just want to know about Obito,” Kakashi cuts in, and after a second he adds, “and more about you.”

Kuro stares at him for a few seconds, he looks serious, he always does, but somehow Kakashi feels more seized up than usual. Then, the man sighs, breaks eye contact and starts speaking. Kakashi can only listen.

Kuro tells him about Obito, how he survived thanks to Madara, how he was manipulated into becoming the man he is today. Kuro tells him that Madara ordered the creation of Akatsuki, that Obito and Zetsu had been the mastermind all along and that the Akatsuki’s true goal was collecting the Bijuu to use a Jutsu that could create a new world.

The words come spilling out quickly, and Kakashi doesn’t dare interrupt. He can distantly hear his heart beat grow stronger, but it’s drown out by the the man’s steady voice. He latches onto Kuro’s words, thoughts rushing. He liked his theories better.

They actually made more sense than what Kuro is telling him. It’s too confusing, too messy and he simply cannot understand how Obito could be convinced to do such a thing. He has been destroyed by Rin’s death too, but Kakashi isn’t about to make the world pay for it.

Suddenly, Kakashi resents his friend, he hates that instead of coming back safely to Konoha, Obito trusted a complete stranger and let himself be coerced into this mad plan. But Kuro isn’t finished, and Kuro doesn’t even pause before admitting in a quick breath that the jutsu was a lie.

This Zetsu pawn had been the mastermind all along and coerced the legendary Madara himself, as well as Obito, to do his biding. He promised a Jutsu that would reshape the world, when it was meant to resurrect a Goddess. Kakashi really liked his theories better.

If Kakashi had been anxious, a bit angry, and mostly confused, he was now completely desperate and lost. He doesn’t even have heart to resent Kuro for harming Obito. That man isn’t the ten-year-old boy Kakashi once knew and even if it’s hard to forget about that memory, he has since then hardened his heart as a shinobi.

Kakashi hates that after all this time, it’s his shinobi mindset, so deeply ingrained in his brain, that dictates how he lives his life.

When Kakashi manages to look back at Kuro, he finds that the man is meeting his gaze this time. Rather than his usual calm, the man exudes some worry for once, he almost looks as if he’s bracing himself for Kakashi’s reaction.

Kakashi realises then, what this implies on a larger scale. Obito had been trying to resurrect Madara, so that they could use the Nine Bijuu to transform the whole world. There is a Goddess involved.

Kuro knew about this all, somehow.

Suddenly, Kakashi thinks he’d rather not learn more about Kuro’s identity. He probably needs to take akk that in, before moving on to something he can only guess to be wilder.

“Okay,” Kakashi supplies after a while and Kuro blinks at him.

“Okay,” he echoes, voice flat and Kakashi shrugs. “That’s all you have to say?”

“Well, it’s not like there’s anything else to say,” Kakashi answers, matter-of-fact.

Kakashi’s entire world-view has just been shifted, what he feels can’t be summarized with words. Before Kuro can decide to drop any more unwanted metaphorical bombs, Kakashi makes up his mind on what to do.

There’s only thing he’s ever known how to do. Push through.

“So, what’s next?” Kakashi asks and Kuro’s mouth hangs open, cut short in his speech.

Kakashi pushes through the fact that his long-dead best friend is alive, he pushes through the fact that he’s standing in his childhood bedroom for the first time in ages. He ignores all unwanted thoughts and pushes through it all.

“Next?” Kuro inquires suddenly, his voice bringing Kakashi back to reality.

“Next on your to-do list to save the world,” Kakashi answers, a newly-found determination giving weight to his words.

Kuro is much alike himself, in the end. They are shinobi, through and through, and they need a purpose to feel whole. Kuro has a goal, and Kakashi has been aimlessly going about his life for ages.

He needs to find a purpose.

Kuro stares at him again, and even if his eyes are black, Kakashi feels a shiver run down his spine. Even without the Sharingan threatening him, Kakashi feels rooted to the spot.

“We need to take down all of Akatsuki,” is his answer. It comes after a long, painful second, of intense staring, and the words take Kakashi’s breath away.

He ponders over the words for a few moments, worrying about what exactly that entails, but finds it all washed away by the tentative look on Kuro’s face. Kakashi wouldn’t dare call it hopeful, but he has noticed how Kuro has carefully avoided bringing back to topic of his identity.

That silence speaks volumes, because it means Kuro won’t offer the whole truth, and Kakashi has to respect that. He feels compelled to.

It’s a good thing Kakashi has never been one to back down from an adventure. He enjoys mysteries.

“Let’s take ‘em down then.”

Chapter Text

Hiruzen has been awake for less than an hour and he already has had enough for the day. He's got a headache and it's called Kuro. He hadn't been expecting to be woken up at the sunrise by Anbu knocking on his door hard enough to make it tremble all the way to the Hokage's office.

Now that he knows why exactly he was torn out of his sleep he thinks he'd rather be back in bed even if his dreams had been less than pleasant. Things have happened while he was lost in a relentless slumber filled with Akatsuki and it seems that his nightmares have come to life.

"So you're telling me that the head of Akatsuki is currently being treated in our hospital?"

Kuro nods. Hiruzen sighs. He hopes one day this man will stop wrecking havoc in his village. It's a lot to take in when he has been awake for such a short amount of time and Hiruzen would rather be having some tea than this conversation.

"What do you expect me to do with him?" He asks, already terrified of what the answer might be.

The answer is much more terrifying. Kuro explains the events in a calm and collected voice but beneath this cool demeanour, Hiruzen can see that the man is just as lost as he is. Kuro tells him about the Kannabi Bridge, and while Hiruzen listens he feels his heartbeat quicken.

He is an old man, he has seen a lot but the truth that Kuro is bringing him is much heavier than anything he had imagined. Oh of course Hiruzen had speculated, wondered and thought about what secrets Kuro had been hiding. Never had he thought he’d be suddenly presented with facts as world-breaking.

Madara had been alive, he had been lurking in the shadows, waiting for the right opportunity to strike. Kuro moves on to explain how Madara took Obito under his wing, how this young and bright kid came to be the head of Akatsuki and is now unconscious in their hospital.

While it seems to finally be the end of some mysteries, it’s also the beginning of new worries for Hiruzen.

"For now, Obito has left Akatsuki and I am not sure any more what their next move could be,” Kuro finishes.

Hiruzen would sigh again but he is too busy trying to make sense of the situation and what they should do now. He glances at Kuro only to find the man looking outside the window, a conflicted look on his face. There are bags under his eyes and the deeps ridges in his face seem to cast bigger shadows than usual. He is worn out.

"Kuro, you have been working hard since you arrived in Konoha," Hiruzen starts and Kuro's eyes fly back to him, a sour look on his face as he probably already knows where he is going with this. "You probably could use some rest."

Kuro's eyes harden and he takes a step closer to the desk, "No, I can't rest now, Akatsuki will still try to get their hands on the Bijuus and-"

"Stop," Hiruzen cuts in.

He can recognize the burning desire in Kuro's eyes, his own used to shine the same light. He wants to be useful, needs it, even, to feel whole. Down to his core, he is a Konoha shinobi, trained and raised the same way Hiruzen had done with his own students.

"You will rest," he tells him, "that is your mission for now. I will see to the Bijuus' safety.”

Kuro doesn't seem satisfied with his new goal at all, his stare is heavy like steel. Hiruzen gets it, but for once he won't make the same mistake again. Not now that he has been given a second chance with Kuro's arrival in Konoha. He feels an inexplicable draw to this young man who seems to be ready to lose his life if it's to protect everyone he loves.

He is so much alike Minato that it sometimes hurts to look at him.

"Understood," Kuro says in a bitter tone as he leaves through the window of the Hokage's office.

Hiruzen does sigh this time. Younglings these days aren't grateful enough for rest. He would rather sleep some days than have to be confronted with his duty as Hokage.

He is getting far too old for this job. He was already too old when Minato took the hat and now that he has it back, he is way too ancient. He needs to find someone to take this responsibility from him soon.

°°°

Rest has never suited Itachi’s tastes. It is too boring for him, he doesn’t know what he is supposed to do with himself without a goal to fulfil. Without an activity, he is left alone with thoughts that are too dark for him to remain calm. He gets assaulted with pictures from his past, moments in his life that he regrets more than anything. He thinks and thinks, unable to stop-

“KURO!” Itachi has barely had to time push the door to the lent apartment that Deidara has jumped on him, hugging him tight. “You’re back!” The kid screams right in his ear but Itachi doesn’t nearly feel as bothered as he probably should, as bothered as he would have been a few months ago.

Deidara’s blond hair is in his face, it’s soft and shiny, the twin blue eyes that stare at him with unguarded affection are slightly squinted from his too wide grin. There’s a strange feeling in Itachi’s chest. It’s slightly painful.

“Yeah, I’m back,” he greets with a soft smile that has made its way onto his face without him even noticing.

Deidara’s own smile grows even bigger, his eyes closing gently as he slowly lets go of Itachi. The man notices that the kid is already in fighting gear, shoes on as if he had been about to leave and upon noticing his inquisitive glance, Deidara sheepishly smiles.

“I was going to go look for you… Not that I was worried, of course, I know you’re a big boy and stuff but still, you hadn’t been home in a while and this idiot Kakashi wouldn’t tell me anything-”

Itachi stops listening, ears catching on that single word he hadn’t heard in such a long time.

“Home.”

With Kakashi, and Deidara, in Konoho, close to his younger brother and Shisui alive. It all suddenly hits then, after his conversation with Kakashi. He has a home now.

The pain in his chest grows bigger. It blossoms and flourishes larger than ever before and he feels a rush of unexpected emotions for this small child, this kid that hated him in a different universe, someone he had personally sent upon the dark road of being an Akatsuki member at too young an age.

He has become his home. Itachi takes a step forward and grabs Deidara’s hand, pushing their bodies closer together until they’re hugging like seconds before, but this time it’s Itachi that initiated it and he isn’t sure he has ever done that before.

Not with his parents, not with Shisui, maybe not even with Sasuke ever since he was old enough to walk. Suddenly, he regrets that he never has. Now they’re all gone and not his to hug any more.

When Kuro lets go of Deidara, the child takes a wobbling step back, his hair now a messier bundle of disarranged locks. He looks up at Itachi with a look akin to wonder and amazement. A bit confused too. His face looks redder than before, but the smile that blossoms on his face shines brighter than usual.

“That was weird but ok,” he says as he puts his hands in his pocket, his blush deepening. Itachi feels embarrassed too, but somehow he doesn’t regret acting on impulse, for once. The warmth in his chest is making him content.

“So how about we finally go train?” Kuro offers and Deidara’s eyes grow big.

“For real!? For real!? Let’s go!” He shouts happily, already running through the door, jumping up and down all the while.

°°°

“Keep your centre of gravity lower!” Kuro orders and Deidara obeys, bending his knees and back to put more strength behind his throws.

The shurikens lodge themselves right in the centre of the target and Deidara jumps up, first pumping the air. He is one outstanding student and he makes rapid progress. Kakashi wishes he had Kuro’s patience, though, because Deidara keeps whining for praise and being an insufferable ball of energy.

Kakashi has been watching the two of them train for over an hour and while Deidara’s throws are getting incredibly clean for his age, his screams are starting to get on his nerves. Maybe he should find something else to do besides being a creep and watching Kuro every chance he gets.

It’s hard not to, especially after what happened at Gai’s party, then Obito’s reappearance, and then their talk. Kakashi is ashamed that the one memory he gets most stuck on is the very first one.

He can still remember every second of their kiss, the softness of Kuro’s lips and the slight shivers racking his body. It’s also conveniently helping him with not thinking about his supposedly long-dead best friend being treated in the hospital.

There’s a sudden whooshing of air that tears Kakashi out of his reverie and he ducks quickly, barely avoiding a shuriken that gets stuck on the trunk above his head.

“Ah! The idiot Kakashi!” Deidara screams and Kakashi sighs. Just how bad of a ninja is he to get noticed by a seven-year-old kid?

“You’re the idiot, how could you even aim that far away from the target?” Kakashi counters as he gets up and picks up the shuriken. Deidara’s eyebrows furrows and his face grows red.

“I thought I felt something from over there, it was probably your stupidity.”

The dig is so low that it doesn’t even wound Kakashi’s pride. He’d laugh but he wouldn’t want Deidara to grow louder so he simply stares blankly at the brat, one eyebrow raised as if to as “really, kid?” and it’s enough for Deidara’s face to get even redder.

The brat stomps towards him, fists clenched and fire in his eyes but Kuro suddenly appears between them, a look of appreciation directed at the kid.

“Nice throw, with a bit more training you’ll be able to hit Kakashi,” he says and Kakashi doesn’t think he imagines the way his lips curve up slightly in a teasing smirk. The bastard thinks it’s funny.

“Thanks,” Deidara answers, the sour look on his face long gone to be replaced by a pleased smile. The two look at each other before they turn their heads in unison towards Kakashi, an expectant look on both their faces.

“So, what are you hiding there for, Kakashi?” Kuro asks, one eyebrow raised and it’s entirely unfair that he looks as handsome as he does in the good old Konoha uniforms and its tepid colours. The sun shines brightly, making his hair look even softer and almost brown. His eyes are twin pools of black that stare at him unguardedly.

“Er, well, I, uh...” Kakashi unhelpfully says, unable to come up with a reasonable answer that will make him look less creepy than he already seems, lurking behind bushes to watch Kuro.

“Well, now that you’re here, you might as well participate,” Kuro says with a small smile as he glances at Deidara and all Kakashi can think is ‘no, no, no, no way is he wasting his day off training with that brat-’

“Deidara, go take a small break.” Kakashi’s eyes widen and he stares at Kuro who looks back evenly. “How about a spar, Hatake Kakashi?” He asks with a smirk that looks too good on his face. Kakashi kind of wants to punch it off.

He wasn’t exactly in the mood for a fight but ever since he had met Kuro, he hasn’t been able to shake off his curiosity. How strong exactly is he? Kakashi is quite confident in his own abilities, he has a few wins on Gai now and he is, after all, Konoha’s genius.

Yet, Kakashi thinks he would lose against Kuro. He still wonders how well he can hold his own.

“Fine, let’s spar,” Kakashi says as he grabs his headband to reveal his Sharingan.

He knows he has to go all out if he wants to keep up, and he hopes speed might give him an advantage. Kuro, however, doesn't even give him half a second to take as much as a single breath in.

The man rushes in immediately and once the blows start coming, they don’t stop. Kuro alternates between high kicks and powerful punches that Kakashi barely avoids. He quickly goes for a Sunshin, putting some distance between them but Kuro takes this opportunity to reach back grab his tanto one-handed, the other digging through his weapon pouch to take out some shurikens.

His opponent rushes in once again and it's taking all Kakashi has to avoid the man's blade, let alone the flaming shurikens he starts throwing. If it had been an actual fight, Kakashi would already be at a disadvantage, and that knowledge makes him yet again thankful that the Uchiha is his ally, and not his enemy.

Kuro's left hand comes up, forming seals while he dashes towards Kakashi, tanto brandished steadily in front of him. Kakashi ducks down, easily avoiding the blade, his own hands rising up to ready a Water Jutsu but Kuro is faster and he launches hundreds of Water Bullets that would have pierced through Kakashi's body if he had not permuted with a log at the edge of the forest.

He hides in the shadows of the bushes, studying Kuro from afar while he tries to catch his breath. He feels sore already, some of Kuro’s heavy blows will leave bruises even if they had been parred. He knows he won't be able to win, but he'd like to at least get one hit in, because Kakashi doesn't like to go down without a fight.

He reaches back and fishes out a few kunais from his weapon pouch, steadying his hands and breathing in deeply to calm his raging heartbeat. It's exhilarating to be able to fight all out like this. For someone being called a genius on a daily basis, Kakashi feels rather weak when faced with the monstrous strength of Kuro. There is simply no opening in the man's defence and his offence is well rounded as well as unpredictable.

Kakashi feels like a prey being hunted, toyed with even, by a much stronger and deadlier predator. He has no doubt that Kuro is holding back, otherwise this spar would have ended a lot faster. It's making Kakashi's blood boil.

A sudden rush of wind cuts his breathing off and he whirls around body taut and ready for the impact but he is still knocked back when Kuro's kick connects hard with his shoulder.

Kakashi gets an elbow under his heavy body and he tries to push himself up but another kick connects with his jaw and he is sent sprawling on his back, a metallic taste in his mouth and a blinding pain blooming from his face.

There's a heavy-weight pressing against his ribs and when he blearily manages to crack his eyes open, he sees that Kuro is crushing his chest under his knee, the other trapping Kakashi's left arm to the ground, pinning him and leaving him entirely defenceless.

He isn’t very well versed in doing seals one-handed, he simply can’t move and using a Genjutsu against Kuro would be entirely useless, funny even. Kakashi grits his teeth, a bitter taste in his mouth. He is hurting everywhere and his jaw hurts like hell but he has been having fun. He doesn't want this to end just yet.

Kuro puts more weight onto his knee, digging the bone deep into Kakashi's stomach and making him see stars from the pain.

"Do you admit your defeat?" He asks, and Kakashi hates how utterly calm and collected he sounds when every single fibre of Kakashi's being is on literal fire.

"No," Kakashi bites out, his next breath knocked right out of his lungs when Kuro applies more pressure to his stomach.

He can feel bile rising in the back of his throat and yeah, maybe throwing up on his opponent is all he needs to finish the shattering of his pride. Kuro leans in, a few strands of hair slipping out of the messy bun he had tied them up in before starting Deidara’s training. They tickle Kakashi's neck and the proximity makes him squirm. All of a sudden, all the places in which their bodies are touching register and Kakashi feels his body heat up.

"Give up, Hatake," Kuro taunts in a falsely cold voice that doesn't mask in the slightest the small curve of his lips and the twinkling mirth in his eyes.

The words send a shiver down Kakashi's spine and he struggles against Kuro's hold, feeling like a caged bird under the paw of a tiger. It's thrilling and terrifying at the same time. Kuro chuckles at his vain efforts and Kakashi really wants to punch that smug look off his face. He wiggles around, and Kuro's knee shifts slightly until his shin lowers to brush against Kakashi's crotch.

The feeling registers like electricity setting ablaze all of his body. Kakashi bites down on his lip to keep a moan inside and for half a second he debates which is more embarrassing between admitting his defeat and Kuro realising he got hard from getting his ass handed over to him.

Memories from their kiss flashes at the back of his mind and his eyes settle on Kuro’s lips. Fuck, he wants.

"I give up," Kakashi says in a rush, the words coming out strained but Kuro immediately releases him and stands up.

“That was a good fight,” Kuro says as he unties his hair, letting them fall in uneven strands at his shoulders.

He looks too fucking good for someone who just sparred, not even a single bead of sweat whereas Kakashi is feeling like he might implode.

“You’re really weak,” Deidara singsongs and yeah, Kakashi couldn’t agree more but hearing straight from the kid’s mouth makes his blood boil.

He had somehow expected to hold his own, impress Kuro even, but he hadn’t been able to even hit the man. Ah, the sweet feeling of getting his pride shattered.

“You shut up,” Kakashi says, a weak comeback but with his thoughts centred on how ashamed he is, he isn’t able to come up with more witty responses.

“Well, that’s it for today,” Kuro interjects just as Deidara was about to spout more nonsense. “Deidara, go wash up, I’ll be there for lunch.”

The kid pouts but nods. He gives Kakashi a once-over, sticks his tongue out and starts running back to Konoha’s centre where their apartment is. Kakashi rolls his eyes. He’ll probably never grow fond of Deidara.

“Are you ok?” Kakashi’s head jerks up. He looks at Kuro and reads the concern written in his eyes. Surely, Kuro doesn’t think he is weak enough to feel unwell because of a friendly spar- “About Obito.”

Ah. Yes. That. Well, at least Kakashi doesn’t feel so hot any more.

“Yeah,” he says, ‘no at all’ he thinks.

He has spent the entire night awake, thinking about Obito. He can’t get the image of this foreign man lying on the ground, blood leaking on the green grass of Konoha’s lush forests. He sees in the scars marring his face the fall of huge rocks upon the body of his best friend, he remembers the screams of Rin, drown out by the loud sound of the cave crashing down and the fear in his own heart as the silhouette of Obito disappears.

“You don’t seem ok,” Kuro says.

Kakashi lets out a hollow laugh. He is a grown ass man now, he should be fine after so many years. The truth is that he isn’t.

“I…” Kakashi starts, but he knows that no matter what lie he was going to come up with to cover up the sadness welling in his heart, Kuro wouldn’t have believed it one second.

Kakashi isn’t someone who likes to share how he feels. He has been raised as a shinobi since his birth and had to grow up, take care of himself and fend for himself when his father had died. He has been an adult for a long long time, maybe since the start.

Kakashi never had anyone by his side whom he could spill all of his darkest nightmares to, there has never been someone to hold him at nights when he cried his heart out and screamed until his throat was raw. After so many years pushing past all of his traumas, Kakashi simply doesn’t know how to confide in someone. He has never learned to.

It should be easy to push Kuro away, to shy away from his searching gaze and deal with this on his own. It is maybe because he is tired of being alone, or maybe because he wants to trust Kuro, or even perhaps because there is something about Kuro that pulls him in, forces him to let himself be vulnerable that Kakashi thinks that, for once, he should just open up.

“I simply don’t know how to feel any more,” he finally says. His throat feels tight, like he might cry any second. He feels like a child spilling a secret he had to keep unwillingly. “I built my entire self upon Obito’s death, what I believe in, what I fight for, all of it is because of him. Because I let him die, because I had to live for him too.”

“You’re wrong,” Kuro says instantly, he doesn’t even hesitate to cut in before Kakashi can wallow in his worries any longer.

Kakashi forces himself to look at him. He didn’t want to see pity on Kuro’s face, or even worse, disappointment because Kakashi was, in fact, weak. What he found in the man’s eyes was softness and on his lips, a sad smile.

“You didn’t let him die, he chose you to live.”

Kakashi’s breathing stops for a second, and his heart stills. All the screams in his head quieten and suddenly the world stops to a standstill. He had never thought of it like that. He had been the one to let Obito die, it was the same as killing him himself.

Through his whole life onwards, he had lived with that knowledge, that thought always somewhere on his mind. He had killed his best friend and surviving was his punishment.

“Living is your gift,” Kuro tells him, he sounds knowing, as if he spoke from experience. Kakashi feels like he can believe him.

Suddenly, the world starts moving again. The sun shines bright, warming up his face and the gentle wind plays with his hair. He can hear the soft music of the forest, the song of the birds, the shimmering of the leaves, the whispers of the breeze.

Kuro is looking at him, his eyes look bright under the morning sun, filled with gentleness and understanding. Kakashi breathes in and smells the fragrance of the flowers.

Somehow, Kakashi doesn’t feel so at odds with himself any more and while the ache in his heart isn’t gone, Kakashi feels brave enough to face it head on. He is his own person, he can live for himself too. Now he just needs to understand Obito’s side of the story.

He has to see Obito.

“Thank you,” Kakashi tells Kuro and just before he uses a Shunshin to leave, he catches the surprise on the man’s face. He answers with his most sincere smile and teleports away.

Kakashi has somewhere he needs to be.

°°°

Obito hates it when his mind spirals into one single train of thought. He can’t seem to think of anything else and gets stuck on things that he’d rather not think about. Usually, he’d train until he couldn’t think any more but with his chakra sealed and his body chained to a bed of Konoha’s hospital, he hasn’t got much of a choice.

He woke up a few hours ago and ever since, the only thing on his mind has been the event of the previous night. Too many things had happened in such a short amount of time. Obito can’t process it all.

One second he had been playing the fool with Nagato, whispering lies in his ear and edging him onto the road of vengeance, and the next he was running for his life, his own organisation after him.

He shouldn’t have trusted Zetsu.

Now, he is alone, back in Konoha and with no idea of what he is supposed to do. Ever since Rin’s death, Obito has had only one thing on his mind: the Jutsu that would save this corrupted world. How is he supposed to keep going now that he knows it had all been for nothing? If there is no way to save this world, what he is to do? What is he to believe in? He can’t find any answer.

A sudden knock at his door forces Obito back to reality and he opens his eyes to see the Hokage himself enter the room. He can only stare, mouth open and mind entirely blank. He hadn’t been expecting anyone, and surely not the Hokage the Third in the flesh.

Obito has never been so close to the old man before. He can count the wrinkles on his face and how tired he looks but despite his age, there is something powerful about him. It is obvious in the way he stands, the way he moves and the glint in his eyes. His body may have gotten older, but his mind has only gotten sharper and Obito feels incredibly small.

The Hokage moves about the room soundlessly, taking in his surroundings until his eyes finally fall on Obito. There is no expression in his face, nothing to be read or understood. Obito can only look at him, take in his pressuring presence and poise. He inspires respect, even from someone like him.

“So,” the Hokage starts, “what is it like to be in Konoha again?”

Obito can only blink.

Of all the things he had been expecting the Hokage to say, this certainly wasn’t one of them. What is it like? It’s been years, a decade almost since Obito had last been in his hometown. He had loved Konoha, still loves it to an extent. Its people and its landscapes had raised Obito, he had grown up surrounded by forests and gentle smiles, much like the one the Hokage is giving him.

“Isn’t it a lovely place?”

Suddenly, Obito feels choked up. Of course it is a lovely place. It has everything anyone could look for. They have the food, they have the sights, they have the weather, Konoha is by far the best village Obito has ever seen in his entire life. Ever since he became a rogue shinobi, he has seen a lot of places but none has ever come close to Konoha.

Of course he might be a bit biased, but still, Konoha will always be number one in his heart. He had never thought he’d be able to be back here. He had given up on that dream the day he had let Kyuubi rampage in his beloved home town, when he had fought against his teacher and when he had betrayed all the people he loved.

He had given up on so many dreams, on so many people in order to create a perfect world.

A world that could never be.

What did he have left?

Konoha.

“It is lovely,” he answers softly, the honesty of his voice surprising even himself.

The Hokage smiles at him.

“I see you’re also a Konoha shinobi at heart,” Hiruzen says and while Obito doesn’t really get why he seems so nostalgic, the words still reach deep inside him, tearing out what he has left of love in his heart for the whole world to see. He feels like he might cry, for some reason. “But I also hear you were the leader of an enemy organisation whose goal is to destroy the world.”

Ah. Suddenly, Obito doesn’t feel so warm any more. He should have expected it really, because he can’t deny that. He had thought he was working for the sake of the world, trying to make it better but he had been nothing more than a pawn in the grand scheme of things.

Trying to gather the Bijuus made no sense now. His goal is obsolete, unable to be completed and his organisation – or had it been Zetsu’s all along? - is now disbanded. Of all his members, only Nagato and Konan had been left anyway, with Orchimaru a deserter and the others killed or missing.

The pair had fled the hideout the second Zetsu had spilt his secrets and Obito had no idea of where they could have gone.

“Look, Obito,” Obito flinches when he hears his name falling from the Hokage’s lips, “I have been giving a lot of second chances as of late, I’m not against giving yet another one.”

In that single sentence, Obito hears so many things. He hears new hopes and dreams, the possibility of waking up in something else than sweat from nightmares, the chance to feel the sun on his face again and not living in hiding from the ones he loves.

“But I can’t trust you so easily.”

Obito’s chest aches. He suddenly has something else he desires. A home, someplace where he’d feel safe and needed. A place he could help become better, without a jutsu but with his own two hands. It feels like a good dream, Obito thinks.

“What are your conditions?” Obito finally asks, and the Hokage gives him a smile that could be warm, but with how practised his speech sounds, Obito feels anxious.

What the Hokage expects of him is rather reasonable. Obito will be put under surveillance, the seals on his chakra will not be removed and he will have to undergo a thorough examination by the best of their examination and interrogation team. Obito is not thrilled to be in the care of Ibiki and Yamanaka. They can both be scary at times, he still remembers that from back then.

“I hope that one day you will be trusted by Konoha again. But for that to happen, everyone will need to put in the effort needed,” the Hokage adds and while it sounds rational, it also sounds very much like a faraway dream that will not see the light for many years.

It’s a good thing Obito has learned patience.

“Now that we’re both on the same page, I’ll leave you both to it,” Hizuren finishes, and Obito looks at him quizzically.

There’s a rush of wind and suddenly, someone materializes out of thin air right next to the Hokage.

Obito’s heart throbs.

He recognizes within a second the grey wild hair of the last person alive he still deeply cares for.

It had been a shock to suddenly see Kakashi after so many years. He can’t imagine what it must have been like for Kakashi. Still, the man looks unperturbed, his eyes bored as they stare at the Hokage.

“You must have a lot of things to talk about, take your time,” and as he says that, Hiruzen leaves the room.

Suddenly, the quiet seems overpowering. Obito can’t think of anything to say. He hadn’t expected Kakashi to come see him so soon, he isn’t ready, he hasn’t made up his mind completely yet and he doesn’t know how to act with Kakashi.

It’s hard to make a link between the boy Obito knew and loved and this young man. He recognizes his face but all the rest his foreign. He didn’t use to slouch so much, there wasn’t this many scars on his arms before, nor a faraway glint in his eyes.

“I’m sorry I couldn’t protect Rin.”

It’s all Kakashi says. Obito knows he means so much more. Sorry for disappointing you, sorry for breaking our promise, sorry for being weak… And so many more ‘sorry’s that Obito isn’t sure he is ready to accept just yet.

Rin dying had been Obito’s turning point in his life. He had discarded everything he loved in order to see her again, to create a new world in which she’d be safe and happy. He knows the conditions in which she had died, he had seen with his own eye Kakashi’s hand exploding through her chest and the blood spurting out as life left her body. He doesn’t blame Kakashi. He knows it had been the only way to protect Konoha and the ThreeTails.

What Obito blames is the shinobi world that had forced such a young boy to kill a girl who was dear to him for the sake of the greater good.

If Obito may have since long forgiven Kakashi, it doesn’t mean he has come to terms with Rin’s death. He still sees it every night, the red of her blood, the darkness in her empty eyes and the sound of Kakashi’s Chidori ripping through the air.

He looks at the young man before him, notices the slight tremor running through his body, how regretful he looks, the way his fights are tightly shut and his one single visible eye filled with sorrow.

“I forgive you,” he breathes and Kakashi’s composure seems to fall apart. He lets out a heavy breath and tears gather at the corners of his eye. At that moment, a dam seems to break, and Obito is twelve years old all over again.

Obito wonders how he ever forgot that warmth.

°°°

For someone who hates resting as much as Itachi does, the days pass by him unexpectedly fast. He is bored the first week, then starts to enjoy his daily training with Deidara, sometimes they are joined by Kakashi and he spars with him, some days Shisui visits and he gets along surprisingly well with the blond kid.

Before Itachi realizes, an entire month without missions has gone by and he didn’t even have the time to worry about his next step. He likes being able to spend his mornings seeping his tea at his window, enjoying the morning sun. He discovers a passion for wandering the busy streets of Konoha and simply relish in the laughs of children and the mundane conversations of passers-by.

Itachi doesn’t hear much from Obito, even if he knows that both Shisui and Kakashi visit him regularly and merely waits for the Hokage to call upon him. It’s finally at the end of another month spent in leisure that Sarutobi Hiruzen asks for him.

“Kuro,” The Hokage greets when Itachi enters the office through the open window, “I have some news.”

Without further ado, Itachi is finally updated on what the Hokage has been doing for the past month. With Obito’s willingness to let Yamanaka dig through his brain, he has been allowed out of the hospital but under tight surveillance and with seals on his Chakra.

They have learned that the last Akatsuki members are Konan and Nagato who both disappeared and that the main base is situated in Kumo. If they want to find clues, it’ll be there.

But something else worries the Hokage. They don’t have all the Bijuus accounted for. If some are now safe like the Nine-Tails, the Seven-Tails or the Three-Tails, some could still be in danger.

And so, Itachi has now new goals. They need to find the hideout and destroy the Gedou Mazou so that the Tails cannot be sealed, they have to check up on the remaining Bijuus to protect them from Konan and Nagato and finally, Itachi has to somehow find Madara’s corpse and get rid of it. This way, he won’t ever be revived.

There’s not much left for him to do in this world and he isn’t sure whether that scares him or if he feels relieved.

The Hokage orders him to go to Suna, check on Ichibi because it’s the closest and then move on to Kumo where he will have to find the base as well as the Nibi. He will be accompanied by Kakashi and other Anbu members and they have to leave the next morning.

Once all the formalities of the mission have been discussed, Itachi leaves and goes back to his apartment to get ready. He has no doubt that Deidara will feel disheartened.

As expected, the boy pouts and hangs his head but surprisingly, he doesn’t scream or complain at all. It seems like he has grown up a bit, become more mature over the past few months. While that thought makes him proud, his stomach churns heavily at the guilt of leaving the kid behind.

Itachi readies his bags and once the night comes and goes, he is on his way to Suna alongside Kakashi and five Anbu members.

The trip to Suna is uneventful and quite fast. The Anbu with them are clearly well-trained and they keep up easily with Itachi’s quick pace.

As they are about to reach the gates where the guards are already looking at them with clear distaste, a loud siren rings, deafening and clearly announcing something very dangerous. The guards immediately leave their post and rush into the village, Itachi and the others on their tail.

“What’s happening?” One of the Anbu asks, his voice barely audible with the alarm drowning out every noise.

Itachi doesn’t stop to answer. He has no idea, but if even the guards left, it means that it’s something that requires all of Suna’s manpower.

They enter the village to find it in complete chaos. Villagers are running about, children crying as their parents drag them by the hand, a few buildings have been reduced to rubble on the sandy ground and shouts are coming from all sides. It’s a complete mess and Itachi can’t make sense of the situation until his eyes land on a flying figure above the buildings.

He activates his Sharingan and studies the winged silhouette, eyes widening when he recognizes the robes of Akatsuki. It’s Konan, and she is holding a young child, a toddler almost with red blood hair.

Gaara.

Itachi can’t believe his luck. If they had been even a few hours late, the Ichibi would have been lost.

“Akatsuki is attacking,” he tells the others shinobi gathered around him, “They are trying to get their hands on the Ichibi.”

He can feel the eyes of the Anbu and Kakashi on his face but they all remain calm, waiting for his orders. There’s a feeling bubbling in Itachi’s chest, it feels like pride. It had been so long since he had been appointed as the leader for a mission.

“Kakashi, you will come with me to stop the Akatsuki,” he says and Kakashi nods, “You three help the villagers find shelter and tend to the injured,” he orders to the Anbu to his left before turning to the remaining two, “you go to the Kazekage’s office and get in touch with the higher-ups to update them on the situation.”

In a blink, the Anbu are gone and Itachi turns to Kakashi.

“This Akatsuki member uses paper in her attacks. Don’t underestimate her, she’s a very strong Kunoichi,” he warns just as he calls forth his Susanoo and reach for Kakashi.

In a second, the flame warrior rises from the ground and they take place on his helm to stand up above ground. If Kakashi is unsettled by the lurching feeling, he doesn’t show any sign of it. He looks utterly focused, and Itachi focused back to their opponent.

Itachi commands his Susanoo to follow Konan out of Suna and into the desert. The Susanoo runs much faster than she flies and after a few seconds, they reach her. Konan stops in her tracks and turns around, a single hand coming up to form seals and thousands of paper shurikens come flying at them.

Itachi raises his arm and his Susanoo mimics his movement, his blade coming up to block the attack. Konan heads for the ground, her paper wings dematerializing and Itachi calls off his Susanoo to meet her on there. As soon as his feet hit the ground, he rushes in, hands grabbing his tanto and slashes at her, mindful of not hitting the baby cradled in her arms.

A wall of solid paper blocks his attack and Konan jumps back, both hands connecting to call for more papers that envelop Gaara’s tiny frame, rising up to the air where none of their attacks might reach. Itachi had always liked this about Konan, she was considerate but also very smart and quick-witted.

With Gaara out of the way and safe from any danger for the time being, Itachi can go all out. He rushes in once more, Kakashi right behind him.

They flow flawlessly together as if they had fought side by side their whole lives. When Konan aims for Kakashi, Itachi is right there to block the blow while Kakashi strikes back. If she tries to attack Itachi, he easily avoids it and Kakashi lunges in close to land a punch or a kick. Itachi gathers his chakra and launches a hundred fire bullets.

She manages to avoid most of them but some hit and her robes catch fire. She discards the piece of clothing immediately and calls for her papers once more, aiming them at Itachi. One manages to cut his face, another his arm but they are superficial injuries.

Kakashi takes advantage of the fact that Konan is focusing on Itachi and rushes in close, a kunai in hand. He slashes at her belly but Konan is fast and agile. She dodges the attack easily and lunges at Kakashi, hands rushing through seals. Just as she launches her paper at Kakashi, Itachi uses a Great Fireball that blows away her attack.

Kakashi rushes in and lands her kick to her stomach, quickly following by a punch and a fire Jutsu of his own. It lands and explodes, projecting Konan a few meters back. She’s clearly overwhelmed by the two of them and won’t hold her ground for much longer.

She seems to realise this too and she calls forth her wings once more and soars up to the sky where she catches Gaara and tries to make a run for it. Kakashi and Itachi are immediately on her tail, the latter calling forth his Susanoo once more.

In the blink of an eye, they are on her and Itachi swings his Susanoo gigantic sword. The blade is covered in flames and when it strikes her paper wings, they catch fire and Konan plummets to the ground. She hits the sand with a worryingly loud noise, rolling for a few meters before coming to a stop. Immediately, Itachi calls off his Susanoo and rushes to the sand, worried about Gaara.

He comes to a halt in from of Konan’s curled up body, her entire frame covering Gaara’s and protecting him, her remaining papers stretching over the baby. She must have broken bones in her fall and she doesn’t seem to be in any shape to stand up.

This fight was over a lot faster than Itachi had expected, but he knows it’s because Konan had fought while worrying about Gaara and trying to protect him from harm. She truly is an outstanding woman.

He kneels down and pushes her gently to the side. Her eyes are closed and there’s a cut on her forehead, it’s pouring out blood. She is unconscious and the baby is out cold as well, probably under a Genjutsu.

Itachi glances at Konan once more. He isn’t sure what he is supposed to do with her. If the Kazekage gets his hands on her, she will probably be tortured and most likely killed.

Itachi doesn’t want Konan to die. If he had been merciless with Kakuzu, he had second thoughts about Konan’s death, especially after his recent face off with Obito. Out of them all, Konan has the purest heart.

“What do we do with her?” Kakashi asks and Itachi sighs.

Instead of answering, he crouches down and reaches for Gaara, their top priority for now. He gently untangles Konan’s arms from the toddler and picks him up carefully. He hasn’t held such a small child in a while, but holding him close to his chest feels natural after so many years of caring for Sasuke.

After they bring Gaara back to Suna, they could take Konan to Konoha where she’d be imprisoned but at least safe from harm.

Itachi is about to voice his thoughts when an ominous Chakra sparks. He whirls around, barely fast enough to block the incoming kick to his face but he sent sprawling on his back all the same. He curls into a ball and call his Susanoo, the ribs spurting out to protect him and Gaara from the impact.

Sand rises and blocks his vision so he activates his Sharingan once more, blood going cold when he recognizes the ginger hair of one of Pain’s Six Paths. It’s the Asura Path and once it really registers, Itachi’s body grows taut.

Of all the Paths, it is by far the physically strongest and the toughest to take down. Its mechanical body is much stronger than Itachi’s and even with Kakashi’s help, he isn’t sure they can fight him and get out of it unscathed. They need to fall back.

The Asura Path glances at Konan and crouches down to pick her up in his arms. He then looks at Itachi and smirks. It’s a chilling smile that makes all of Itachi’s body grow even colder. Without a single word, the Path gathers chakra and stars running at very fast pace.

Kakashi is about to go after him but Itachi teleports next to him and stops him with a hand on his shoulder.

“No don’t, we have to protect Gaara for now,” he tells him and Kakashi looks at him with fire in his eyes.

“You don’t get it, they are headed for Konoha, I have a bad feeling about this.”

Itachi looks at the direction the Path had just left and yeah, that is the way for Konoha but surely it’s just a coincidence.

Isn’t it?

His heart starts beating faster and he holds Gaara tighter.

“We’ll meet up with the Anbu, bring the Ichibi back and head for Konoha immediately,” he tells Kakashi and the man nods.

It’s a slim possibility, but if Konoha is in danger of any threat, then Itachi will be there to protect the village and its people.

He won’t let anyone take from him what he has finally gotten back.

Chapter Text

Shisui is worried. Ever since he has discovered who Kuro really is, he has spent countless hours researching seals and anything related to time-space Jutsu. He has come up empty, of course.

Still, the lettering of Kuro’s seal is burnt into his mind and he has since then rendered it onto paper more times than he can count. It’s not complicated to understand once the Sharingan is activated but without it, it’s a complete mess of gibberish.

The Uchiha have never been seal masters, their strength lies in their Dojutsu. So who would coin a seal readable only with the Sharingan? It isn’t the only thing on Shisui’s mind.

The actual meaning of the Seal is much scarier. It mentions a wish and a vow to which the user has to be committed. Or they ‘disappear’. This seal isn’t as harmless as Kuro seems to think.

Plus, someone is bound to see the resemblance between Kuro and the younger Itachi at some point, especially a few years from now on once they are both adults. How are they going to handle that?

There’s also another issue he has yet to talk to Kuro about. What about his sickness?

Shisui sighs. He has gotten himself neck-deep in trouble for his best friend. But, hey that’s what friends do, he isn’t about to let Kuro alone in this. And even better, he isn’t alone. There’s the annoying kid.

“Say, when’s Kuro coming back?” Deidara asks for the third time this week.

“I don’t know,” Shisui answers once more. Deidara pouts.

For some reason, this boy seems to have taken a liking to Shisui and the moment Kuro had left for his mission, he had been glued to Shisui’s sides, always begging him to train together. Shisui gets it, though. He must feel lonely.

And so, even if he has never been the best with kids besides the younger Itachi, Shisui never turns him down and he spends some of his time with Deidara. Some days they eat lunch together, some others Deidara sleeps over at his house, and some, like today, they go to visit the newest addition to Shisui’s worries, Obito.

The man has been under secured lock down in the hospital due to his wounds. There are constantly Anbus glued to his windows and it makes the visits all the more awkward.

Just as he is about to knock on the door, Deidara blasts it open, screaming out a greeting. Shisui chuckles and enters the hospital room, pushing the door closed behind him. Obito greets them with a small smile that pulls oddly at his scars. Shisui had met him drunk and he had found him cute. Now that he is sober, Obito looks gorgeous despite the scars. Or maybe it’s the scars that make him this charming. Or Shisui’s hormonal body. He doesn’t know which but he curses it all the same.

Whenever they visit Obito, Shisui gets all tingly and slightly out of breath. He feels an indescribable pull towards this man, even if he knows how dangerous he is. Being an Anbu, a Jônin, and the one who had found Obito, it had seem quite logical for him to be appointed as one of his watchers.

Of course, the Hokage had told him all about how Obito was for now to be considered a potential threat and treated as such. And so, when Deidara isn’t stuck to Shisui’s sides, Shisui is stuck to Obito’s, sometimes by visiting him, others in the shadows of the tree near his window like the other creeps he resents for treating Obito like a criminal.

He has seen the man’s restless sleep, his muttering and the crazed look his eyes sometimes have. He is certainly not entirely sane, but what kind of shinobi is? Shisui himself has seen countless tragedies and the horrors of the war from a young age. He still has nightmares and times where he doesn’t feel quite balanced. Obito is surely the same.

“How are you?” Shisui asks, more out of politeness than anything. He can guess how Obito must feel, trapped in the same room without anything to do.

“Fine, thank you,” Obito answers all the same.

“We brought you something!” Deidara chides in as he reaches into his bag and brings out the dango they had bought on the way. Obito’s face lights up like a child’s.

“That’s for me?” He asks as if he couldn’t really believe it.

Deidara nods with a grin and drops the colourful box in Obito’s laps. The man stares and stares until he finally smiles. He carefully picks it up and unwraps the packaging, revealing three large dumplings of different colours.

Shisui has no idea if the man even likes dango but he had thought it’d be a good idea to give him a little something that would change from hospital food. It seems like it’s a nice decision if the pleased look on Obito’s face as he devours the dango is of any indication.

“Would you like some?” Obito offers once he is done eating the first dumpling, a bit of sugar at the corner of his lips. Shisui smiles at him and points at his mouth. Obito reddens and wipes the sugar off, a shy smile on his lips that makes Shisui’s heart weak.

“Nah, thank you,” Deidara answers, completely oblivious to the interaction of the two older men. “Hey you know what, yesterday I managed to hit the target behind rocks for the first time!”

Obito congratulates the kid warmly and it’s at times like these when he is calm and relaxed that Shisui finds him most lovely. His smile is easy and posture serene, it makes Shisui feel at ease as well.

He hopes that the Hokage will soon see that Obito isn’t as threatening as he seems to think. If most of the seals had been removed, leaving only one that diminished his chakra reserves, Obito was still forbidden to leave the room and so far, the man hadn’t made a single faux pas.

Hopefully, everyone would soon come to realise that Obito is no danger for Konoha.

Shisui would come to curse that mindless thought sooner rather than later.

All of a sudden, the air grows heavy and Obito rushes out of his bed, the dango box clattering to the floor as he runs to the window. His chakra is pouring out, seeping through the seal, a dangerous look marring his face.

“Shisui,” he calls, his voice deep and laced with wrath, “get the Hokage right now. Konoha is under attack.”

The words are barely out of the man’s mouth that a loud blast resonates all the way to Shisui’s fingertips. He quickly enters the shinobi mindset that had gotten him praised so many times before and he is out of the room in the blink of an eye, using a Shunshin to teleport himself all the way to the Hokage’s office.

He leaves behind Deidara and Obito without even wasting the time to let his eyes linger on any of them.

The Third Hokage’s office is already filled with Anbu and Jonin alike when Shisui barges in through the window.

“Shisui,” the Hokage greets, voice calm but urgent. “You, along with Genma and Raido will head for the North Gate where the explosion was located.”

The second he hears the order, he is out of the office, running with all he has to his destination, the two other men right behind him.

Shisui is young, but he isn’t inexperienced. He has trained for days like these where all emotions must be put aside in order for the village’s safety to be ensured. Still, as he runs, he has a thought for Obito, and the scary look that his face had worn.

°°°

“Kid,” Obito starts and the child bristles.

“I’m a shinobi, not a kid!” He shouts back and Obito completely ignores him.

He does like Deidara, but they have no time for his childish antics. “If you’re a shinobi, you’ll listen to me,” he says and Deidara falls silent. “A very strong opponent is trying to destroy this village. Go help the villagers.”

“But what about you?” The kid asks and it’s such a foreign feeling to be cared for that it takes a second for Obito to answer.

“I’ll go meet this enemy and deal with him.”

Deidara stares at him, a scowl on his young face.

“Your chakra is sealed, mister, you won’t be able to take this guy on if he is as strong as you say,” the kid deadpans.

Deidara has a point, even if Obito would rather not admit it. The second he had felt Pain’s chakra, all the hairs on his body had stood and his mind had gone blank. Pain is strong, probably as strong as Obito when his chakra isn’t sealed so how exactly is he going to handle this fight?

“Lemme come with you, I can be a distraction or even a shield, I don’t care. I won’t let anyone destroy this village.”

There’s an unwavering strength in Deidara’s words. He had sometimes seemed awfully mature for a child his age but Obito guesses that’s what being a shinobi does to youth. It forces children to be adults at a much younger age than civilians.

Still, if Deidara comes with him to fight Pain, chances are that he won’t survive.

Obito glances at the kid and sees the tough determination in his blue eyes. He can only sigh. There’s no changing this stubborn child’s mind. He takes a deep breath and nods, seeing the resolve on Deidara’s face grow even stronger at his approval.

Obito won’t let him die.

Moments later, they’ve left the hospital and are headed for the North Gate where Obito had felt Pain’s chakra spark.

When they arrive, Obito’s blood chills. The entire gate has been destroyed, leaving behind only fuming rocks and planks of wood. In the middle of the carnage stand five silhouettes with bright orange hair and the telltale Aktsuki robes.

“Tobi,” the main path known as Pain says, his chilling Rinnegan falling on him and Deidara. “You have some explaining to do.”

Obito locks his jaw. Pain isn’t here for Konoha, he is here for him.

“I have nothing to tell you, Pain,” Obito answers, keeping his voice levelled and calm although he feels anything but confident in his chances of winning.

Pain’s gaze hardens. He looks from Obito to Deidara without a word. Suddenly, without even an order being given, all other four paths dispatch, each heading for different directions.

“Then, Konoha shall be destroyed.”

As the words leave his lips, Pain rushes in close, a kick almost too fast to see coming up to Obito’s left shoulder. It’s out of habit that he tries to call for his Susanoo to protect himself but the seal on his chakra makes him too weak to do so.

The blow lands a second too fast and Obito is too slow to react. It hits right above his elbow where pain blossoms and Obito bites back a shout. He is propelled a few meters away and despite the agony he keeps his eye open and watches with horror as Deidara dashes forward, a kunai in hand, aiming a blow at Pain’s stomach. The tall man glances down, face a mask of indifference as both of his arms rise and an invisible bubble forms around his body.

Deidara hits the barrier full force and is launched backwards. He hits the ground hard, his small body rolling to the side. Pain walks towards the child slowly as Obito struggles up to his feet. His arm is hurt and the pain makes him see stars but he won’t let Deidara be harmed.

His Sharingan is activated, pushing against the seal’s limits, and he clearly sees Pain’s hand rummaging through the robes to take out a black rod.

“Roaches should remain on the ground,” he says, and his arm comes up to pierce the rod through Deidara’s back. But Obito is faster this time.

He rushes in once more, aiming a punch right at Pain’s expressionless face. He meets the invisible barrier that Deidara had hit and alike the kid, he is forcefully pushed away, his broken arm jostled by the strong flow of Chakra. He screams out in agony and hits the ground once more.

Obito pushes his heavy body away from the ground with his good arm, fury burning bright in his heart when he sees that Pain is about to puncture Deidara’s unmoving body with his rod.

Then, Pain is suddenly flying away, a loud crack echoing in the empty space.

Someone just kicked him right in the face, saving Deidara from a certain death. It had gone too fast for Obito’s Sharingan to catch the movement, and probably too fast for Pain’s barrier to activate.

Above Deidara stands Shisui, eyes blood red and expression a mask of wrath. A breath leaves Obito’s lips despite him. Shisui looks much older suddenly, and very different from the careless young man Obito has gotten to know over the past weeks. If his gentle smile has made his heart grow warm, these eyes filled with hatred and rage made his blood cold. Shisui looks downright dangerous.

“Do not harm them,” he says to Pain who is struggling up to his feet, blood trailing down his face.

The man’s expression has morphed from emotionless to bothered as he stares down Shisui, probably levelling his strength. Obito knew that Shisui was supposed to be this strong, his reputation preceded him. But he is barely a man, all lanky limbs and carefree laughs that still resonate in Obito’s ears.

The teenager had looked harmless, even probably a bit stupid but now Obito sees him for who he truly is, Shisui of the Body Flicker, faster than even the wind and deadlier than any of Konoha’s shinobi.

“Shisui, the Teleporter,” Pain greets. The fact that he had recognized Shisui in a heartbeat testifies of how well prepared this attack on Konoha was.

Even with the Akatsuki disbanded, he and Konan had managed to form a plan to retrieve Obito. He had always known that the two of them would be problematic.

“Shisui,” Obito says, voice full of warning. “This isn’t the main body, you won’t be able to take him or the other red-heads down.”

“Revealing my secrets to the enemy already? You have gotten meek, Tobi.” Before he or Shisui can react to Pain’s words, their opponent is on the move.

Pain rushes towards Obito, probably deeming him an easier target wounded as he is, and tightens his hold on the black rod, pushing it forward to pierce through Obito’s good arm. But Obito can see his movements clearly through his Sharingan and it’s easy to avoid the blow this time around, he then dashes backwards when he notices the man’s other arm coming up to use his repulsive Jutsu.

Obito barely avoids the Shinra Tensei that Pain launches and the second the forceful Chakra disappears, Obito gathers his own to activate his Mangekyo Sharingan. If he manages to trap Pain in his dimension, they’ll be rid of one of the strongest Path for good and finding Nagato would be much easier.

Still, the more Chakra he gathers, the weaker he gets and suddenly, his Sharingan deactivates.

‘Goddamn seal’ he swears. This looks like it won’t be an option, they have to fight.

Pain fishes out of his robes another rod and he dashes at Obito, both hands wielding the deadly weapons. There’s a rush of wind and Shisui appears in front of Obito, his Chakra surging out forcefully and taking the foreign yet familiar shape of a giant green warrior.

Obito can only stare at Shisui’s Susanoo. He had no idea that he was able to call it forth, he is most likely the youngest Uchiha ever to be able to use this jutsu.

His Susanoo wields a drill-like lance that Shisui doesn’t waste time using in unison with his fire release to create a vortex of flames. The attack seems deadly, but a bit too slow to counter Pain’s repulsive Jutsu and the deflagration hits the chakra bubble around their enemy’s body. Dust rises but through it Obito can see Pain standing tall, unharmed.

As deadly as a Susanoo is, speed is the key to beating the Tendo Path and it seems Shisui doesn’t need Obito’s help in figuring this out. The flaming warrior disappears and Shisui hits the ground lightly, fading out a second later to appear behind Pain, punch already thrown with force.

The man is too slow to react and he is hit once more to the face, blood pouring out from his nose as he falls to the ground.

Obito watches with amazement how easily Shisui holds his own against such a formidable opponent. The two of them trade blows at a fast speed, Shisui’s landing a lot more than Pain’s. Soon enough, their enemy seems to realise that he won’t be able to hold on much longer and he dashes back, running to another direction.

Obito takes this opportunity to rush to Deidara’s sides, mindful of his bad arm. The kid is passed out on the ground, but there’s no sign of bleeding anywhere. He must have hit his head when he was pushed away so forcefully. But he seems otherwise healthy. There’s a sudden presence at his sides.

“What are you doing out of your room?” A tall man with brown hair asks. Obito has seen him before but he can’t seem to remember his name.

“Genma,” Shisui calls, “we don’t have time for this. Obito fought Pain, that’s proof enough that he’s on our side.”

“We don’t know that,” another unknown man that had just arrived states.

The three of them turn to look at him, each wearing different expression. Genma looks distrustful, the stranger on his guards, and Shisui worried.

“How is your arm?” Shisui asks him and Obito chuckles dryly.

“Hurt, even broken I think” he answers with a small smile that Shisui reciprocates.

“You sure do like getting your arms wounded,” he says playfully while the two other men stares at them incredulously.

“Shisui,” the taller man warns, “we have more pressing matters, like the kid on the ground or our enemy.”

Shisui doesn’t allow a blush to creep on his cheeks but he seems rather flustered. He looks away from Obito and walks up to Deidara, checking the kid’s wounds.

“He is alright, probably a concussion. Raido,” Shisui tells the taller man with the commanding voice of a higher-up, “would you bring him to the hospital? We’ll take care of the enemy.”

Raido nods and hitches the child up on his shoulder carefully. He gives Obito a once-over, eyes doubtful, and heads towards Konoha’s hospital. The remaining stranger, Genma, stands close to Obito, staring him down as well, posture defensive.

“You shouldn’t be here,” he tells Obito who bristles immediately.

“I’m defending Konoha,” he answers placidly and Shisui quickly joins in to calm the rising tension.

“We’ll need all the shinobi available, Genma,” he says and the man shrugs, unconvinced but also unwilling to start a fight when something more pressing is at their door.

Shisui then turns to Obito. “You know our enemy. You said the red-heads weren’t his main body.”

Obito nods and goes on to explain everything he knows about Pain, or rather Nagato and the details of his techniques and the way the Paths work. He doesn’t have much insight, but it’s vital information that Konoha doesn’t know. As soon as he is finished, Genma leaves for the Hokage’s office where he’ll tell Hiruzen all that he has learned so that the information can be transferred to all the shinobi currently in Konoha.

Once left alone, Obito and Shisui share a look, then they nod to one another and head for the direction the Tendo Path had just left. Chances are that he went straight for the main body in order to defend it. Obito can’t feel Konan’s chakra, which means that she is either hiding with Nagato or elsewhere. They need to be on their guards.

°°°

Itachi has a terrible feeling about this situation. He and Kakashi are running with all they have towards Konoha, on the tail of Konan and the Path that had saved her.

Kakashi is an expert at following tracks and so, even if they can’t feel their enemies’ chakra, it’s easy to follow them through the dense woods of the Fire Country’s forests. They are getting closer to Konoha and as they run, Itachi feels his heart beating faster and faster. Kakashi had been right, they are headed for the Hidden Village.

“Wait,” Kakashi suddenly says as he comes to a stop. Itachi obeys, coming to a halt beside the younger man. Kakashi studies the broken branches and the footsteps left behind and he hums. “They changed direction, they’re no longer heading straight for Konoha. They took a turn here.”

That’s as much good news as bad news. They apparently aren’t going to launch an attack on Konoha, but rather want to trap them around the village. They must have backups in the vicinity. Kakashi seems to think so too.

“Do we keep on following them?” He asks as he glances worriedly at Itachi. Itachi nods.

Even if Konoha might be safe from Konan and the Path, the two of them are still a threat. Plus, the Anbus they had separated with at the border have orders to go straight to the Hokage and tell him about what happened. They will probably receive backups soon enough. And so, they take the turn as well and head straight for their enemies.

They are running carefully, senses on alert and Sharingan activated when there’s a sudden spark of familiar Chakra to Itachi’s left. He immediately comes to a stop, Kakashi halting right beside him and he surveys his surroundings. Seconds later, Shisui and Obito emerge from large bushes, expression of surprise on both their faces.

“What are you doing here?” Shisui asks.

“We’ve been chasing an enemy all the way since Suna,” Kakashi answers, his voice filled with mirrored surprise.

“What are you doing here?” Itachi counters, eyes stuck to Obito.

The man is cradling an arm to his chest, it looks hurt. His eyes are averted and he doesn’t look like he is feeling very much at ease in Itachi’s presence. Understandable considering that the last time they had seen each other, Itachi had tried to kill him.

“We’re also chasing an enemy that attacked Konoha,” Shisui answers as he walks up to stand in front of Obito. His posture is defensive and eyes a warning. It seems that things had happened while Itachi had been away on his mission.

He doesn’t doubt Shisui’s affection for him, but it is obvious that he now has someone else he likes enough to make him stand up for. Itachi isn’t sure how he feels about that someone being Obito though.

“Konoha was attacked?” Kakashi questions, obviously worried. Shisui nods.

“Pain,” is all he says and it’s enough for all of Itachi’s hair to stand on end.

Suddenly, all thoughts of Obito are gone and Itachi only feels an anxious urgency choking him. They have no time to waste.

“Pain is the most pressing matter, we should follow him and stop him,” Itachi interjects, and his team of fortune nods.

Without further ado, they start running, Kakashi in the lead. He is their best tracker, probably one of the best in Konoha all together. He’s their best shot at finding Pain, and probably Konan as well.

Itachi knows that the woman’s first and only goal will always be to protect Nagato. It’s almost tender. Itachi thinks he understands that feeling of desperation and unbreakable will to defend what’s dear to you.

He glances at Shisui, then Kakashi, and finally Obito. He might not hold them equally dear in his heart but in this instant, he swears that all of them will get back to Konoha in one piece.

After what seems like eternity, Itachi feels a flare of familiar chakra and in the same heartbeat, Kakashi stops in his tracks. In front of them is a large cavern to which the entrance is hidden behind large trees. The leaves are a bright green and some still strongly holding to the branches but most of them are scattered to the ground as if the trees had been knocked strongly a few times.

“The trail stops here. That Pain guy is in there,” Kakashi says and Obito sighs.

Kakashi turns to glance at him at the sound and they share a heavy stare. There’s a mix of emotions Itachi doesn’t quite understand passing through them. It’s the implication of a trauma still present in both of them that tugs at their hearts and Itachi can’t fathom that.

“We have to protect Konoha,” Shisui says just as he subtly puts a reassuring hand on Obito’s back, a gesture that Itachi catches and feels weird about once more.

Obito nods, takes a deep breath and takes a step towards the entrance of the cavern, enough courage left in him to enter a place of nightmares. Itachi doesn’t pause to spend more time thinking about that, he thinks he wouldn’t enjoy what his brain thinks anyway.

It’s very dark inside the cave, Itachi can’t distinguish much, even with his Sharingan. He can guess the shape of Obito and Kakashi walking side by side in front of him and he can tell that Shisui is right beside him but beyond that, everything else looks black.

Their whereabouts are a complete guess, it makes Itachi uneasy and he can’t help but second-guess himself. Maybe they should have gone back to Konoha. Even if the Tendo Path and Konan are most likely to stick to Nagato, it still left the other Paths unaccounted for. Was it really wise to decide to go after them instead of going back and defend Konoha?

“I can feel you overthinking from there,” Kakashi suddenly whispers right in his ear.

Itachi doesn’t jump, but he does flinch slightly. His heartbeat increases for a moment before it slows and his mind clears. Kakashi is right, there’s no use overthinking this when they are already at the doors of a battle that could take their lives. He needs to enter the shinobi mindset that he had spent his whole life refining.

“Thank you,” he whispers back and even in the darkness, Itachi is sure that Kakashi is smiling, even minutely.

Suddenly, all thoughts are pushed aside when light filters through a crack in the wall. It’s large enough for someone to slip through and immediately, the silence hanging above them feels heavy like lead.

Itachi approaches the crack carefully and risks a look inside. It seems to lead to a large room lit by torches. He looks around as much as he dares until his eyes finally land on something that makes his heart stop.

It’s the Gedo Mazo. At the far end of the alcove, standing tall and proud is the wooden statue that had fueled so many of Itachi’s nightmares.

It makes no sense for it to be here, he had thought that it was in their hideout in Ame, but its presence just made Nagato’s goal even clearer. They want the Kyuubi and they plan to extract the Bijuu right here, in Konoha’s forest. That’s very daring, but it also explained why the Tendo Path and Konan had rushed to this cave, they want to protect it. This statue is their only way to rejuvenate Juubi.

“You shouldn’t be here.”

That’s all the warning they get before the crack explodes sending gravel flying right in their faces. Itachi has no time to worry about the others and he jumps back, shielding his face. A few rocks manage to hit him and he is sent back, a bright pain in his shoulder.

Itachi gathers his thoughts, calms his mind and heart and glances around, eyes darting quickly from one barely lit place to another, looking for his comrades. Obito and Shisui are to his left, seemingly surprised but ready to fight, kunai in hands, but Kakashi is nowhere to be found.

Despite him, Itachi’s breath quickens and his stomach drops.

The cave has been shaken by the blow, the crack in the wall now a big opening to the even larger room in which the statue rests. The three of them rush inside, eyes taking a few seconds to adjust to the amber light shining bright.

“Leave now,” the same cold and detached voice says, and Itachi immediately glances away from the statue to stare right at the Tendo Path.

Itachi’s heart stops and it’s not the sight of Nagato himself looking as sickly as ever, chest sunken and ribs clearly showing, that takes his breath away. He had been expecting Nagato, even Konan standing at his sides. He hadn’t expected to see Kakashi arms tightly locked behind his back by a black rod, throat bared and a kunai resting against his jugular.

“Kuro,” a warning voice says to his side. It vaguely registers as Shisui’s, but even his best friend’s voice isn’t enough to bring him back from his panic.

Itachi has seen too many of his friends die, he had killed some of them with his own hands and there is no way that another one of the people he cares about is going to die without him trying all his has to save them.

He dashes forward, tanto already unsheathed, and the blade of his sword meets Pain’s kunai just as Shisui cries for him to fall back. Itachi’s glare meets Pain’s cold glaze and he wastes a second looking at Kakashi, finding his eyes and silently ordering him to run.

As Pain jolts against his blow, Itachi elbows Kakashi’s sides, forcefully getting him out of Pain’s hold and a second later, Shisui Shunshin’s puts him in Kakashi’s fall and he grabs him in mid-air. Just as they hit the ground safely, Konan dashes to them, papers already gathering around her. Itachi isn’t worried any more. Kakashi is out of harm’s way and the three of them can definitely take Konan on.

It only leaves Pain to Itachi, considering that Nagato isn’t able to fight on his own. They can do this.

Itachi reaches for his pouch and sends flaming shuriken hurling at Pain, composing the mudra one-handed at incredible speed. It doesn’t seem to phase Pain who easily slips through the attack. But it buys Itachi enough time to shape the hand signs for a Great Fireball that he sends in his opponent’s direction.

Pain narrowly escapes the attack, some flames catching on the Akatsuki robes that he discards immediately. The Fireball hits the cavern walls and the entire place rumbles and shakes under the impact. Itachi needs to be more careful of his surroundings.

If the cave crashes down, they are all in danger. He can’t call for his Susanoo either. It still leaves him with two deadly weapons, Tsukuyomi and Amaterasu. Already, a plan is formed in his head.

Itachi rushes in close to the Tendo Path, trading heavy blows that send shivers down his spine. They fight neck and neck, each landing and receiving blows. A sudden burst of chakra forms around Pain and the force of his Shinra Tensei sends Itachi on his back but he quickly jumps back to his feet, just in time to avoid the black rods that Pain had launched. Some catch in his coat and he loses his footing under the heavy black metal and he is sent to the ground once more.

Pain rushes in, another black rod firmly held in his hand, ready to tear through Itachi chest and it would have if not for Kakashi’s sudden kick to Pain arm, sending the rob tumbling to the ground. Itachi takes this split second of surprise from his opponent, recovering from his own more quickly, to call forth Amaterasu, a trickle of blood falling from his eye.

Black fire rises from thin air, eating at Pain’s clothes and quickly burning through the fabric to reach the skin. The Tendo Path doesn’t cry out in pain but it falls down to its knees, face morphed by agony.

Itachi doesn’t even waste a second and he teleports himself next to Nagato. The man stares at him calmly, an act of final defiance that wins him points for bravery, but looses some for pure idiocy.

Itachi’s pupils shift and spin and in one second, Nagato is trapped in Itachi’s deadly Genjutsu.

Itachi knows it will be hard to break Nagato’s mind, after all this man’s body may be weak but his resolve and determination make him a strong opponent for Tsukuyomi. Probably the strongest Itachi has had to use his Genjutsu on.

The truth is, Itachi hates his Mangekyo Sharingan, he hates that his most powerful weapon is an illusion that breaks people. He tortures them for days, for weeks sometimes, he lives through all of the enemy’s deepest fears, forces them to live their worst nightmares, personally inflicting mind wounds that are much harder to heal than physical ones.

Each use of Tsukuyomi leaves Itachi a bit more broken.

In the peaceful orange sunset of his mind space, Itachi stares at Nagato and readies his heart for what is to come next. He clears his head, forgets everything from Sasuke’s loving face to the hugs of his mother and only leaves emptiness inside his heart. Then, the torture starts.

Itachi blinks awake, staring at Nagato’s unmoving body, his closed eyes and half opened mouth. He is still breathing, but he might never recover from what Itachi has done to him. Itachi grabs his tento and puts it against Nagato’s throat. A sudden cry makes him stop.

“Please!”

Itachi turns around. Konan’s face is bloodied, and so are her clothes. She looks like she is about to collapse and she probably already would have if not for Shisui and Obito holding her upright, hands tightly held behind her back by Kakashi.

“Take me, take everything you want, but don’t kill him.”

In her eyes is total desperation. She is ready to abandon everything, even her own life if it means that the one she loves will be safe. Itachi knows that feeling, he knows that face. He has worn it himself before. He knows that feeling of sorrow rushing through you, the misery clasping your heart tightly.

He is the one who caused this, again. His hand shakes, and his tanto clatters to the ground. The sound makes him jump.

Itachi looks down at the blood on his blade and up to Nagato’s neck where a thin line of blood as appeared. His heart is torn. He doesn’t know if he should kill Nagato. Before he can make up his mind, Konan manages to break free from Kakashi’s hold and she rushes to Nagato.

She picks him easily, as frail as the man is, and calls forth thousands of paper sheets that form two large wings. She flies up to the cavern’s roof and gives all the chakra she has left to rush for the exit of the cave. Itachi watches her, his mind a complete mess and in the end, the two of the escape through the crack in the wall, all four of them too shocked to move.

“Kuro, do we go after them?!”

Itachi doesn’t know if he could have killed Nagato.

“Kuro, shall we go?”

He isn’t sure he could have killed Konan either.

“Kuro?”

Suddenly there’s a hand on his shoulder and when he looks up he meets Kakashi’s worried face. Some of his mask has been torn away, there are cuts on his cheeks and blood trickling down his forehead. But he is alright.

A breathless sigh leaves Itachi’s lips and without even thinking about it, his own hand rises up to touch Kakashi’s. For half a second, he puts a slight pressure, and he sees the worry in the man’s eyes shift to confusion, a subtle blush on his cheeks.

“We won’t go after them,” Itachi says as he moves away from Kakashi, his mind a lot calmer than it had been seconds ago. “We first need to destroy this statue, and then head back to Konoha.”

His three companions nod and turn to look at the giant wooden figure.

“What is it?” Shisui asks.

“The Gedo Mazo,” Obito answers and even if the name probably doesn’t ring a bell for Kakashi or Shisui, they fall silent.

“It is used to create Juubi,” Itachi adds and the two of them turn to look at him incredulously.

“Juubi, as in, like, a Tenth Bijuu?” Shisui asks in a breathless voice. Itachi nods and their faces grow even more somber.

“So how do we destroy it?” Kakashi asks and Shisui shrugs.

“It’s wood right? Shouldn’t fire do the trick?”

Well, regular fire probably wouldn’t be enough but with Itachi’s Amaterasu… Shisui’s spontaneous idea could actually be a good one for once.

Once more, Itachi’s Sharingan spins and he calls for his deadly black flames. It catches at the root of the statue and immediately the Gedo Mazo screeches as if it was alive but soon enough the flames roar louder, engulfing the giant statue in never ending black flames that consume it entirely.

As he watches on his goal burn away by his own hand, Itachi feels a weird mix of pride and despair. How long will his quest go on? And what awaits him at its end? He can’t know for sure and that thought hangs heavy in his mind.

After so many heartless murders, Itachi doesn’t understand why he hesitated there. He has never hesitated before, before using the Seal at least. Ever since Itachi has entered this version of the world, he has kept hesitating, and that’s the worst thing a shinobi could do.

“We should head back,” Kakashi says in a gentle voice, bringing Itachi back from his thoughts.

Itachi nods curtly, pushes down his worries and focuses on the task at hand once more. This fight isn’t over until Konoha is safe.

°°°

Hiruzen had felt the end coming for some time now. How old is he? Much too old to be a shinobi, far too ancient to be the Hokage. Each morning after the other he had seen his hair grow whiter, the wrinkles in his face deeper and the bags under his eyes darker. He is old and tired, his body is harder to move around, and sometimes he even feels as if his mind and judgement aren’t as quick or fair as before.

He isn’t fit to be the Hokage any more.

Hiruzen had known, even hoped, deep down, that a day like this would come. A day that would allow him to fight one last time with all he has for his village.

It’s a good day to die.

Hiruzen narrowly avoids the tallest redhead’s attack but right after, the long haired one rushes in and a kick connects with his jaw. Hiruzen is sent flying back but he doesn’t fall down, helping himself up right away with his rod that he sends swiping at his enemies’ feet.

They both easily avoid the attack and rush in together. They trade blows at a fast speed, leaving no time for the Hokage to form mudras or even call for Enma in his Monkey King form. He has managed to take down Two Paths on his own, but the fight had been tough.

Hiruzen is left with a broken arm and a deep slash on his face that has shut his right eye forever. Blood is soaking his clothes, the gash on his face still fresh and messing with his vision. It had been a miracle that he managed to take down two of the Paths and it mostly had been thanks to the information Genma had brought to him from Obito.

If he hadn’t known that their vision was shared, he wouldn’t have fought in the streets where the buildings would prove a hardship for their eyes. If he hadn’t known each of their individual abilities, he wouldn’t have known which Path to go for first.

If he makes it out alive, he’d make sure to thank Obito.

Just as the thought crosses his mind, a bright pain blossoms in his abdomen and Hiruzen takes a second to glance down at his chest. His stomach has been punctured with a black rod.

Hiruzen jumps back, a hand flying to his middle to try and slow down the bleeding as much as possible and in the same breath channels chakra and calls forth Enma. His rod grows bigger and warmer in his hand, until it becomes too heavy to hold and he throws it up with his good arm in the air.

In a puff of smoke, a monkey appears and Enma crashes to the ground with force, standing between Hiruzen and his opponents. Their hearts and minds are bound. Enma knows what to do without Hiruzen having to tell him.

Without caring about the pain in his middle, Hiruzen dashes in, focusing on the tallest enemy, knowing it to be the most dangerous Path left. It looks almost robotic, with built-in weapons and detachable arms. It is an unpredictable and unusual opponent to fight against.

Enma is right behind him on the attack and with a synergy that few shinobi have, they call forth a Great Fireball at the exact same time, hitting face on their enemy. Smoke rises and Hiruzen knows the long haired one probably can’t see much, so he uses that to his advantage. He turns around, another Fire Ball ready and launches it at the second opponent.

A wave of Thunder from Enma crashes down a second later, destroying a nearby building with the force of the blow. Smoke is everywhere and while Hiruzen knows that it’s a disadvantage for the Paths, he is still unable to tell if their combined attacks managed to take at least one of them down. All he can feel is Enma at his sides.

Slowly, the smoke clears and a few feet from him, Hiruzen can see the unmoving corpse of the long-haired redhead. That’s something he won’t have to worry about any more. He had made sure to take down the Path that could revive the others first.

It only leaves him with the robotic one and the Summoning one which Hiruzen knows for a fact won’t be much of an issue considering that all of Konoha’s forces are busy taking it down. The fight is coming to a close.

And then, sudden pain blossoms from his chest.

His vision wavers, his remaining eye closing from the utter agony he feels. With a lot of struggle, he forces his eye open and looks down to see a whole hand poking out from his chest. Ever so slowly, the hand recoils and Hiruzen can feel each and every inch of the limb passing through him, wrenching out muscles, tissue and even bones. It’s like no pain he has ever felt before.

He can vaguely hear Enma cry out to him, but his legs feel like jelly and his head cottony. Amidst all that agony he barely registers his body connecting with the ground. He hits his head but he can’t even feel it.

“Hiruzen!” Someone screams. The voice is familiar, even deformed by fury as it is. Who could it be?

Hiruzen hears the distant sound of fighting, building collapsing and booming noises resonating. Then, a wave of pure Chakra passes through him and he feels the pain receding.

“Hey hey now, come on, stay with me!” It sounds desperate, heartbroken.

Hiruzen forces his one good eye open and his tired gaze meets Tsunade’s wet face. Tears are streaming down her cheeks. Next to her is Enma, and even if the Monkey King isn’t crying, his face looks defeated.

Hiruzen smiles at him gently and calls of the summon. He doesn’t want his oldest and dearest friend to witness this.

Hiruzen hadn’t thought it would end this way. With tears and sad faces. He had hoped he would fall on the battlefield, alongside his soldiers, just another corpse among thousands of others.

But to see the face of his student in his final moments, a girl he had seen grow, that he had raised himself and taught how to be strong… That is more heartbreaking than what he had been prepared for.

“Tsunade, it’s useless,” he says and the pain in his chest comes back. He coughs a few times, blood falling from his lips. That punch had obliterated a few organs and broken his ribs. There was simply no way he could be saved. Even with Tsunade’s medical ninjutsu.

“Don’t talk,” she cries, a few tears rolling down her chin and falling on Hiruzen’s face.

“What… What are y-you doing here?… What about the Path?” He manages to ask, feeling his consciousness come and go, slowly fading out.

“Jiraiya forced me to come back, he is fighting the enemy, now shut up. I’ll save you.”

Hiruzen smiles. It’s a tired grin, but it still lights up his face tenderly with all the emotions he feels for this woman. She had grown so fast and so well. Had he taught her well? She is a determined and strong-willed shinobi, her medical skills are the best there are and even if she has a tendency to run from her problems, she had always given it her all when it mattered.

She has come back to Konoha, for the village, for the citizens, for him. She has always had a good heart.

“Tsunade, you...” Hiruzen tries to speak but a cough rattles his chest and he spits out blood.

“Stop talking or I’ll-”

“Be there for Konoha. Jiraiya too.”

Tears stop streaming down her face and her expression morphs into one of pure confusion. Then, her eyes water once more and she starts crying harder than before. Out of the corner of his eye, Hiruzen can see the forest green glow of her chakra grow brighter.

“You’re not dying! You can’t die, you’re the Hokage!” She screams, her voice breaking on the last word.

Hokage... Hiruzen has been one for many years. He has seen many things, lived a great life, enjoyed his morning teas and even the paperwork. Hiruzen is leaving his village in good hands. His students are going to make sure of it.

It’s a good legacy, he thinks.

Chapter Text

The second they set foot in Konoha, Itachi knows something is off. He has a deep sensation of unease gripping his heart and the further they walk into the village, the more overwhelming the sensation gets. Some buildings have been destroyed but the damage isn’t as present as it usually is where Pain goes.

There’s not much blood or devastation, and Itachi hopes it means the fights have been taken care of quite efficiently. He doesn’t doubt Konoha’s strength or the Hokage’s troops, but he still fears for something that isn’t quite clear yet.

Then he realises. It’s the silence. There are no one in the streets. No corpses, no villagers, no shinobi. The village is simply empty. He can’t tell if it’s a good sign or not. The lack of bodies is, the streets can’t have been cleaned up yet. But why is there simply no one at all?

“Shisui,” someone calls and their group stops to look at the newcomer. Itachi immediately recognizes Genma, even if he looks much younger than what Itachi remembers.
“Genma,” Shisui greets back with a small smile on his face that is immediately washed away by the man’s next words.
“The Hokage is dead.”

A heavy silence falls over them.

Genma isn’t quite crying, but it’s obvious how much he is grieving already. They remain silent, none of them quite sure of what words to offer. Itachi’s heart feels like lead in his chest. It’s heavy, it’s crushing him down and making even swallowing down difficult. He has never been close to the Third, but he had been a role model for him. Someone to look up to, to admire, and to aspire to be someday a ninja as complete as he had been.

It is a heavy loss for Konoha as a whole, for the shinobi world even, but more so for the people who knew him. Genma had been a Special Class Jônin for a few years now, he had been working close to the Hokage, remained by his sides. It must be quite a shock.

Itachi is also shook, but in this instant, the safety of the village comes first and so, like the shinobi he has trained to be, he puts aside his emotions and asks Genma.

“What about the enemy?” Genma looks up to him and nods, back in shinobi mindset as well.
“Taken care of. Mostly thanks to the Third.”
“Casualties?” Itachi questions again.
“Close to none. The civilians have been evacuated to the Mountain in time and the Hokage took down each Path before they could harm the shinobi. All but one Path have been defeated,” Genma answers, voice measured and tone even. Under his calm demeanour, Itachi can notice his hands shaking a bit.
“We took one down on the road to Konoha, I’ll give you the details on the way,” Shisui offers and they get moving with further ado.

Genma leads them into the quiet village. They don’t exactly run but they hurry down the streets and yet Itachi takes it all in as if time was slowed. The rumbles, the dirt, the buildings, the silence… Konoha stands strong, they’ve won, so why does he still feel defeated? This victory tastes bitter.

Soon, they arrive to what seems to be the aftermath of a tough battle. More buildings in the vicinity have been destroyed and there are still fuming rumbles scattered around. Shinobi are rushing about, each with different roles and purpose.

In the middle of it all, stand two figures giving out orders and if Itachi isn’t all that surprised to recognize Jiraiya, he is taken aback to witness how easily the man has taken on this directive spot in the middle of the mess. At his sides is Tsunade, her presence does come as a complete surprise.

Itachi thinks that Jiraiya and Tsunade are much like a butterflies, always fluttering about places, one away to write stories and the other almost avoiding Konoha and the responsibilities they both have towards their homeland. He never doubted the strength of the love of the two Sannin have for Konoha, he simply didn’t expect them to stand so strong and unwavering as Hiruzen would have wanted all of them to be.

Their group arrives in the middle of the main plaza, and Jiraiya immediately walks up to them once he has noticed their presence. Itachi can’t read his face and he can only wonder what Jiraiya truly feels in this instant.

They are warriors, Itachi especially has been trained to hide his emotions, and he expects the same from a fellow shinobi yet it’s almost inspiring but devastating to see what a tough training has achieved on them.

“Kuro,” Jiraiya greets, and Itachi nods back. “I need to talk to you, come with me.”

It’s all the explanation he gets, but being the lower ranking shinobi of them two, he follows suit without a word, sending a last glance to his team and only hoping that they’ll handle the situation better than he is.

Konoha is alive but wounded, their Hokage is dead and they are weakened. What if he had been there? It’s a terrible feeling. He feels like he has let people down, as if he had let Hiruzen die, even.

What was the point of his mission, bringing peace, if there were no people left to enjoy it? His place is in Konoha, where he can protect and defend. Like Hiruzen had. If he hadn’t left for his stupid quest, chances are that the man would be alive right now.

“I can tell you’re overthinking.”

Itachi’s head snaps up and he blinks at Jiraiya. The older man gives him a gentle smile that Itachi feels unsettled by. He has done nothing to deserve such a kind expression. Suddenly, he notices that they are headed for the Hokage’s office, and his confusion only grows.

“It’s been a few hours since the end of the battle,” Jiraiya says. ‘And Hiruzen’s death,’ Itachi hears even if the man does say it aloud. “And if the villagers are safe, and the shinobi busy with the aftermath, the higher ups are already worried about succession.”

Itachi frowns but remains quiet all the way to the Hokage’s room, up the many stairs of the tower. Once they reach the door, it’s a vague sense of unease that grips Itachi this time. It’s unsightly that he stands in the door frame of what has been Hiruzen’s work room for so many years, where so many great shinobi stood before he did. He almost feels as if his presence is an insult.

“Here,” Jiraiya says and it brings Itachi’s attention back to him, or more exactly to the piece of paper he hands him.

It’s a letter, he realises, handwritten and signed with the elegant name of Hiruzen Sarutobi himself, doted of the Konoha stamp too.

It’s not a letter, actually. It’s a will.

Itachi blinks once, then twice, and a few more times. He is at a complete loss for words.

“It’s mandatory for the Hokage to write a will when they take function, and then every few years or so,” Jiraiya says as if it explained why Itachi of all people should be allowed to read it. “Skip to the last paragraph,” he then adds.

Itachi does, with quite some hesitation, but once his eyes catch the name Kuro, all is blown away and he can’t stop reading over and over that one sentence. “Kuro, the rogue shinobi, shall be recognized as a Konoha shinobi if the man so desires,” he reads aloud.
“Yeah, looks like the old geezer took quite a liking to you,” Jiraiya says and Itachi keeps staring in silence at the words before his eyes. He kind of feels like crying, but it’s hard to put into words what it is exactly that is making his heart so heavy.

“What do you say?” Jiraiya asks and Itachi finally tears his eyes away from the paper to look at the man in front of him. What does he say? What should he say? Itachi doesn’t know. It’s a tough decision to make, even without considering the current situation and the fact that his thoughts are all over the place.

Staying in Konoha means being close to younger Itachi, to Sasuke, and many people who could eventually come to understand his real identity. Could he risk that? Hadn’t he already risked enough by using the seal in the first place?

“It’s also written in there that I should be next Hokage,” Jiraiya suddenly says.
“What?” Itachi incredulously asks back, all previous thoughts thrown out of the window.
“Yeah, Hiruzen seemed to think I’m the best match. I would have thought he’d choose Tsunade, she was always his favourite.”

Even if Jiraiya shrugs, smirks and goes for a playful tone, it’s obvious how upset he is.

Itachi doesn’t think Tsunade is a better match. She is a more stable person, and a lot more serious than Jiraiya will ever be, but the man has something only a few have, a raging Will of Fire strong enough to keep him standing in the toughest times. Jiraiya loves Konoha. He loves its inhabitants, its luscious green forests and even if he keeps leaving he comes back every time, as if called back to his roots by an invisible pull. Just like Itachi.

“You should become Hokage,” Itachi says with a soft voice, and he meets Jiraiya’s gentle stare for the first time head on. “And I should become a Konoha shinobi.”
“Shall we?” Jiraiya shoots back, but it’s not falsely playful this time or with his usual phlegm that he says this, it’s with utter seriousness.

This invisible pull has been pushing him back towards Konoha no matter how far Itachi has ran and he thinks that maybe it is time he stops running.

“Yeah, we shall.”

Being a new Chuunin in the middle of a destroyed Konoha proves to be quite difficult for Itachi. The first few weeks after the Third’s death had felt like years of slow transitioning but thanks to Jiraiya and Tsunade the reconstruction is going well. It had been decided as he was already a strong shinobi that Itachi would be made Chuunin.

He heard that someone – Itachi would bet on Shisui – proposed he was made Jônin immediately but being a newcomer and having little information to offer about himself, he in the end was made a Konoha Middle Class Shinobi. And to say he had been Anbu Captain a few years ago.

Itachi is fine with that, mostly. He is a stranger to the people from this time and he has to earn their trust, start from the bottom and prove his worth through countless missions before he is allowed to take the Jônin test. It’s refreshing, in a way, to start from the bottom and climb his way up.

It’s a new perspective, one he’s never really been able to have. But it also means taking orders every single day and running through the Fire Country from dawn to sunset.

Itachi sighs. He has had so little time these days that he hasn’t been able to make any progress on his goal. He tries to find time to see Shisui and they search together for informations on his seal since his friend has been extremely adamant about that. So far, they’ve come up empty of course.

Thankfully, Itachi isn’t all that behind in his quest, though. He has destroyed the Gedou Mazou, Pain and Konan won’t be a problem any more, and even if he still has to find Black Zetsu and Madara’s corpse to seal the deal, he doesn’t know where to start looking.

Itachi flops down on his living-room chair, takes a sip of his tea and sighs again. Deidara is at Shisui’s once more and having the kid take a liking to his friend is a very welcome outcome. Itachi likes Deidara, but he likes some peace better these days and the child can be loud.

A sudden knock at his door makes Itachi almost jump. He hadn’t heard anyone arriving and deep in thoughts as he had been, he hadn’t noticed the sudden familiar spark of Chakra. He really is tired.

Is he tired enough to pretend sleeping and avoid as of late his most troublesome worry? Another knock comes and Itachi gets up with a final sigh.

He opens his front door to find Kakashi standing there, a smile visible under his mask, eyes and hair both shining under the moonlight. He is a handsome man and it’s mostly all Itachi can think about when seeing Kakashi these days. It’s a bother.

“Hi,” Kakashi greets, and Itachi greets back, eyes averting to keep his mind blank. “Gai is having a party, wanna come?”

Gai and party together in the same sentence brings a whole load of memories Itachi would rather not think about with the main object of his fantasies standing in front of him.

“Err, no, I’m summoned to the Hokage’s office tomorrow, big mission, I’d rather sleep sorry,” he says quickly and he knows it almost sounds like a lie with how uncomfortable he sounds. It’s the truth though, but Itachi would rather be in Gai’s bathroom repeating last month’s events.

“Oh, really? Me too!” Kakashi says and his smile only widens.

“You have a meeting and you’re going to a party?”

“Obviously.” Children, all of them.

“But you know what,” Kakashi says before Itachi can add anything, “I think I’ll be a responsible adult this time around and just have some tea with a friend before going to sleep.” Itachi cocks an eyebrow and gives him a once over to which Kakashi only answers with a smile so wide that the mask doesn’t hide much of it’s shape. Itachi feels conned.

“Fine, come in,” he offers and even if he sounds bothered, he really isn’t.

“Deidara isn’t here?” Kakashi asks as Itachi shuts the door behind him. He leads him into the living room and gestures towards the table where his own tea sits now cold. Kakashi takes a seat and Itachi answers him while boiling water.

“No, he is at Shisui’s.”

“Mmh, I have seen the two of them together quite often, with Obito too.”

The name rings oddly in Kakashi’s voice. It sounds tentative, unsure. Itachi brings two cups to the table, cleans up his cold one and sits with Kakashi.

“I hear he’s allowed to be in Konoha for the time being, only one Anbu on him,” Itachi says, trying to go for casual conversation when really, he is genuinely worried about Kakashi.

More precisely, he is worried about what the man may have been thinking ever since finding out his childhood friend was not dead.

“Yeah, he spends most of his time with Shisui though.”

It sounds almost petulant. Itachi looks up from his tea to glance at Kakashi. The man seems very absorbed by his own cup, eyes digging a whole through the liquid. Maybe a bad topic then.

“Deidara got his results on the Academy Test yesterday,” Itachi tries, and Kakashi looks up at him. “He passed, he is officially a Konoha Genin,” Itachi says with a smile.

Obviously he passed, Deidara is a great shinobi for his age, probably already Chuunin level even. But just like Itachi, they were strangers here, and they had to earn a spot.

“Well, congrats to him, but it was obvious,” Kakashi says with a small laugh.

“Yeah, he wasn’t even stressed out,” Itachi answers with a chuckle of his own. Silence stretches comfortably between them.

It’s not so awkward, not as much as Itachi had thought it would be. When was the last time he sat down with a friend for tea? Too many years, that’s for sure. His social skills are probably rusty. Is he even funny? No, he probably isn’t, he reckons.

Movement catches his attention and he sees Kakashi pulling down his mask to take a sip of tea. Itachi doesn’t know why Kakashi hides his face. He always has, as far as Itachi can remember. He shouldn’t stare, maybe it’s about privacy.

But his eyes are drawn to the tiny mole under his mouth, to the shine of water on his lips, and up to two mismatched eyes that are staring back at him. Itachi blinks away and takes a sip of his tea, a faint blush on his cheeks.

“Caught you staring,” Kakashi teases and Itachi’s eyes snap back to him. The blush isn’t so faint any more.

“Why do you hide it? Your face I mean,” Itachi awkwardly asks with a vague gesture to Kakashi’s head, quickly taking another sip of tea to regain some composure.

“It makes people wonder,” Kakashi shoots back with a very charming smile that catches Itachi entirely off guard.

Has he ever seen Kakashi smile without his mask before? Itachi isn’t sure, but now he definitely won’t forget because his eyes are stuck to the man’s lips and the way they curl up in a smirk. There’s a weird sensation that is passing through his body. His mind feels almost foggy, as if he was tipsy.

Itachi feels bold and strong and it’s without hesitation that he leans in and finally does what has been on his mind for weeks.

Their lips touch, almost tentatively at first and Itachi is about to pull back when Kakashi leans in, sighing into the kiss. Itachi relaxes and lets the heat wash over him.

It’s really like being drunk, just like in his memory. Maybe it hadn’t been the alcohol in the end, just the strength of the bond pulling them together since they had met. They had been dancing around each other for months now, attracting and avoiding like magnets.

To Itachi, this kiss feels like coming home.

They break apart for a second, staring into each others’ eyes and Itachi can see all Kakashi feels in his gaze, can hear it in his breathless sighs and sense it in his body heat. The want is so clear it makes Itachi shiver.

Sudden footsteps make them jump apart, both looking at each other like deer caught in headlights. The front door bursts open and Deidara screams a greeting as he rushes through the living room and into his bedroom. He comes out half a second later to stare at both of them.

“What are you doing here?” Itachi blurts out, his face feels warm.

“I forgot my toothbrush, what is he doing here?” Deidara shoots back, head tilting towards Kakashi. The two men look at each other, both too embarrassed to process the situation.

“I, uh, stopped by for tea?” Kakashi offers. Deidara cocks a brow and looks at him up and down a few times before making a face.

“Sure, I’ll be on my way out,” he says before heading back into the room to come out a minute later with a toothbrush. Deidara stops in the hall to give them both a stare, and leaves without another word.

Itachi stares in silence at his abandoned cup of chilling tea and sighs before turning to Kakashi.

“Think he knows? My mask was down,” Kakashi says and Itachi blinks at him.

“Are we twelve and is he our mom?” He asks, quite incredulously, and Kakashi stares at him before booming out a laugh.

Itachi glares at him, confused by the situation. Does Kakashi regret their kiss? Does it matter if Deidara knows? Kakashi walks up to him and throws him an amused glance.

“Well, we have an early meeting tomorrow, I’ll be a functional adult and head home.” Itachi has to stop his eyes from rolling. Before he can come up with an answer though, Kakashi leans into his space and drops a kiss on his lips.

Itachi almost jumps back in surprise but his eyes close soon enough and he leans into the kiss. All too soon though, Kakashi pulls back and smiles at him. Itachi’s eyes are stuck to his lips.

“I’ll see you tomorrow,” Kakashi tells him and Itachi can barely register the door opening and closing. His throat feels dry, his lips too. He mindlessly runs his tongue over his lips but suddenly realises and blushes.

Maybe he is twelve. What kind of grown adult reacts like that to a chaste kiss?

It’s with one last sigh that Itachi heads back into his living room, cleans up the cups and heads to his room. He crashes head first into his bed and hopes for a restful sleeps which he knows he won’t be having any time soon.

Not with the feeling of Kakashi’s lips on his burnt into his mind.

°°°

Kakashi slept horrendously. He had been up all night, tossing and turning, feeling uncomfy in every single position and extremely frustrated with the turn of the events.

Maybe he should have stayed longer? But he hadn’t wanted to impose. He knows Kuro likes his space, and Kakashi had been all up in his space last night.

Kakashi splashes water on his face. He needs to stop thinking about this. He is late – not unusual – to the meeting, but this time the reason is that he had wasted sleep over a crush. It’s laughable, really.

Kakashi wipes his face, heads into his room and throws on his jacket. He is an adult, and a shinobi at that. He won’t let something like that get to him. He’ll keep his usual phlegm, and play it cool.

He is about to head out when he stops in his tracks and stares at his feet. His socks are different colours.

He really isn’t playing it cool.

It’s only ten minutes later that Kakashi finally arrives to the Mission Desk for his meeting and that makes him a whole hour late. It’s a bit worse than usual.

“KAKASHI!” Tsunade screams as soon as he enters the building. “Jiraiya and Kuro have been waiting for you for hours! Get up there!”

“Techinically, it’s only been one single hour-”

“NOW!” She shouts, raising a fist as a very convincing threat. Kakashi cowers back and heads up the flight of stairs.

Over the last few weeks, he has gotten to know his new higher-ups. Jiraiya isn’t the best at paperwork and keeping track of income and outcome so these tasks had been given to Tsunade.

In reality, both of them are the Hokage, and it makes sense for them to work together as a team, they fit well together Kakashi thinks. But he likes Jiraiya better, Tsunade is too violent for his taste.

“KAKASHI!”

Kakashi squats down the second he opens the door and something flies over his head. He glances into the room and sees Jiraiya, one foot on the table and hands raised as if they had just thrown something. Kakashi looks over his shoulder and sure enough there’s a scroll that would have hit him in the face had he not crouched in time.

Scratch that, they’re both violent.

“Yes, I’m late, I’m sorry,” Kakashi says in a pleading voice, putting both hands up in surrender as he enters the room and closes the door behind him.

Jiraiya settles down and sits back in his chair but crosses his arms in clear displeasure. Kakashi knows he went a bit over board this time, he’ll make up by ending this mission in a blink.

Kakashi risks a glance in Kuro’s direction and meets his eyes. The man sends him a look that totally reads ‘really?’. Whoops, he disappointed him.

“Well, now that you’re finally here, let’s start,” Jiraiya begins once Kakashi has sat. “This is a duo mission, only the two of you will be going with no backups.” Kakashi’s brow furrows. “We have located one of Orochimaru’s hideouts right in our forests, you two will be checking it out.”

Kakashi cocks his head at the name. Orochimaru? Of course he knows about the man’s doings, it was on one of those exact missions that he had met Kuro. But another hideout so close to their village? The snake is getting bolder.

“It is an information gathering mission. If you encounter an enemy, you will flee. Bringing back the information you will retrieve there is vital,” Jiraiya continues and Kakashi nods.

It makes sense that it’s only him and Kuro then, they both know their ways around Orochimaru’s hideouts and they are good at stealth and tracking. It should be an easy enough mission.

Kakashi glances at Kuro to find the man staring down hard at the piece of paper in front of him, the mission details, with a worried look on his face. If Kakashi is confused for a second, he suddenly realises that never even got to know why Kuro was in that hideout in the first place.

“Yll wikl leave as soon as you’re packed,” Jiraiya finishes and Kakashi tears his eyes away from Kuro to look at Jiraiya and nods.

They both get up and with a final affirmative nod towards Kuro, they use a Shunshin to teleport themselves, both knowing to meet as soon as possible at the Front Gate.

Packing for a mission like this is quite easy. The location indicated in the details can be reached within one day and they only need the bare minimum so Kakashi packs a light bag, grabs weapons and soldier pills, readying himself for what is to come.

Easy mission or not, only the future will tell him.

Chapter Text

Itachi had expected to wait at the North Gate for quite a while since Kakashi has always made a point of being late. This time however, it would seem that he had decided to pack quickly and he arrived only a few minutes after Itachi did.

With a nod to each other, they picked up running and off they were.

Deidara had been home when Itachi had come back to pack his bags. The kid was obviously upset to have Itachi leave again but as of late he had grown more mature and the goodbyes had gone smoother this time.

Itachi still leaves with a clouded mind. He is isn’t all that worried about Deidara, he knows the kid is in good hands with Shisui, and even if he doesn’t like to admit it, with Obito. It isn’t even the latter that worries him.

Obito has been acting nothing but well-behaved, almost a bit too much. It unnerves him a bit. Still, what is on his mind and eats at him is the mission itself. Itachi isn’t usually worried about missions. He has failed some, everyone has, but he has always come out alive and managed to always do well enough to climb through the ranks lighting fast. His record is immaculate.

This should be an easy mission. Find hideout, sneak in, collect information, sneak out. Itachi somehow knows it’ll go down differently.

As they advance towards their goal, Itachi takes in their surroundings. He knows exactly where they’re going. It’s the hideout Itachi had marked on his list. He had been there back in his own time once already and he knows that this hideout is different from the others.

It’s one of Orochimaru’s main operation centre. It’s very close to Konoha, but also extremely well hidden and well guarded. Jiraiya really had hit the mark with this one.

Itachi doesn’t even want to think about it, but Orochimaru himself could be there. He didn’t have his trusty right hand man as of yet, and Itachi is immensely thankful that he won’t have to fight Kabuto. Orochimaru will be trouble enough.

In a way, Itachi should be thankful for this mission. Orochimaru is a loose end he needs to deal with before he can call his quest over. He isn’t a direct threat to Konoha just yet, but his thirst for power could one day be a danger all the same. Better deal with him now.

Itachi rushes through the branches with his mind occupied. He glances at his mission partner and almost feels like sighing. Kakashi is an addition to this problem, one he also needs to think about. He doesn’t know if he can fight Orochimaru and protect him at the same time, not that Kakashi is weak, but the snake is tenacious and vicious. And that’s not even mentioning what happened yesterday.

Deidara had a gleam in his eyes this morning that was too mischievous to be innocent. Itachi had almost blushed. Almost, because he isn’t a child like Deidara.

Still, he is bothered. He had slept terribly, thoughts passing in reckless rush of flashes behind his closed eyelids. He couldn’t stop remembering the feeling of Kakashi’s lips and the taste of his mouth. The way he could hear his breath and feel the flutter of his lashes.

It was all too vivid, even now, and Itachi had never had to deal with feelings like this before. It isn’t like him to be distracted during a mission, to have such thoughts when he should be calm and collected. Kakashi makes his blood boil, it makes him reckless and messes with his thought process. He’s unpredictable. And unpredictable is never good during missions.

They’ve been running for a while, without taking any break, but at last they finally slow down before coming to a stop high in tree tops. Kakashi stands on a branch near him, looking down at the small clearing before them. It looks entirely inconspicuous.

Still, the hideout’s entrance is there. Itachi knows where to look for the faint outlines of a hidden hatch in a tree stomp. He glances at Kakashi and can see him surveying the meadow, trying to find what it is that they’re looking for. Itachi points at the stomp and Kakashi’s eyes narrow until they widen and he turns to stare at Itachi.

“That’s the entrance,” he explains in a quiet voice and Kakashi nods. They share a few common Anbu hand signs and agree to silently move down from the tree and approach the stomp.

Without rustling any leaves, quieter than even the wind, the two shinobi drop in the clearing and stick to shadows until they creep behind the trees at the edge. Itachi feels no sign of life around them, but there could be barriers or seals. With utmost care, they move closer to the stomp and Itachi reaches a hand. His fingers feel the bumps of wood, the centre being clearly colder and made of a different material.

It’s a metal trap and without knowing it’s there, it’s unlikely anyone would notice anything different about the stomp. Orochimaru is a master of his art.

Itachi applies light pressure and the trap gives lightly until he is able to move it out of the way to reveal a hole going down under ground, a few bars of metal buried in the walls to help the descent. They glance at one another before nodding, Itachi signing that he’ll go first before lightly jumping inside.

He drops without a sound a few meters lower in an alcove of dirt that immediately opens in a large corridor of bricks walls. There are candles lighting the way inside but visibility isn’t good, Itachi notices. Kakashi drops beside him a second later and Itachi can feel him looking around and taking in his surroundings as well.

There is only one way they can go, no escape route beside where they came from and the darkness is against them. A faint trickle of Chakra passes through both of them and Sharingans activate. Thankfully, darkness isn’t very much of an issue for them.

Without a sound, they advance further into the barely lit corridor, both on high alert and ready to fight at any given moment. There are no sounds to be heard at all, and no presence to be felt. It’s a bit odd, Itachi thinks.

It’s not one of Orochimaru headquarters so it’s normal not to find hundreds of powerful enemies, but the place is to be well guarded, or at least it was supposed to be.

Itachi feels a sudden sense of dread creeping up on him and he turns around swiftly, just in time to avoid a snake snapping its fangs at his shoulder. Seconds later, hundreds more sprout from the walls as if the bricks had been made out of them.

Itachi loses sight of Kakashi in an instant but he has himself to care for. His resistance to poison is high, but with so many snakes he can’t let himself get bitten one too many times. He narrowly avoid the deadly bites, hissing loud in his ears and overwhelming everything else.

Itachi dashes left and right, calling upon Amaterasu to burn any snake that comes within his sight. The flames catch quickly, fumes rising and a scorching smell rushing up in the air. Itachi immediately covers his mouth and nose with his hand and hurroes down the corridor until it takes a left.

It gives into an open room with a high ceiling where the smoke clears easily. Itachi takes a breath of fresh air and looks around the room. Although rather large, it is mostly empty save for a few tables and scattered books, but no sign of any of the snakes. No sign of Kakashi either.

Itachi is actually rather reassured not to see him deeper into the hideout. Kakashi must have gone the other way to avoid the snakes and gone back to the entrance. Without him around, Itachi can go all out.

“I’ve had my eyes on you for a while,” a voice suddenly says right in his ear and Itachi feels chilled to the bone. His whole body feels cold and he can’t move an inch. “How nice of you to come to me.”

Itachi can’t turn his head to look at the man but he recognizes Orochimaru’s chilling voice all the same. He had always disliked the man for some reason, feeling a deep sense of unease in his stomach each time they had met.

Suddenly there’s a wet thing near his ear and he feels a lick. He tries to recoil but his body wont move at all. He is completely paralysed.

“How do you like my newest recipe, Itachi?”

Itachi’s heart stops.

He feels Orochimaru moving away from him until he comes to stand in front of him. He looks as he always does, pale skin and golden snake eyes, a loose kimono draping his body. There’s a wicked smile on his face and an unnervingly knowing look in his eyes.

“How did I find out, I’m sure you must wonder my boy.”

Itachi does wonder, but even if the paralysing poison wasn’t rendering him mute he still wouldn’t give Orochimaru the pleasure of knowing he has been totally outsmarted. So much for going all out and protecting Kakashi. Itachi had been too confident.

“Yagura was one of my little birdies before Obito used his Sharingan on him. I was watching your fight and wondering who this unknown Uchiha could be, you see,” Orochimaru explains with a drawl, taking his sweet time as he circles around Itachi, visibly savouring this power he has over the man. “How surprised I was to recognize that seal on your back.”

Itachi’s eyes widen, the only body reaction he is allowed. He grits his teeth and tries to fight the paralysis without much success. His body feels too cold, he can almost not feel it any more. He is in a lot of trouble.

“Dear foolish boy,” Orochimaru says as he runs a finger over Itachi’s cheek, sending disgusted shivers running down the man’s back. “That seal is a curse, even I turned away from it after decrypting it years ago. I left it to rot in Konoha but to think you’d find it and turn back in time.”

Itachi glares at the man. It’s bad news that someone has found out about his identity, especially worse that it’s Orochimaru of all people. The man is smart, cunning, he could easily use these information against him.

A ‘curse’, he says. Could Itachi trust his words? The Sharingan had helped him read through the basic instructions and the effects but could he have missed something. He hates that superior look Orochimaru has in his eyes as he looks at him up and down, savouring the moment fully.

“So tell me now, how do you think you’re going to-”

Orochimaru’s sentence comes to a harsh stop when a kick connects to his jaw. He had been so absorbed in his power trip and grand monologue that he hadn’t noticed Kakashi sliding up behind him. Itachi blinks at his saviour, in as much shock as Orochimaru had been before crashing harshly against the wall. Kakashi turns to look at Itachi, a look of clear confusion.

“What the hell is this lunatic saying?” Kakashi asks, but before Itachi can even think to answer, Orochimaru is up to his feet and strong, dark chakra gathers around him.

The air grows even colder around them, but Itachi notices that he is starting to feel warmer and this time when he tries to move, his fingers react and he can sign the danger to Kakashi. The man’s attention snaps back to Orochimaru and he readies his stance, gaze strong and posture confident, all questions seemingly forgotten to focus on the battle at hand.

Itachi can only watch as they exchange blows, Orochimaru changing and transforming his body with each strike, lengthening his neck or sending snakes through his bare fingertips. Kakashi fares admirably well against such an unpredictable enemy, avoiding all of his blows and riposting back with some of his own signature moves.

His chidori pierces a hole through Orochimaru’s shoulder and the man grunts in pain. Kakashi wretches his hand out of Orochimaru’s shoulder, a pool of blood forming between them and Orochimaru screams out in agony.

The man’s body suddenly starts growing and growing until it elongates and the skin begins to grow scales. The blow in his shoulder has completely disappeared as if healed by the viscous substance covering his newly formed body.

Orochimaru turns into a great white snake and Itachi can only watch in horror as the monster lunges towards Kakashi, mouth wide open and fangs ready to bite Kakashi’s head right off. It’s a very narrow escape and Itachi can swear he sees a few strands of sliver hair fall to the ground.

Kakashi seems entirely unbothered though and with amazing agility crouches down and pushes away from the ground with one hand, using the other to draw his tanto and slash the snake’s head cleanly off. It falls to the ground with a wet sound, blood spurting and pooling around the corpse.

The other end of the body though wiggles about as if still alive and to both their horror, Orochimaru climbs out of the snake tail, covered in slimy liquid. He grunts at them and glares before the man’s whole body becomes watery like and disappears into the ground. Itachi looks at the place Orochimaru had just disappeared with wide eyes.

“Well, that was disgusting,” Kakashi says and Itachi turns his head at him, feeling his body slowly coming back to normal, but his mind still shook. He looks at the man before him and sees just how strong he has become. And to think he had believed he’d be the one to protect Kakashi.

“Do you think he’s left?” Kakashi asks as he moves closer to Itachi and starts inspecting him for wounds.

“I don’t think so, no, Orochimaru is a vicious one, he’s probably hiding somewhere,” Itachi says, and the words are a bit jumbled, the paralysis only starting to wear off.

They stand close to each other, and when Itachi looks at Kakashi’s face, he meets the man’s questioning glance.

“He said-”

“Not now,” Itachi cuts as he cracks his neck and rolls his shoulder, finally free from the snakes’ poison. “We need to investigate this room.”

Honestly, Itachi couldn’t care less about the room right now. He can’t even look at Kakashi’s face, too scared of the worry and the questions the man has for him. The only thing on his mind is that he knows. Kakashi knows he isn’t from this time. He could report him to Jiraiya, he could even try to kill him this instant for breaking into Konoha and stealing the seal in the first place.

Wait. Had he heard when Orochimaru had called him ‘Itachi’? Or does he know nothing about his identity still? He hates feeling so lost and unsure. The pressure of a hand on his shoulder breaks him from his thoughts and he readies himself for Kakashi’s reaction.

“Alright, later then."

Itachi blinks. He finally looks up and bear the full weight of Kakashi’s gaze. It’s not filled with hate or distrust. It’s the same as it had been before, in fact. Black eyes staring back at him evenly, with something almost tender and Itachi feels as though he should blush. Or run away from such strong emotions.

“Yeah, uhm, yeah later, let’s search the room for now,” he mumbles confusedly, moving away from Kakashi and missing the hurt that passes through the man’s eyes as he shrugs his hand away.

Itachi doesn’t really know what Jiraiya had expected them to find inside this hideout. Maybe plans about an attack on Konoha, though Orochimaru had little reason to do so for now. Still, he tries to focus on his mission and runs through the scattered books and papers that he finds on the different tables.

Now that the danger is gone, he can see that the room is a library of some sort, the walls itself being bookshelves filled to the brim. The only furniture are a few tables with research papers on them. It ‘s a very casual room. Too casual for one of Orochimaru’s hideout, even.

A sudden rustling noise grabs his attention and Itachi turns to look at Kakashi, hand deep in a hole in one of the bookshelves, rummaging until something clicks and the middle shelf starts moving to reveal an opening big enough for a person.

Well, forget all he said before, he was thankful they had been sent on this mission together, Kakashi was a wild card but a very effective one.

Itachi walks closer to the newly found hole in the wall carefully, standing opposite of Kakashi. He signs to him to be careful, and with a nod, they enter the new room. Much like everything else in the hideout, it’s barely lit, but the light doesn’t come from torches but from a large tub or clear glowing water going from ceiling to ground.

It looks much larger than the ones in Orochimaru’s other hideout, it can probably contain a whole grown up man. When Itachi approaches the tables next to it, he realises that this is exactly what it’s for. He grabs the papers scattered on the wood and reads through them lightening fast with his Sharingan, eyes widening as he starts to understand what this is all about.

Research papers about immortality, or rather, moving from one body to another using the genes of the Hashirama. And for that, Orochimaru needs their cells. Uchiha cells. And where better to find some than on their corpses. It’s just as disgusting and profane as everything seems to be with Orochimaru.

Itachi hands the papers to Kakashi who quickly starts reading through them as well, his face falling as he goes.

Itachi turns away from his partner and starts to investigate the rest of the room. it’s a very small hidden alcove and there isn’t a lot to look at besides the giant tub and that lone table but a spark of white attracts his attention. On the furthest end wall is a white board with what seems to be coordinates to locate an important something.

What? Itachi doesn’t exactly know, but he memorises the board all the same, planning on checking out the location later. As he turns back to Kakashi, they hear a deep rumble that seems to come from the earth itself.

Suddenly, the ground starts to shake and sirens start blaring in Itachi’s mind. He knows that all of Orochimaru’s centres are equipped with self-destructing devices to erase all traces of his research. He hadn’t thought that Orochimaru would actually blow up one of his main hideouts.

Itachi doesn’t bother with signs, he grabs Kakashi by the hand and pulls him out of the hidden alcove seconds before it collapses. Water pools at their feet and fumes start to rise as the walls begin to crumble.

Itachi knows how uncomfortable Kakashi is with caves crashing down and he barely thinks before dragging him along, using his well honed agility skills to avoid falling boulders and runs head-first through the fumes, only thinking about getting out of here with Kakashi alive.

He is suddenly reminded of their first encounter. It had been in a hideout just like this one, and they had gotten out thanks to Kakashi but this time, Itachi is the one who’s going to help him out.

They run, not taking the time to look back, not even thinking about all the precious information they are leaving behind and how it means that this mission is officially failed.

Soon enough, they reach the opening in the tree stomp and Itachi pushes Kakashi in front of him and signs to him to climb up the ladder. Quickly. The corridor is collapsing, the sound of the wreck loud in their ears.

Kakashi has a wild and terrified look in his eyes but he nods and doesn’t make Itachi wait before complying. In the blink of an eye, they both jump out of the trunk and are back in the clearing, the soothing smell of the forest strong in the air and the sunlight bright against their eyes.

They are both out of breath, dirty from the rumbles but unharmed and that’s already much better than the state they had been in after some of their previous missions.

“Are you alright?” Itachi asks when he notices that Kakashi has flopped on the ground.

“Yeah, I just hate this kind of stuff,” he says in a breath and even if Itachi knows exactly the reason behind his trauma, all he does is nod. He has never been the best when it comes to reassuring people.

He walks up to the man and crouches down before awkwardly patting his back. Kakashi looks at him with a wide smile that stuns Itachi for a second and the man digs out a few scrunched up papers.

“Best part is that I grabbed some stuff before running out so...”

“… The mission isn’t a fail,” Itachi finishes and he smiles back. He almost lets out a laugh when he sees how carefree Kakashi still is after that tumultuous experience.

“Yup.”

Kakashi’s smile widens, creating light crinkles around his eyes. He looks much older than when they had first met, but still has childish antics sometimes and Itachi does let out a snort this time, this man is simply too adorable for him to remain impassive. Kakashi laughs as well and Itachi lends him a hand to help him up.

They stand close to one another once again, but with the twittering of the birds, the gentle breeze ruffling Kakashi’s hair and the sun warming up their skin, Itachi can’t even think of the mission any more.

Suddenly, all he has on his mind is Kakashi and when he looks at his face he sees that Kakashi is burning a hole through his lips. The man raises a hand slowly, fingers gently pressing against his lips and brushing away some dirt.

“Your face is all dirty,” he says.

Itachi smiles despite him. He feels the shape of Kakashi’s fingers against his lips and the touch feels like it’s lighting a fire in his stomach. Minutes ago they had escaped death and Orochimaru but it’s all washed away by the look in Kakashi’s eyes as he stares at his lips.

Itachi could almost forget that Kakashi now knows who he is. He takes a breath and pulls away, suddenly sobbered up by the thought.

Now is not the time. They have to get back to Konoha and take the research papers to Jiraiya as soon as possible.

“Let’s go back,” he says, and Kakashi follows suit without any complaint.

°°°

“So the hideout is in ruins,” Jiraiya sighs.

“Well, yes, but we still have some papers and-” Kakashi starts but the newly appointed Hokage stops him right off the bat.

“I told you to be cautious you should know better Kakashi.”

Kakashi falls silent. He feels annoyed for some reason. Jiraiya used to be much more fun before he became a leader. After all, they still had brought back precious information regarding Orochimaru’s research.

Kakashi now also has precious information regarding Kuro. He glances in the man’s direction to see him standing straight and strong, the demeanour of a well trained shinobi. But his eyes are stuck to the ground and he doesn’t look so proud.

“Apologies for the failing of this mission, sir,” Kuro says and it’s irking to hear him sound so meek. Jiraiya sighs again as he looks through the scrolls they had brought back.

“Anything else to report?”

Kuro’s head snap up and he glances worriedly at Kakashi. Kakashi hesitates for just a second, glances back at Kuro but shakes his head and says “No, sir, nothing of importance.”

It’s almost imperceptible but Kakashi notices Kuro slightly relaxing. He hadn’t heard much, but enough to clear up a bit of the mystery surrounding Kuro. And now he has questions.

Jiraiya stares at them both for a second, probably understanding that there is indeed something else but he seems to choose not to question them for now at least. With a sign of his hand, he dismisses them, and in a flash, the two men go from the Hokage’s room to the roof where prying eyes aren’t as many.

Kuro stands far from him. His arms are crossed over his chest and he looks bothered. There’s still some dust in his hair and they have lost the shine they usually have under the fire country’s sun. His skin his porcelain white, faint scars leaving a few traces of pink here and there.

Kakashi never gets tired of looking at Kuro. There’s so much to see and appreciate and the more he learns about the man, the more beautiful he seems to become.

“So...” Kuro starts with barely hidden apprehension, but Kakashi cuts in first.

“I’d like a cup of tea,” he says with a smile and Kuro’s pale skin takes on a pinkish colour. It seems that the memory of their kiss shared over some tea is still strong in his mind too.

“Fine, we’ll have some tea then.”

When they arrive at Kuro’s apartment, Kakashi is thankful for the welcoming silence that awaits them. He doesn’t hate Deidara, he mostly finds him annoying but in a slightly endearing way. Not that he’d ever admit it to the kid.

Kakashi takes his shoes off, thankful that he had changed his mismatched socks before heading out, and enters the living room. Kuro is on his heels and he busies himself with the teapot as Kakashi sits down at the table.

He takes some time to look around the apartment and notices the lack of decoration. It looks like no one lives here almost. Everything is clean and well placed, a striking clash with Kakashi’s own home where underwear hang from the chairs. There’s only one single house plant, it looks dead.

It’s as if Kuro didn’t expect to stay for long, ready to leave at any second. It’s making Kakashi’s stomach churn uncomfortably.

Movement catches his attention and he looks down to see a cup of hot fuming tea in front of him. Kuro sits down next to him and silence falls over them, not the easy and comfortable one they had shared the previous day but a heavy and apprehensive one.

“I’m not going to tell anyone about what I heard,” Kakashi starts, because he can feel how worried Kuro is and he can’t help but want to reassure him.

“What did you hear, exactly?” Kuro shoots back, voice tight and posture defensive.

Kakashi thinks for a second.

“The part that said you like to wear pink thongs,” he tries, but Kuro stares at him blankly, not even slightly amused by his lame attempt at lightening the mood. “Fine, I heard him say you used a seal to turn back in time.”

Kuro exhales. He doesn’t look at Kakashi any more, visibly more intrigued by his own cup of tea that he insists on glaring at. Silence stretches for a few seconds and Kakashi watches every single detail of Kuro’s face that could help him decipher what he is thinking about.

And finally, Kuro looks up at him with a worry so clear in his eyes that Kakashi wants to pull him into a tight hug.

“Don’t you have questions?” He asks, and yes Kakashi has tons of them, but in the end, most of them would be for his own egoistic satisfaction.

What used to be his name? Where was he from? What time? How many years ago? Or, how many years from now? Had they met before? Were they… something in that time? But what Kakashi chooses to say is much different.

“Aren’t you lonely?”

Because in the end, none of those answers would mean something. He has learned that dwelling over the past isn’t the best way to move forward. That time that Kuro was from is lost. Everyone he has known doesn’t exist and will never be. Because if he is here, if he travelled through time, then only the present matters and it’s all they have.

Kuro looks at him with surprise. He seems taken aback by his question, as if he hadn’t even ever asked himself this. He takes a moment to think over his answer, eyes blinking confusedly. But then, a smile blossoms on his face and it’s the most frank and honest Kakashi has ever seen him look

“I’ve got everything I need in this time,” is what he answers.

It’s Kakashi’s turn to look surprised. It takes him a moment to fully understand the depth of the man’s words. They have each other.

Kakashi forgets everything from his tea to the fact that had wanted to remain cool and collected like a mature adult. In the next second, he has stood up and walked to Kuro. He grabs his hand to gently prompt him to stand up as well. The man seems confused but cooperates and once they stand together, Kakashi forgets even the thousands of questions he has but shall never ask.

He kisses him.

They have this and honestly, Kakashi doesn’t care about the rest. A hand falls to his hip and brings their bodies closer. Kakashi doesn’t even realise his own hands have moved, one resting in the small of Kuro’s back, the other cupping the man’s cheek.

Their kiss is slow and tender, heavy with unspoken words that they both hold dear to their hearts. They are shinobi. Life is short for them, and Kakashi intends to make it worthwhile.

They break apart for a moment and Kakashi opens his eyes to see that Kuro is already looking at him. The black of his eyes seem deeper and his pupils are blown, clear proof of what Kakashi does to him and it’s making his blood rush.

He doesn’t think he has ever desired someone as much as he does Kuro. It’s like a fire, a conflagration that is burning down to his very bones. Blood feels like lava in his veins and his heart is beating so loud that he is sure Kuro can hear it. He wants the burn the keep going, to get stronger and stronger until he can’t take it any more.

He wants so much and so badly.

The want must be more than clear in his gaze because Kuro’s hand at his hip starts gripping harder and the fire in his eyes grows stronger. They start kissing again, but this time it’s much more passionate, almost desperate.

They grip each other so tightly it’s almost painful but it’s all washed away by the feel of Kuro’s lips. Kakashi can feel Kuro’s nails digging in the skin of his hip and blood rushes south, his hand getting lost in the man’s black hair. He doesn’t exactly tug but grips hard enough to hear a subtle moan pass Kuro’s lips and he is sure that for one second that sound makes him forget even his own name.

They break apart once more, breathings short and hearts ablaze. Kakashi is embarrassingly hard in his tight pants and he thinks maybe he ought to calm down. Kuro takes a sudden step back and Kakashi feels cold all over. He had come on too strong, or perhaps Kuro didn’t want to-

“Bedroom.”

And with one single word, whispered in a rough voice, Kakashi feels hot again. He nods and follows Kuro into the barely lit room, curtains closed and only dim light filtering through. The bed is cleanly done, but Kuro pushes him down on it and suddenly Kakashi couldn’t care less about messing the sheets or even what colour they are. They kiss once more, their lips crashing hard and tongue touching one another almost tentatively.

Kakashi wants him so bad it hurts. Every stroke of his hand on his body is making him shiver, almost tremble with desire. Kuro is on top of him and he can feel just how strongly he is desired too. Kakashi’s hips rise to meet Kuro’s and they both moan softly, every nerve ending lit by the friction of their crotch.

They stop kissing for a moment and Kuro sits back to take off his shirt in one swift motion that leaves Kakashi staring at the expanse of his chest. There is quite the number of scars on his body, but Kakashi has them too. He doesn’t mind in the least, he finds them beautiful even and he sits up to leave a kiss on a red scar that seems more recent.

“You’re beautiful”, Kakashi whispers against his skin and Kuro shivers, a blush appearing on his cheeks.

“Take your shirt off too,” the man says, almost petulantly, and Kakashi wants to be a tease, but he also wants Kuro so he complies.

The next time they kiss, their bare chests connect, hearts beating together. Kissing isn’t enough for Kakashi any more and his hand reaches south to palm at Kuro’s hardness. The man moans before sighing into Kakashi’s neck.

“Keep going,” he whispers roughly and it’s all Kakashi needed to hear.

In one swift movement he swaps their position and sits on top of Kuro, taking a second to admire the man under him. His face is pink and the blush is reaching all the way down to his shoulders.

Kakashi’s hand moves from his cheek to his abs, watching with something akin to wonder how his ribs move under his touch, body curling to meet his fingers. His hand hovers Kuro’s crotch and Kakashi looks into the man’s eyes before finally applying some pressure.

Kuro’s eyes close, his head falls back, revealing the smooth expanse of his neck and a sigh falls from his lips. Kakashi can’t help but lean in to bite Kuro’s neck lightly, almost expecting the man to complain about marks but all he does is moan louder.

The sounds he makes will turn Kakashi insane.

He tugs at Kuro’s pants, unable to wait any more and a second later, Kuro is left in nothing but a natural beauty that seems almost ethereal to Kakashi. He takes his own pants off, and climbs back on top of Kuro, kissing him passionately, their naked bodies brushing against one another in a delicious feeling of pleasure that sets both of them on fire.

Kakashi can vaguely hear Kuro’s hand fumbling about with the bedside table’s drawer and he is handed a second later a balm of some sort. Kakashi breaks away from the kiss and stares at the foreign object in his hand, confused for a brief moment but the second it connects his whole face turns pink and he hears Kuro chuckle.

“Don’t laugh,” he says petulantly. Kuro keeps smiling lightly, and Kakashi fights down his embarrassment.

He coats three fingers in the translucent balm now fully aware of what Kuro wants and he takes the man’s dick in his hand. He won’t be made fun of.

Kuro moans, head thrown back once more and eyes closing. As Kakashi starts stroking, the sounds get louder and louder, making Kakashi throb each time he hears Kuro’s desperate voice.

Kakashi presses a single digit against Kuro’s entrance and he hears the man inhale sharply. He plays around, rubs the ring gently before applying a light pressure and Kuro exhales, breath shaky. He only trembles lightly when Kakashi inserts the first finger but the second he starts moving it in and out, the moans don’t stop coming.

Kakashi’s dick is painfully hard but it gets better the second he feels Kuro’s hand wrap around it. They stroke each other leisurely, taking their time to enjoy their shared pleasure.

When Kakashi inserts a second finger, Kuro’s legs start to shake and the deeper he goes, the louder the man gets. It’s a pleasure to hear and a delight to see him tremble under his hands.

Kuro then rubs his thumb over Kakashi’s tip and it’s his turn to moan, biting down on his lip to keep the sound controlled but Kuro repeats the motion and Kakashi loses his cool. He inserts a third finger, feeling just how tight and warm Kuro is, the balm greatly helping with loosening the friction into a pleasurable rub.

“K-Kakashi,” Kuro grits out in between two moans, “Stop, I’m ready, just-” and the man moans again.

Kakashi smirks and debates whether he should just make Kuro cum on his fingers but his dick is throbbing and he can’t wait to feel him. He takes his fingers out and applies a generous amount of balm on his dick. He is soft in his movement when he pushes Kuro’s knees to his chest, and even more gentle when he finally slides in.

They both moan, voices mixing together and sharing the heat of their bodies. Kakashi tries to wait before moving, wanting to let Kuro adjust but he feels so tight, so warm, so much desire welling up in him that he can’t help but start moving his hips slowly.

The friction is almost too much. It feels so good Kakashi’s eyes almost fall closed but he forces them open to look at the man before him. Kuro is staring back at him, eyes half closed and mouth open, soft sounds falling from his lips each time Kakashi moves. He is breath-taking.

Kakashi pushes the man’s knee apart and he bends down. Their lips meet once more in a tender kiss as he slides in deeper and Kuro’s mouth opens in a moan. Kakashi kisses him deeply, tongues brushing as he starts moving faster and faster.

The feeling of the man’s body under him is driving him crazy, he can feel every single shake and the light tremble of his limbs and core. He can feel the air leaving his ribcage each time he thrusts in. The heat is all consuming, it’s reaching its peak and Kakashi feels the pleasure building up and up until it’s all too much.

His eyes close and he brings a hand to Kuro’s crotch to stroke the man in time with his thrusts. Kuro becomes impossibly tighter and Kakashi can feel him starting to unravel. They are both chasing their ends and before long, Kakashi feels his own crashing down upon him.

His thrusts become erratic but he never stops stroking Kuro’s dick, only going faster and rubbing his thumb on the tip. Kuro moans louder, meeting Kakashi’s thrusts until he stops suddenly, head rolling back and a harsh moan leaving his lips as he finally cums. He squeezes down on Kakashi’s dick who unravels with a moan, feeling all strength leave his body as his pleasure reaches its climax.

Kakashi blinks his eyes open, breathing heavy, and gently pulls out, hearing Kuro let out a tired moan. He looks down at the man, he has his eyes closed, a hand to his forehead, breathing just as hard as Kakashi.

“You’re beautiful,” he says again, because honestly what else could he say when he sees such a person laid out bare for him.

His heart is filled up to the brim with affection, body sated and mind buzzing. Kakashi can’t tell if Kuro’s face is red from the exhaustion, or if he’s blushing again.

“Stop saying that,” Kuro says with a tired smile and Kakashi doesn’t gratify the man with an answer. It’s not like he’s ever going to anyway.

Kuro reaches for the drawer once more, fishing out some tissues that he uses to gently clean them both up. They need a shower anyway, but Kakashi couldn’t care less about that for now. He flops down next to Kuro, laying side by side. He kind of wants to cuddle.

As if reading his mind, Kuro turns on his side and takes him in his arms, chest against Kakashi’s forehead. He brings his head closer to the man’s skin and breathes in his scent.

“Are you an animal?” Kuro asks and Kakashi thinks he ought to be offended. He can’t find the heart to be when all he feels is content and warm.

“You’re the one who’s loud like an animal,” he shoots back smoothly and Kuro falls silent.

Kakashi looks up to his face and this time he is sure the man is blushing. They are two grown men arguing like children, laying in bed in the middle of the day and even if they have tomorrow to face, Kakashi isn’t that worried.

They have each other after all.

Chapter Text

Itachi wakes up feeling warm and sated. Kakashi is laying beside him, and they are still wrapped around each other, limbs a tangled mess. The man's face is peaceful, and Itachi can't help but stare. From the shine of his lips to his grey hair, eyes stopping a second on the mole beside his mouth before his gaze turns to Kakashi's closed eyes. His lashes brush against his cheeks, and the sunlight filtering through the curtains reflects on his skin, giving it a warm orange glow.

He looks very handsome, Itachi thinks. And he had looked even better when he had been hovering over Itachi, their bodies connected and pleasure shared. Now, he needs a shower. Badly. He is filthy.

He very carefully extracts himself from Kakashi, hearing the man grunt in his sleep before he turns around to hug the pillow tightly to his chest and the adorable sight makes a smile blossom on Itachi’s lips.

His body is slightly sore, like it would be after a long session of training but it's from a different kind of physical spar and the thought makes his cheeks burn.

It had felt very good. From start to finish, everything had been a bliss. The sounds and images are burnt in his mind and Itachi knows he'll have pleasant dreams for the next few days.

Itachi opens the bedroom door gently, careful not to make a sound. He enters the living room and heads to the bathroom where he takes a nice long shower. He cleans his hair and body thoroughly, washing away the last remnants of the mission and the moment he had shared with Kakashi.

Once he is done, Itachi dresses up and dries his hair with a towel, ties the still wet locks in a bun and thinks maybe he ought to cut his hair before they become too long.

The thought is pushed aside when he enters the living room once more and hears a sound at his window. The curtains are drawn and he can make out the silhouette of a bird made black from the sun setting behind it.

Itachi approaches the window and opens it, letting the message eagle inside. The bird has a scroll attached to a leg and Itachi quickly opens it and the eagle flies away without waiting for an answer.

Itachi unrolls the piece of parchment swiftly, reading through the single line lightening fast.

‘To the Hokage's office. Now.’

Well that is ominous.

Itachi sighs. He doesn’t exactly feel like going back to work right now, he’d rather go back to bed and cuddle some more. It is an unusual thing for Itachi, he who had always been ready for missions but this time around he has things here in Konoha that he wants to enjoy.

But this is his life, the one he had chosen. He is a shinobi before being a man, and with a last look to the bedroom door behind which Kakashi still sleeps peacefully, Itachi leaves through the window.

He doesn’t bother with packing anything, for all he knows it isn’t summoned for a mission.

He kind of hopes it isn’t the case.

A few Shunsin later, Itachi stands in front of the Hokage's office door. He can’t hear anything from behind the closed door but feels the regular pulsing of Jiraiya’s Chakra. It hasn’t become familiar yet, he is still too used to feeling Hiruzen’s.

Itachi knocks and when Jiraiya allows him inside, he enters the room and closes the door behind him. He approaches the desk behind which the Hokage sits and he notices immediately that the man looks strangely grim.

"I had my very best follow you inside Orochimaru's lair, and the report was very interesting" is all he says, as if that explained everything.

Itachi’s heart skips a beat.

Why would he have someone follow them? Did Jiraiya not trust him? Itachi had earned his place up the ranks and has been fighting to save the world for a whole year. Everything he had kept silent was for everyone's safety. And still, Jiraiya had him followed.

It hurts a bit. But Itachi could understand. He had hidden too much, and in the end, maybe it is himself who doesn’t trust others enough.

"Why would you use that seal?" Jiraiya asks and Itachi can see the disapproval clear as day on his face.

Maybe it is time he comes clean. If there is someone he should trust, it is the Hokage. Jiraiya is a fair man. Surely, he’d understand.

"In my own time, thousands of shinobi have died in a 4th war. And it could all have been stopped by killing one single man – Zetsu."

Itachi won't hide anything. And if Jiraiya decides to kick him out, or worse, Itachi shall bear that punishment. He has a distant thought for the other people who know about his secret, about his identity and why he used that seal. When Shisui had put the pieces together and figured everything out, he hadn’t been scared or angry. He had accepted everything.

Kakashi had learned some of the truth from Orochimaru, and he had accepted Itachi anyway.

But Hiruzen… Itachi had told only the former Hokage what he had thought was needed. And now the man is dead.

If the world hasn’t collapsed from some people knowing, then it wouldn’t if one more is aware of the truth.

So Itachi tells Jiraiya.

The older man has a lot of questions, and Itachi takes his time answering them all.

From to the use of the seal itself, to the 4th war and even what he knows about Zetsu and Kaguya.

In this time, Black Zetsu has not yet made himself visible, sticking to the shadows and manipulating Obito like he would a puppet. So, Itachi explains his quest, how he had turned time with one single goal: stopping the Inifinite Tsukuyomi.

For that, he had tried to disband the Akatsuki, kill Nagato and save Obito.

Jiraiya doesn’t interupt him, and as Itachi keeps on talking, he watches intensely the Hokage’s face, looking for the slightest indication of what the man thinks. But Jiraiya’s face is blank, only humming here and there, showing that he is still listening.

It's a very long story, and by the end of it, the sun has set and Itachi's throat feels parched from talking so much.

Jiraiya doesn’t say anything, at first, and then he sighs deeply.

"Let me see that seal, what does it say again?" The Hokage asks and Itachi takes his shirt off and turns around, revealing the complicated swirls of hundreds of lines, some bolder than others, the whole looking like a clock of some sort.

Itachi had spent hours looking at it, drawing it, he knows exactly how every line bends and moves on his skin. Once his Sharingan is activated, the lines become words that jumble together to deliver a strange riddle.

"The vow you shall fulfil for time to be set in motion. For that duration you shall not disappear," Itachi says, and Jiraiya nods grimly.

"I think your quest is not yet over," Jiraiya says and his voice is a lot more serious than his usual drawl.

Itachi thinks so too. As long as Black Zetsu is alive, he could always wait in the shadows for another child to manipulate. With Madara's corpse intact, the man could always be brought back to life and their plan could be launched all the same.

Jiraiya seems to think so too.

"You are hereby appointed a new mission: finish your quest, Uchiha Itachi."

Hearing his name said with such reverence feels foreign to Itachi. He has come clean and is not pushed away. It feels freeing for some reason. Like a weight had been lifted off his shoulders.

"Yes, sir," Itachi answers but before he can say anything else, Jiraiya speaks up again.

"You can decide whether you go alone or not."

And Itachi clearly hears what Jiraiya means but doesn't say. He can ask Kakashi to come along, even Shisui. Itachi knows they would agree in a heartbeat. Even Deidara would want to come.

But the thought doesn’t sit right with Itachi. He had been alone when he had done the seal, and he shall bear the full weight of the curse on his own. But what could he tell them? Itachi has no clue. He could just leave right now.

No. He couldn't. He had made that mistake once when he had left Sasuke behind. He can't run away from the people he loves again.

"I'm going alone, but I'd like to take a moment before I leave," is what he finally says and Jiraiya nods.

Itachi bows swiftly and leaves the Hokage's office, head kept low and heart heavy from the decision he just had to make. He walks down the stairs with his eyes stuck to the ground. He leaves the Hokage’s building with his head a mess of complicated emotions.

He had used the seal for one single reason, saving the world and he couldn’t be selfish about such serious matters. Whether he wants to or not doesn’t even matter. He needs to finish what he has started.

It is plagued by these thoughts that he wanders aimlessly through Konoha. He can’t think of what to say to them, and he hopes the chill of the night might help him come up with the right words.

He is going to make Deidara cry again, isn’t he?

Itachi sighs and finally looks up from the ground to study his surroundings and sucks in a sharp breath when he realises where his legs have brought him. He is standing in front of the main entrance to the Uchiha compound.

It’s laughable, really, that in a time like this, the first place he goes to is the one that started it all. He became a missing-nin the last time he entered these walls, he killed his parents and orphaned his baby brother that night.

Itachi suddenly realises that he has never even gone to see Sasuke. He has very carefully avoided thinking about that particular topic ever since he had met Shisui again in this timeline.

Shisui had easily recognised him, and being able to talk to him again, to see his smile and hear his laugh… It has been a blessing. More than Itachi had ever believed would be possible when using the seal.

But seeing Sasuke?

Itachi himself doesn’t even know how he could react. There isn’t a single person in this whole world that he loves more than his brother. His whole life had been about protecting him, and he had made the wrong choices to ensure that.

It isn’t something Itachi likes to think about, but the truth is that he failed that mission. He failed Sasuke. He doesn’t have the right to see him.

Maybe Sasuke is better off not having this twisted version of his big brother in his life. With Danzo gone, this younger Itachi wouldn’t kill the Uchiha clan, and Sasuke would grow up in a loving family, in a time of peace.

Itachi has undone the wrong he caused. He should leave it at that.

Just as he is about to turn around and leave, he feels a wave a Chakra that is like a slap to the face.

He whirls around and his eyes immediately land on a child. The second he had felt that horribly familiar Chakra, he knew who he would see, but it’s still wrong. The kid has black hair, tied in a loose pony tail, and Itachi doesn’t remember looking so small and scrawny but that tiny Uchiha is most definitely himself.

Young Uchiha Itachi, probably around ten years old, is walking out of the compound’s pharmacy with a bag that Itachi knows is medication.

Without Sasori to give him the right treatment, this version of himself would probably die before he hit twenty years old. He doesn’t really know how he feels about that.

He watches as the child walks deeper into the streets and it is without even thinking that he starts to follow himself.

It’s definitely weird, to be looking upon his own image, but much younger. Itachi doesn’t risk getting too close, though, because he knows that by age 10, he had already mastered the Sharingan and passed the Chuunin exam. He wouldn’t make the stupid mistake of underestimating himself.

Finally, the child takes a final turn into the street Itachi had been dreading to reach. He hides in the shadow of a tree and watches as the child enters his home, where his mother probably awaits, along with his younger brother.

This is not Itachi’s family any more, it can never be in this timeline, but he can’t help but feel sadness engulf his heart.

He is about to finally leave, having seen more than enough, when the door suddenly bursts open and a much more tiny child leaves the house, a bubbling laugh leaving his lips as he runs as fast as his tiny legs can move.

Itachi’s heart swells.

“Sasuke! Get back here!” A high voice pleads and Itachi looks away from the toddler to the woman at the door.

It’s a bittersweet feeling, one that tears at his heart painfully. His mother looks beautiful, even with the small wrinkles and the bags under her eyes. Itachi finds he can’t away.

For so many years, the image that has haunted him was that of the corpses of his parents, their blank eyes and slack jaws. He had almost forgotten that they hadn’t always looked like this, all the other memories of them drowned out by the macabre night of their murder.

But now Itachi can remember how beautiful she had been, how loving her eyes were, even if they were tired and authoritative at times.

“Who’re you?” A voice asks, and Itachi’s eyes shift from the woman to the tiny child in front of him. He hadn’t even noticed him coming closer to the trees, that’s how bad he had been lost in thoughts.

Sasuke looks small, smaller than Itachi ever remember him being. He must be three years old, at most. Walking and running, talking even, but still too young to understand more complex matters.

He would probably never remember meeting him.

For a second, Itachi can only stare. He studies the toddler in front of him, his dark hair and even darker eyes and all he sees there is curiosity. It tears at his heart to be able to be the subject of such wonder.

“Your big brother loves you, you know that?” Itachi says, because really what else could he say?

Sasuke frowns, looking confused and for a second Itachi wonders if he is even old enough to understand more than 10 words. But then he speaks up in a high chriping voice and Itachi’s heart melts.

“I know, I love him too.”

From the corner of his vision, he can see Mikoto Uchiha leave the door and start walking towards them, and with a sad smile, Itachi teleports out of the compound. The last thing he needs is a mother scared for her child to confront him. Especially his own mother.

He had thought some part of him would break when seeing Sasuke. The hold he has on his sanity has never been especially strong, and he had reckoned that Sasuke would make the pieces of his soul fall apart.

He hadn’t expected to feel whole for the first time in many years.

It’s for Sasuke that he had started his quest. From the murder of his clan, to joining Akatsuki, and finally the time turning seal, all of it had been for Sasuke. So that the person he loved most could be happy.

Itachi has more than one person he loves now. And it’s for all of them that he has to put this to an end.

Itachi starts walking back to his apartment with his heart at peace, but his mind is buzzing with what he now needs to say. When he arrives in his street, he stops to try and think but it’s no use. There isn’t much he can do to ease his mind, really, so he walks up the stairs to his front door, opens it and heads inside. He has barely taken off his shoes when he hears footsteps coming his way.

A second later, there are arms around him and Kakashi presses a kiss against his temple.

“You showered without me,” he says petulantly and Itachi almost smiles at his childish antics.

Kakashi must feel something is off, though, because he stops hugging Itachi and starts staring at him silently.

“Where were you?” He eventually asks.

“Hokage’s office,” Itachi answers and even if he doesn’t explain more than that, Kakashi’s face falls.

“You’re leaving, aren’t you?”

Itachi averts his eyes. He can’t bear to see the sadness in Kakashi’s gaze.

“Yes, I’m leaving.”

°°°

Deidara loves spending time with Shisui and Obito. Shisui is half a decade older than Deidara but they get along extremely well, probably because the older boy is acting like a child most of the time. Obito is a bit ugly, but Deidara doesn’t care at all. He knows that Obito is bothered by his scars, though, because when they take walks like these he always wear a plain white cloth over half of his face. He looks dumb, like Kakashi, but Deidara won’t tell him something so mean, especially since the man is only starting to get used to Konoha’s busy streets.

Obito lives with Shisui now, and Deidara is a kid but he knows something is going on between the two, just like Kuro and Kakashi, even if the four adults try to play things cool around him.

One night, when he had been sleeping over at Shisui’s, he had heard Obito screaming in his sleep, probably having terrible nightmares, seeing things grim enough to break a weaker man. It had been Shisui who had calmed him down.

Obito is everything but weak. Deidara hopes someday people will trust him.

He doesn’t fully understand what happened between Obito and Konoha, but he knows that in the end, they are both the same. Obito and Deidara had left their country because it wasn’t home.

Now Deidara’s home is Kuro, and Obito is trying to find his own here. It’s as simple as that really, and he hates that people look at them with disapproval as if they were strangers still.

That’s why Deidara always wear his Konoha head-band so proudly everywhere he goes. He’ll prove to everyone that they are trustworthy. For his own sake, but also for Obito’s and Kuro’s.

“Thanks for walking with me,” Deidara says as he runs up the flight of stairs that lead to the apartment he shares with Kuro.

Obito gives him a smile that pulls oddly at his scars, but one that Deidara thinks looks sincere and honest. He may have been a broken man, but things can be patched up, even people. It just takes patience, and some help. Deidara glances at Shisui but the teenager is looking solely at Obito with a gentle smile.

“Goodnight!” Deidara says as pushes the front door open, and then he hears one single sentence that makes every single thought rush out the window.

“I’m leaving,” and it’s Kuro’s voice.

He rushes in, doesn’t even hear Obito and Shisui in his tracks and enters the living room without taking off his shoes.

“No you’re not!” Deidara says and Kuro turns around to look at him. Kakashi is there too, but Deidara doesn’t even spare a glance in his direction.

“Deidara...” Kuro starts, but Deidara isn’t going to listen to what he has to say.

Kuro just got back from a mission after all, and he had promised Deidara they would train together and go shopping for new kunai.

“Where are you going this time?” Obito asks and Deidara is surprised to hear the man ask Kuro a question. They aren't exactly on the best of terms, he gathered, but Kuro answers all the same.

“I’m leaving Konoha, I don’t know when or if I’ll be back.”

This breaks Deidara’s heart. He looks between the four older men, and sees the sadness written all over Kakashi’s face. Deidara can relate to him for once.

“I’m coming with you then,” Deidara says but Kuro gently shakes his head.

“I have to do this alone, kiddo,” he answers but Deidara doesn’t like his tone. He hates that Kuro looks so heartbroken and defeated. He who was usually so confident and eager to go on missions. It isn’t like him.

“You really have to go, right?” Shisui asks, and the two men share a look.

Deidara doesn’t really understand what silent understanding goes on between them, but Kuro nods, and Shisui sighs.

“Deidara, we need to let him go.”

Deidara isn’t about to listen to such non-sense. It is obvious that Kuro doesn’t want to go on this mission, even Kakashi doesn’t want him to leave, and neither does Deidara.

Just as Deidara is about to complain, Kuro speaks up once more.

“Look, Deidara, I have made choices. Some were bad, others were worse. Now I have to take responsibility.” Deidara doesn’t understand why that means he can’t offer to help. “It’s my curse,” Kuro adds, as if all this was supposed to make sense to him.

“It’s not a curse,” Shisui says, and they all turn to look at him but he is only looking at Kuro with a heavy stare. “You made a choice, now you have to finish what you started, right?”

Deidara hates that all of them seem to understand and agree. Maybe it’s because he is young, maybe it’s because he is childish, or maybe they’ve all lost their mind.

“I don’t want you to leave alone,” Deidara says and even if it’s meant to come out decisive and strong, it’s more of a plea.

“None of us do,” Shisui says as he kneels down to look at Deidra straight in the eye. “But we’re shinobi, sometimes we do things we’d rather not have to do.”

Deidara ponders over this for a few seconds. Shisui is right, he finally realises. Missions are missions. For him, they are mostly about running after cats and pulling weeds, but soon enough he’ll also have to leave Konoha without knowing if he’ll come back.

Maybe all he can do is wait.

No, this isn’t like him. He won’t accept something so unfair.

Deidara is torn. He almost feels like crying from frustration. He looks at Shisui and sees the same frustration written on his face. Then, he looks at Obito who seems mostly uncomfortable, then Kakashi who is intent on staring at his feet while nibbling on his lips.

Finally, Deidara looks at Kuro. The man who had gotten him out of his torment in Iwa, the one he had followed everywhere and spent almost a whole year with. Kuro looks back at him with warm eyes, he can see the affection there clear as day.

They all had changed so much in so little time.

Maybe Deidara ought to grow up a bit.

“Fine, I’ll let you leave, but you better come back,” Deidara finally says and Kuro gives him a sad smile.

“Deidara I don’t know if-”

“I don’t care,” Deidara cuts in, “you have to come back. For us.”

Kuro seems a bit taken aback, he looks around the room, eyes stopping a second longer on Kakashi, before they come back to Deidara and he smiles again but this time it’s not as defeated.

“Alright, wait for me then,” Kuro says and even if none of them says it aloud, they all think the same.

They shall.

And then Kuro leaves the next day. The goodbyes are tough and if anyone asks, Deidara definitely didn’t cry. He decides he might as well stay with Shisui and Obito while Kuro is away and he secretly hopes it won’t last too long.

It lasts even less than what he had expected.

Kuro has been gone for half a day and Deidara ends up changing his mind because of Kakashi. He had meant to grab a few things he had forgotten to pack at the apartment only to find Kakashi already there, surrounded by summon dogs rummaging through Kuro’s clothes.

“What in the world are you doing,” Deidara says, and Kakashi really looks like a deer caught in headlights.

“Ugh...” he starts but honestly Deidara doesn’t need any explanation. The situation speaks for itself. Kakashi is going after Kuro.

The two stare at each other in silence. It’s really not a comfortable one.

“I’m just looking for something,” Kakashi tries but Deidara cocks a brow, entirely unconvinced.

“You’re looking for something with Kuro’s scent so your dogs can follow his tracks.”

Silence once more.

“Fine, yes you’re right, I’m not going to sit here waiting for him to maybe come back one day.”

Kakashi looks like a guilty child found with a hand in the cookie jar and Deidara would make fun of him if the situation wasn’t so dire. For a moment, he ponders on what to do. He could try to stop Kakashi, or go get Shisui, but he knows Shisui would tell the Hokage and then they’d all be in trouble.

“I’m coming with you then,” is what he finally chooses to say.

Deidara has come to terms with the fact that Kuro had to go on this mission and leave Konoha, not with the part where they were all left behind.

Kakashi looks surprised by the turn of the events.

“You’re not going to try to stop me?” He asks and Deidara shakes his head.

“Nah, I’m coming with you.”

°°°

Itachi has little clue of where he is going. All he has are coordinates he had found in Orochimaru’s lair but for all he knows it’s the location of some scrolls. Or just another lair. At any rate, it’s all he has so he heads for Konoha’s woods.

The location Orochimaru had marked isn’t all that far away from Konoha itself, or the lair in the first place. Itachi isn’t very hopeful. After that, what? What if he finds nothing?

Maybe he could check out Akatsuki’s hideout in Ame, or even the operation centre in Kumo. But these would be too obvious locations for Black Zetsu to hide there.

The longer he runs, the more hopeless he grows.

It takes him half a day to reach what seems to be the very heart of Konoha’s largest forest. He is surrounded by trees and everywhere he looks he sees greenery. It is a completely ethereal place and were he not on his final mission he’d probably take some more time to appreciate his surroundings.

The midday sun is strong but filters only lightly through the leaves of the tall hardwood trees. The shadows shake from the light wind. It’s a beautiful day. Yet none of it reaches Itachi.

He has arrived to the marked location but he can’t see anything of interest. There is, just as he had feared, nothing at all. All around him are trees, they all look the same, and he can’t feel a single pulse of Chakra. And that’s when the oddity of this place strikes him.

No pulse of chakra? He suddenly notices how quiet it is around him.

Itachi activates his Sharingan and surveys the trees one after the other. Not a single bird, not even an insect is to be found. Well, that is out of the ordinary for sure, and Itachi’s hopes go up.

He drops down from the tree he was hiding in and walks around. There is simply nothing here as if it was inside a seal bubble that stopped everything from entering. But Itachi had noticed no seal, he hadn’t felt anything unusual, simply the lack of it.

Something is off, he simply can't tell what.

Then, his eyes catch on the trunk of a tree. It’s exactly like any other, only that it has a slight nick in its bark. Itachi glances at the other trunks only to find them absolutely perfect. Healthy and strong, only this single tree has this tiny difference.

He walks closer to it, heart beating faster as he approaches the trunk until he is close enough to reach out a hand and touch the small notch. The bark withers away at the slightest touch as if it was sand and Itachi brushes it all away until the cut transforms into words carved into the bark.

‘Here lies Madara Uchiha’

Itachi’s eyes widen. The information barely makes it to his brain that he feels a foreign rush of Chakra that sends all of his senses into alert. A second later the silent and peaceful woods grow dark and heavy as if Itachi was an intruder.

He moves away from the tree just in time. A branch suddenly grows and moves in his direction as if the tree itself was about to attack and sure enough, the leaves have become sharp like knives and some manage to cut Itachi’s left arm.

The pain doesn’t even register though. There is one single thought on his mind: he has found Madara’s corpse and he needs to destroy it. Is it the tree? Is it inside? Underneath? Itachi’s brain is already rushing through all the possibilities and how to proceed.

Immediately he calls forth his Susanoo, opting for a clean cut in the tree with his giant warrior’s sword. The tree falls to the side, revealing an empty trunk that hid away the corpse of Madara Uchiha himself.

Itachi recognizes him easily, the corpse is extremely well preserved, Madara looks young and healthy, as if he was simply asleep. There is an odd green liquid covering the body though, and the slimy substance immediately reminds him of Orochimaru’s way of regenerating his body.

Itachi doesn’t get much time to observe the corpse though, because all the trees around him start attacking, branches like thousands of arms reaching for him, leaves like spears ripping apart his clothes as he narrowly avoids them.

The body lies on the ground, so close to Itachi but protected by the woods.

His Susanoo battles fiercely, slicing through the vines and the trees attacking him. His giant sword swirls and turns until almost all the trees around Itachi have been cut off, creating a man-made clearing in which the sun can now shine.

With the trees now gone, Itachi can see that he was really lost in the middle of the gigantic Konoha forest, everywhere he looks there are only trees, no sign of any life form around. Well, it means he can go all out.

The danger of the trees now dealt with, Itachi calls off his Susanoo and carefully approaches Madara’s corpse. He really looks as if he was simply sleeping but that sight doesn’t make him hesitate one bit. His mind his calm, but he can feel his heart beating hard in his chest.

Itachi gathers his Chakra and his blood red pupils start to swirl and change shape until his Mangekyo Sharingan manifests. As he is about to call forth Amaterasu and burn away the last step of his quest, a sudden rush of Chakra brings his attention away from the corpse and back to the forest.

He knows this Chakra, he knows this presence.

“Kuro! In the ground!”

Itachi jumps away from Madara just in time to avoid a giant plant mouth appearing out of the ground.

Itachi turns around in direction of the voice that had warned him to find Kakashi and Deidara standing there, both roughened up, clothes full of dirt and a bit of blood here and there.

“What are you doing here?”

°°°

Kakashi has been travelling with Deidara for a day and he is really getting short on patience. The kid doesn’t seem to fully understand that they had left Konoha in secret and could almost be considered deserters. This brat is way too cheerful.

“What does the tomato say to the ketchup?”

Kakashi sighs. “I don’t care. Shup up.”

He had been extremely surprised to hear that Deidara would come with him instead of ratting him out. He is almost regretting that now.

They are now inside Konoha’s grand forest which is well known for being a place of mysteries and strange stories. Kakashi has no idea why Kuro would go there first but he is confident in his dog’s tracking abilities. They are probably only a few hours behind Kuro, they would soon catch up to him.

And when that happens, Kakashi needs to come up with a great explanation as to why he and Deidara have decided to follow him. Kuro will be furious.

“You’re so boring,” Deidara says and Kakashi doesn’t even grant him an answer. He sighs again.

He is observing the way the wind rustles the leaves when he feels a sudden sense of unease. He isn’t a Sensor, but he has a very good instinct and he knows something is up.

“Even Kuro has a better sense of humour you know, Kuro!” Deidara says but Kakashi doesn’t even listen. Something is definitely off. “Kuro laughed at the tomato joke,” Deidara keeps going and this time Kakashi turns around to glare at him.

“Oh my lord just shut up for a sec-”

But Kakashi doesn’t get to finish his sentence because a giant green mouth suddenly sprouts from the ground between he and Deidara.

Zetsu.

Well, only the Black half considering the White one is lost to Obito’s Mangekyo Sharingan.

Kakashi fishes out a kunai and gathers Chakra to unlock his own Sharingan. He has gathered his thoughtz and got his surprise under control in the blink of an eye and he doesn’t waste another second before he rushes in. Zetsu smiles unnervingly at him and easily avoids the blow Kakashi tries to land. The black monster jumps back and dashes closer to Deidara.

The half formed teeth around his head try to bite at Deidara and it’s about to close in on his arm when the kid ducks down and lashes at Zetsu’s legs with his kunai. Kakashi has Kuro to thank for training the kid so well.

Deidara moves away from a screaming Zetsu and back to Kakashi’s sides. They both get into fighting stance, ready to face their enemy. Zetsu turns to glare at them both, about to launch an attack of his own but a sudden flare of Chakra behind him makes the plant monster turn around.

Above the tree tops stands a violet warrior and Kakashi immediately recognizes Kuro’s Susanoo.

Kakashi has barely enough time to register that it means Kuro is right beyond them that Zetsu merges into two distinct body, one disappearing into the ground and the other running towards them.

Deidara’s hold on his kunai tightens and the kid rushes forth as well, meeting one of Zetsu’s black form head on.

“Go to Kuro, I’ll hold him back!” Deidara shouts as he lands a kick to Zetsu’s hip.

Kakashi hesitates for a second, but when he sees Zetsu’s sharp nails digging into Deidara’s shoulder, he makes his decision. He isn’t leaving anyone behind, not even this annoying brat.

Kakashi’s hands start moving through signs lighting fast and he calls for a Chidori and dashes in to pierce his hand right through the arm holding Deidara down.

The kid now free, he brushes away the still attached hand to his shoulder and doesn’t even blink when his wound starts bleeding. Kakashi will need to tend to that sooner rather than later.

Zetsu grabs with his remaining hand the nub of his now cut off arm, wincing but only showing a light discomfort. What is he exactly, Kakashi wonders The wound isn’t even bleeding.

Zetsu quickly recovers and doesn’t wait another second before launching his next attack. He rushes close to Deidara, visibly focusing the kid’s wounded shoulder with his hand for another lash of his sharp nails.

Kakashi puts himself between the two and meets Zetsu’s claws with his kunai. The two trade blows but Kakashi feels outpaced. The creature’s kicks and punches are unpredictable, not alike any taijutsu Kakashi knows. He is falling behind.

Just as Zetsu is about to land a punch to Kakashi’s face, a wall comes up between the two and Kakashi looks over his shoulder to see Deidara’s hands up in a Mudra. The kid had just saved him with a Ground Jutsu.

With Zetsu distracted, hand stuck in the wall, Kakashi rushes through the signs and calls forth a Chidori that he this time aims right to the heart. The feeling of ripping apart skin and crushing bones isn’t foreign to Kakashi with this technique but he is surprised by the texture he meets when his hand pierces through Zetsu’s chest.

There’s not much resistance and he doesn’t feel like he hits any bones, but the blow seems quite effective as Zetsu screams in agony.

Kakashi wrenches his arm out and Zetsu falls to his knees. Kakashi looks down at him and he is about to deliver a killing blow when the monster’s body starts to disappear in the ground.

‘Not again!’ Kakashi thinks but before he can do anything, Zetsu has disappeared once more.

Kakashi tries a vain Chidori to the ground but Zetsu is long gone. He almost swears aloud but instead quickly collects himself with a deep breath. He turns to Deidara. The kid’s shoulder is bleeding still, but not at an alarming rate. Kakashi fishes out some bandages from his pouch and approaches the kid who looks back with an unimpressed stare.

“You let him go, again,” Deidara says as Kakashi bandages his shoulder and if he squeezes the cloth so tight Deidara winces, it is only an accident.

“He probably went to find his other half where Kuro is, let’s get going,” Kakashi shoots back.

Deidara’s wounds aren’t too deep, they can keep going. And so, they pick up running in the direction in which they had seen the Susanoo rampage. It isn’t all that far way, and they instantly know, even with the Susanoo now gone, where to find Kuro.

Amongst all the greenery now appears a single clearing where all the trees have been cut. In the middle of it all stands Kuro, in his dark Konoha Uniform, headband shining bright under the sun, his eyes red blood and a Sharingan shape that Kakashi recognizes as his Mangekyo.

At his feet, Kakashi suddenly notices another person, sleeping peacefully.

Then, a flare of Chakra is coming from the ground and before Kakashi can react, he hears Deidara scream.

“Kuro! In the ground!”

Kuro moves away from the body and narrowly avoids Zetsu’s attack. He jumps back and turns to them, eyes wide.

“What are you doing here?”

Kakashi gulps down. He hadn’t exactly thought this would go down that way.

“We missed you, obviously,” Deidara replies matter-of-fact and Kuro gives the kid a look that is entirely unimpressed.

Were they not in the middle of a fight, Kakashi knows Kuro would give them an earful. Thankfully, the man gives them one last stare before he turns back to their enemy, the two black forms merging back into one once more.

“Who’s that over there sleeping?” Deidara asks, a question Kakashi himself had been wondering about.

Kuro glances at them, clearly hesitating before he finally answers.

“Madara Uchiha.”

That single name chills Kakashi’s bones. It seems to shut Deidara up as well. They both get into fighting stance, ready for a fight that has a tremendous importance.

Kakashi breathes in, looks at Kuro, sees the determination in his eyes, and breathes out. He doesn’t really have the full story of where Kuro is from, or how exactly he has gotten here, but over the past year he has gotten to know a man who he knows he can trust.

Kuro is driven, loyal, and caring in his own ways. He is someone Kakashi admires and adores, because the more he gets to learn about him, the more there seems to be things to discover.

After this final fight, they will have all the time in the world.

Kakashi breathes in deeply once again, and when he breathes out, his mind is blank, and his heart at peace. He enters the mindset that has gotten him praised so much over the years and gets ready for the battle to come.

Kuro makes the first move.

He unsheathes his tanto and even if Kakashi has seen him fight before, he can see and even feel that this is different.

Kuro is serious, more than he has ever been. It shows in the unwavering hold he has on the hilt of his sword, in the determined set of his jaw and the light that shines in his eyes. This is the pinnacle of everything Kuro has fought for.

It’s all culminating in this one battle with two goals: destroying Madara’s corpse, and killing Black Zetsu.

Kuro’s tanto slides through the air as Zetsu side steps the attack and retaliates with a blow of his own, claws aiming for Kuro’s eyes, his most powerful weapon. But the man knows that Zetsu would target the Sharingan and it’s with ease that he deflects their enemy’s hand with his elbow.

Kakashi knows he isn’t as strong as Kuro, and even if he hates to admit it, in such a fight he would probably be a hindrance so he does the only thing he can think of – he rushes to Madara’s body. Deidara has apparently made the same conclusion and it’s at the same time that they reach the man laying on the ground.

Kakashi doesn’t waste time before gathering his Chakra and activating his Sharingan, the sound of a thousand birds drown out everything else to his ears just as Deidara’ own hands rush through Mudras.

He sees, for just half a second, the peaceful face of the man he is about to attack, the face of Madara Uchiha, a name that carries fear and horror. Then he strikes.

At the same time, Deidara’s Explosive Jutsu activates, the sound of both attacks so loud that Kakashi loses his hearing for a few seconds. The smoke from the blast clears quickly, and Kakashi’s heart stops.

Madara Uchiha lays still, completely unharmed.

Kakashi looks at Deidara, both sharing an equal bewildered look, but before they can react Zetsu appears between them and in a swift movement kicks Kakashi right in the chin, sending him sprawling on his back.

By the time Kakashi is back to his feet, Zetsu has managed to get a hold of Deidara, the kid held firmly in place by their enemy’s heavier body, hands behind his back and face on the ground.

Deidara struggles and thrashes around, trying to push Zetsu away but vines suddenly grow out of their enemy’s arms and wraps around the kid who progressively stops moving. Kakashi watches in horror through his Sharingan as Deidara’s Chakra becomes weaker and weaker, siphoned by the vines and rendering their master stronger by the second.

He doesn’t waste more time and dashes in, seeing from the corner of his eye Kuro do the same. They reach their enemy together and as Kakashi calls for another Chidori, he feels Kuro’s Chakra come out in waves the way it does when he gathers enough to activate his Mangekyo Sharingan.

Zetsu doesn’t have enough time to move, vines still attached to Deidara, and he is fully hit with the lightening of Chidori, and the fire of Amaterasu. He shrieks out in pain before falling to the ground.

Kuro immediately crouches next to Deidara and checks the kid’s pulse frantically before he relaxes and sighs.

“He’s alive, but very weak,” Kuro says and Kakashi nods.

He looks away from his friends to Zetsu, whose fried body emits a disgusting stench, and finally to Madara. If both his and Deidara’s attacks were useless, then only one thing can destroy him.

Kakashi looks at Kuro to find the man staring at Madara’s body as well. His face looks closed off, no emotions are to be found there, but Kakashi knows better. He can’t even begin to imagine how Kuro must feel.

He watches silently as the man stands up and walks over to the still body of his nemesis.

Kakashi can feel Kuro’s Chakra gather, and he swears that he has never felt so much at once before. Time seems to come to a standstill. For a second, Kakashi doesn’t hear anything. The forest is completely silent, even the wind has stopped.

Then, a roaring black fire blossoms and Kakashi can’t hear anything else. Amaterasu’s vicious flames lick at the body quickly and within seconds, Madara Uchiha is no more.

“How dare you!” A mad voice screams and Kakashi whips around to see Black Zetsu back on his feet, barely standing, but radiating a fury that makes him look more threatening than anything Kakashi has faced before.

Zetsu extends a fried arm out to Kuro, and sharp thorned vines shoot out of his hand. Kakashi is running through Mudras before he can think and he gathers all of the Chakra he has left to launch the strongest Great Fireball he has ever managed.

The attack crashes with Black Zetsu, their enemy thrown away from the impact and catching fire immediately, screaming and thrashing in agony as life slowly leaves his body. But Kakashi doesn’t even stop to look at Zetsu.

He is already running to Kuro, realising with growing horror that Zetsu’s attack has reached its target, leaving Kuro laying on the ground in a pool of blood, thorns digging in his body.

Before Kakashi can reach Kuro, though, a bright light blinds him and when he can finally distinguish colours again, he is left to stare at an empty spot on the ground, where Kuro had been seconds ago.

The vines are there, the pool of blood is there, but Kuro isn’t.

°°°

The last thing Itachi remembers is Zetsu’s attack hitting him, so when he wakes up unharmed, in an endless horizon of orange, he thinks he’s dead.

“I’m dead,” he says flatly, surprised to hear his own voice echo so loud in the empty space. He looks around but he can’t even tell where the sky begins and ends, if there even is a sky. All he can feel is a pleasant warmth.

“Not yet,” a voice says and Itachi whirls around to stare at the last person he had ever expected to see.

Hashirama Senju stands in front of him, wearing the traditional Hokage robes, a friendly smile on his face. Suddenly, Itachi has so many questions that he doesn’t even know which one to ask first.

“You must have a lot of questions,” the man says knowingly, and to Itachi’s surprise, he sits down on what seems to be the ground, as orange as the sky. He pats the space beside him, and even if Itachi is very much confused, he sits down next to Hashirama without a word.

He knows what the first Hokage looks like, every single person who has been in Konoha knows, thanks to the obnoxious stone heads. But he hadn’t really thought about what he was like. How it would be to talk to him.

Itachi is entirely unimpressed. The man has long dark hair, black eyes, he is not very tall or bulky, and the only indication of his rank are the robes and hat he wears.

“Not what you expected?” The man asks with a sheepish smile, and Itachi notices that his voice is very soft. Lower pitched than he expected, but also softer.

“No, I must admit,” he answers, choosing to be honest.

“I am aware. My wife always told me I was too meek,” the First Hokage says with a hint of worry. From what little Itachi had heard, Mito Uzumaki had indeed been a force to be reckoned with, enough that even her husband feared her apparently.

“She helped me with the seal, you know,” he adds.

And no, Itachi most definitely doesn’t know.

“You’re the one who created this seal?” He asks breathlessly.

“Well, why do you think I’m here?” Hashirama counters.

Itachi falls silent. Seals had never been his speciality. The Uzumaki were the true Sealmasters, and being the very first ally of Konoha, tradition carried down to this day and every shinobi in the Fire Country had at least a vague knowledge of how they worked.

Itachi is no exception. He knows Seals work with Chakra, but also intent and these two elements work together to bind something. How hard could it be to bind a bit of your soul in a seal?

“Why?” Itachi asks, but when Hashirama doesn’t answer but cocks a brow instead, he elaborates. “Why did you create this seal?”

Hashirama sighs. He brings a hand to his face and rubs over his eyes. He suddenly seems much older than he looks.

“I don’t know how much of my story has carried down to your generation…” he starts but Itachi doesn’t have time for long-winded explanation.

“You built Konoha with Madara Uchiha, there were wars, you killed him, then you died on the battlefield. That’s about it,” he sums up and Hashirama looks at him with a playful glint in his eyes.

“I see death hasn’t made you less blunt,” he says and Itachi’s eyes widen.

“I thought I wasn’t dead yet- Scratch that, why do you say that as if you know me?”

Hashirama chuckles. “If you’d let me explain…” he trails off but Itachi remains silent this time, looking at the man expectedly. The First Hokage shakes his head with a small smile before he finally speaks up again.

“Well… I have been watching over you, ever since you activated our seal. Miko thought it wouldn’t be wise to attach my soul to the user, but we thought it would be better that way. He and I were… desperate, I imagine.”

The man stops talking for a second, as if lost in thought and when he doesn’t pick up his explanation, Itachi probes, “He…?”

Hashirama looks at him with an odd look.

“How ironical that you, of all people would find this seal and use it without knowing who created it. Madara and I came up with the idea, Miko helped us with some details of it.”

Itachi’s heart stops at the name, but the way Hashirama says it, it almost sounds reverent.

“We weren’t enemies, at first. Even at the end, actually, he wasn’t my enemy. I killed a friend that day.” Hashirama sounds defeated, but Itachi’s heart is beating faster with each second passing by without the whole story.

“Why did you create that seal?” He asks again, and almost sighs with relief when Hashirama finally answers all of his questions.

“We met at a time of war, he and I. He lost his brothers to the Senju, and I lost one of mine to the Uchiha. We swore to each other that these deaths had to be stopped, and so we created Konoha,” the First Hokage recalls, a faraway look in his eyes.

“But the wars wouldn’t stop, and people were still dying. All these lives were lost forever, and we couldn’t ever get them back. It was almost a joke at first, when I mentioned I wished I could go back in time and change everything. But Madara didn’t hear a joke, he thought it was genius,” Hashirama’s voice sounds much more bitter now, almost regretful and Itachi can only guess why.

“So we toyed with the idea for a while, and asked for Miko’s opinion. She said it could technically be possible with a seal, but the amount of effort it would take to activate, and even plan out was too much hassle. I thought that was the end of it but Madara kept researching seals until he finally came up with something,” the man pauses to take a breath and Itachi stares at him, hanging to his every words like a lifeline.

“The full moon, the Sharingan, and Senju cells were the answer. The full moon holds a mystical power that strengthens any seal, and it can even be used to reflect the effects on the whole world. The Sharingan’s main strength is Genjutsu, which can, if used well, erase a person’s memory, and the Senju cells have rejuvenating properties. By combining all these things, you can create a Jutsu that can turn time.”

Itachi can only gape, mouth hanging open as it all registers. He had been infused with Senju chakra from the Edo Tensei, a jutsu Tobirama Senju had created, and as a Uchiha he possessed the Sharingan required to activate the seal. It couldn’t have been anyone else, he is the only one left in this world who could have activated the seal by himself.

When he looks back at Hashirama, he meets obsidian eyes that seem so mournful it almost hurts to return his stare.

“We managed to create the seal, but Madara and I… we fell apart and in the end, the seal got lost among many others without being ever used,” the First Hokage says and Itachi realises for the first time, when it slightly wavers, that the warm orange glow he has felt since he woke up is none other than Hashirama’s Chakra itself.

He had never thought that Chakra could feel so welcoming, so comforting even. Maybe it wasn’t his raw strength that had made Hashirama such a powerful shinobi. It is probably his heart his biggest asset, Itachi reckons, and if the man he had been before using the seal never would have thought that emotions could mean strength, he now thought differently.

“What happens now?” Itachi finally asks when the silence itself becomes deafening.

“It depends on what you want,” Hashirama answers easily, as if it was the most obvious thing. Their eyes meet and when the older man realises that Itachi is staring at him in confusion, he speaks up again.

“You made the vow to save the world, now that it is done, you’ve got nothing else to do in that time. That’s why you’re here.”

“So what, do I just die now?” Itachi asks and he knows it comes out harsher than he had meant, but he is growing more and more frustrated by the second, still Hashirama simply smiles at him.

“Oh I mean you can if you want, or I can use what this piece of soul has of Chakra and try to drop you back off into the world,” he says with a playful smile but Itachi doesn’t even feel annoyed by the childish antics of a man twice his age, he only feels hopeful.

It’s odd to think that now that he finally has the opportunity to rest, to be at peace and never fight again, he doesn’t even consider it.

Itachi thinks of Konoha, its trees and distinctive smell, the villagers, but also the friends he has made there. He thinks of the people he loves and he doesn’t hesitate, doesn’t fear nor worry when he answers.

“I want to go back there,” he says.

Hashirama’s smile is warm, eyes soft when he looks at Itachi. Suddenly, the orange glow that was lighting their universe gathers around them, much brighter and stronger but not overwhelming.

It somehow feels like a hug, Itachi distantly realises but he doesn’t give it much thought, too engrossed in the sheer strength of the Chakra around him.

And to think this is only a fragment of the power Hashirama had held before he became no more than an old piece of soul attached in a seal. He must have been much stronger, in his prime, but the thought doesn’t chill him to the bone the way it does when Itachi thinks of Madara.

This power is pure, it is driven, loyal and fair.

Itachi doesn’t think he’ll ever be able to forget such a feeling.

That’s the last thought he has before everything blacks out.

Chapter Text

The first few hours after Kuro’s disappearance, Kakashi is in denial.

Once Madara’s corpse was gone and Zetsu dead for good, Kakashi had rushed to Deidara to make sure he was still breathing, and after sending word for backup, he had scanned the area, searched with all of his senses for any trace at all of Kuro. But he had come up empty.

When the medics had arrived and stabilized Deidara, Kakashi had still been looking around frantically, unable to accept what was the obvious truth. He doesn’t know much about seals, and even less about time-turning ones, but he had expected some sort of butterfly effect to happen at some point.

He hadn’t thought, or rather refused to think, that it could mean Kuro would disappear.

When he is back in Konoha, Kakashi feels oddly detached, and when he makes his report to Jiraiya, his voice doesn’t waver, his eyes don’t water and his mind is calm. But there’s a hole where his heart should be and it grows bigger still when he enters Deidara’s hospital room where the kid lays unmoving in the pristine bed. He would survive, they had said, but could lose his Chakra forever.

What is Kakashi supposed tell Deidara when he wakes up? What words could he say that wouldn’t upset the kid too much? There is a chance he couldn’t be a shinobi anymore, and Kakashi has no idea where Kuro is. That seems like a lot to take in for a child his age in one setting.

Shisui joins him at the hospital soon enough, along with Obito, but Kakashi doesn’t feel happy at all to see them. He doesn’t feel much, at first. But then he voices the events to Shisui and they suddenly seem more real. Especially with the way Shisui reacts.

Kakashi watches in horror as Shisui breaks down in front of him, crying much louder than Kakashi had thought the teenager capable of. Shisui is a shinobi, and even if he is younger than Kakashi by a few years, he had always seemed much more emotionally mature than him. He hadn’t thought he’d ever see him break down completely. Obito has a hand on the teenager’s shoulder, rubbing soothing motions, but Shisui’s sobs only get louder.

Kakashi feels like he can’t breathe. The hospital room seems much smaller suddenly, as if the walls were trying to swallow him and the hanging smell of death and medication are chocking him.

He leaves.

When Kakashi enters Kuro’s flat, he immediately smells the man’s presence there, on the clothes hanging off the chair, and coming from the bathroom where Kakashi had taken a shower not so long ago. It feels like years.

He enters Kuro’s bedroom and sits down on the bed. The man’s scent is stronger here.

Kakashi stays there for a while, mind completely blank, wondering when the hole in his heart is going to stop growing.

It stops when Deidara wakes up and Kakashi goes to see him. The kid hasn’t entirely lost his Chakra, the doctors said, but it would take him years before he’d be able to recover completely.

When Kakashi enters the hospital room and their eyes meet, Deidara’s blue ones fill with tears and with how red and wet his face is, he probably hasn’t really stopped crying ever since he woke up.

“They said he’s gone,” Deidara says, but it’s almost tentative, as if he was waiting for confirmation.

It’s then that Kakashi’s denial stops.

“He’s gone,” he whispers, voice cracking as if suddenly realizing it for the first time.

Deidara chokes on a sob, his lithe frame trembling so much that Kakashi thinks he might fall off the bed. He takes a step closer to the kid and he hesitates before raising his hand. Kakashi doesn’t know how to deal with this, he isn’t good with his own emotions, even worse with others’. But as he looks at the shivering child in front of him, a kid who just lost everything, he feels his heart start beating again and all of a sudden, the emotions crash in waves and his knees buckle.

He hugs Deidara as much for the kid as it is for himself. He holds the child close to his chest, feeling his body shaking with his sobs. They stay like that for what seems like a long time to Kakashi, and it’s only when they part that he realises he had been crying too.

Over the next few months, Kakashi doesn’t really stop crying. He has never really been a crybaby, no shinobi really can have the leisure of shedding tears. Still, he cries often.

A lone tear escapes his eyes when he walks around Konoha and sees the Dango Shop he had gone to with Kuro once. He completely breaks down, a few days after that, when arranging his weapons and he sees a kunai that isn’t his. His heart breaks harder still when he realises it’s one of Kuro’s that he must have packed away by mistake on one of their shared missions.

He has another crying fit when they eventually have a ceremony for Kuro, something small and unofficial that Obito came up with to cheer Shisui up. The thought is nice, but Kakashi doesn’t get any joy at all from that event. Not even some closure.

When a whole year has gone by, and Kuro hasn’t come back, Kakashi’s last shred of hope leaves him. He has picked up missions again, and Konoha is as peaceful as ever. The peace between the villages, however, is still tentative, but the fact that the world could have ended is still strong in everyone’s mind and the Kage are willing to consider a treaty. It's all thanks to Kuro.

Kakashi spends most of his time alone, because people make him either mad or sad. He doesn’t enjoy the busy streets of Konoha. It feels almost insulting, that these people could enjoy their lives, wondering about their next meal or which bag to buy. It all seemed so ordinary, so bland, compared to what Kakashi is feeling that it makes him angry.

The people who care about him try to cheer him up, as if he wasn’t even supposed to feel that way. Someone he cared for is gone forever, and yet Gai tells him to move on? How can he move on from someone who is still so present for him? Kakashi sees Kuro when he looks up to the sky, he sees him when he eats dango and he sees him whenever he catches a mop of black hair in Konoha. He even sees him when he looks at Obito, because Kuro is the one who helped him make his peace with his bestfriend’s death, and then reappearance.

Shisui and Deidara are just as sad as he is, though, but that isn’t much comfort either.

Kakashi doesn’t feel like he belongs any more.

It’s three years later, when Kakashi’s wound has barely closed, that it is torn apart when he visits Shisui in the Uchiha compound. He stumbles upon two children, and it’s the older one that gathers all of Kakashi’s attention. It has been long since he last saw Kuro, but the Sharingan doesn’t let him forget a face.

The child couldn’t be older than fifteen, but there is no mistaking that shade of black hair and the shape of those eyes, even if he is much shorter and worryingly skinny, the pallor of his skin whiter even than Kuro’s.

For a second, all of Kakashi’s brain shortcircuits.

Then he is suddenly struck with a realization. He had heard about Itachi Uchiha, the genius that could have become one of their best asset if his illness hadn’t held him back. Kakashi had never seen him before, but in that instant it all makes sense. He remembers how skinny Kuro had been when they had first met, and how Shisui had said, upon meeting him, that the man’s chakra signature felt familiar. He thinks back to how Shisui had broken down when Kuro had disappeared, when his cousin had disappeared.

Kakashi bursts inside Shisui’s house without knocking and he doesn’t even let him protest before he demands answers. Shisui hesitates at first, but Kakashi isn’t going to drop this, so the man complies.

Shisui had known of Kuro’s identity. He had known that Kuro wasn’t from this time, he knew of the seal on his back that could be read with the Sharingan. He had known Kuro was bound to disappear.

When Kakashi storms out of Shisui's house, he doesn’t come back to the Uchiha compound for another year, and when he does it’s under even worse circumstances.

His anger at Shisui had made them fall apart, and even if Kakashi still meets with Obito from time to time, they carefully avoid the topic. But one day, Obito informs him, in a very calm and collected voice, that Itachi Uchiha has succumbed to his illness and Kakashi realises that he has wasted so much time in his own head, bitter and depressed, that he hadn’t even taken the time to think about whether or not he should talk to Itachi.

This kid isn’t the man Kakashi loved, and he would never be, but when he hears about his death, he feels like he is mourning Kuro all over again.

When Kakashi sees Shisui at the funeral inside the compound, he forgets all of his anger. Shisui has grown over the past years, but he suddenly look just as young as he had been when they had lost Kuro.

Kakashi only realises then. They had lost Kuro.

He isn’t alone, he never has been.

When was the last time he spoke to Deidara? He can’t even remember.

Kakashi spends the next few months with a new purpose. He meets with Deidara almost daily, and even if the kid, or rather the teenager, acts all mighty and tough, Kakashi knows he enjoys their time together as well. He has grown a lot, he is more calm and collected than before and Kakashi wonders what Kuro would have thought if he could see this version of Deidara.

Thinking about Kuro doesn’t feel as oppressing as it used to. Kakashi has people he can share his grief with and most of the memories he can recall spent with Kuro are the happy ones. The ones where he smiled.

It takes years for Kakashi to come to peace with his life. But on the tenth anniversary of Kuro’s disappearance, things take yet again a drastic turn. Mostly for the better.

°°°

The first thing Itachi realises is that he is standing in the same exact place as before.

The next thing he notices is that he isn’t exactly in the same place.

Sure enough, he is in Konoha’s forest, in the same clearing, with the same trees he had cut down. But there are only stumps with moss on them, and no barks laying on the grass. Deidara and Kakashi aren’t anywhere to be seen, neither is Black Zetsu and the spot where he had burnt Madara’s body isn’t scorched. Itachi feels a sense of dread creep up on him as he realises that not only time has passed, but a significant amount enough for moss to grow.

How long? And what had happened during that time? He can only hope that Black Zetsu had indeed been killed, and the world saved.

It’s with his mind focused on that one hope that he starts running to where he knows Konoha should be. It takes him hours, and by then the sun has set but when he arrives, even the darkness doesn’t conceal the large stone heads standing proud above a very different looking Konoha. The buildings seem more recent, with many stories made out of glass and metal and Itachi is suddenly worried that he might be centuries in the future but when he studies the stone faces, he can only count five, the last figure being Jiraiya’s.

Itachi’s worry eases up a bit, if only fractionally, but it’s enough for him to calm down and think of a plan.

Itachi suddenly remembers the first time he had had to sneak inside Konoha, right after using the Seal. He finds it funny, somehow, that he would end up in such a similar situation again and his resolve strengthens. He has done this before, he can do it again. He takes a look at himself, notices the blood on his Konoha uniform and decides that this time around, using a Henge might be the wiser choice. He creates the mental image of a woman in her thirties with red hair and dark eyes and gathers his Chakra.

When the cloud of the Jutsu clears, Itachi doesn’t look like himself at all anymore.

Itachi heads for the main entrance with confidence and doesn’t falter at all when he sees three Chuunin guarding the tall doors. He keeps going until he reaches them and even he if can definitely feel their intent stares on him, he doesn’t spare them a glance and passes by without a word. He is about to step in Konoha when one of the Chuunin speaks up.

“Err, lady, you’re supposed to stop by the desk, we need you to sign the entrance records,” he says, and Itachi mentally swears.

It seems that the current Hokage, be it Jiraiya or not, has at least a better sense of self-preservation than some of the former. Itachi hesitates for a second between making a run for it and using a Genjutsu on them.

“Oh, sorry, it’s my first time in Konoha,” Itachi says in a high-pitched voice that almost makes him cringe, but he knows it will look on par with his feminine appearance.

“Why are you here then, it’s quite late for a first time visitor to arrive,” one of the other Chuunin, a girl Itachi doesn’t recognize, says with suspicion.

“It took a bit longer to get here than I expected,” Itachi answers, but the Chuunin are closing on him and they don’t seem to like his answer.

“I asked you why you’re here,” the Chuunin girl inquires again, but before he can think of what to do next, a mop of blond hair slides into view and a young boy comes to stand between Itachi and the Chuunin.

When he turns around, Itachi meets blue eyes, a shade too dark to be the ones he had expected to see. This boy doesn’t look like Deidara at all, he notices, even the hair isn’t the exact same shade, and the marks on his cheeks…

Naruto, Itachi suddenly realises. Naruto who should be a toddler is standing in front of him as a grown teenager.

“There you are, finally! I was worried getting worried!” Naruto says as he comes closer to Itachi and to his utter surprise, pulls him into a hug. When they part, Itachi catches Naruto’s eyes and the glint he sees there is mischievous.

“Oh, uhm, Naruto, you know her?” One of the Chuunin asks.

“Oh yeah, just mark her down as my guest,” he says dismissively with a wave of his hand, and without even looking at the guards, he takes Itachi’s hand in his and drags him away.

“Are you not going to be in trouble for that?” Itachi asks, surprise clear in his voice, once they finally stop to hide in the shadow of one of those tall buildings Itachi had noticed.

“I’m going to be the next Hokage, and they know it,” he says with a shrug, but even if the kid goes for casual, Itachi notices the pride in his voice.

“Who’s Hokage right now?” Itachi asks instead, diving at the opportunity, but Naruto raises an offended eyebrow.

“You’re not going to thank me for saving you?” He teases, tone smug, but not annoyingly so, just a tad self-righteous.

“Fine, you’re right. Thank you for saving me. Why though?” Itachi then asks and Naruto’s face suddenly becomes somber, the smile on his lips a lame attempt at keeping up appearances.

“That’s not a very common hair colour, you know,” the boy says as he points to the currently long mop of red hair Itachi had transformed his own hair into. Itachi's eyes widen when the words register.

“My mom’s hair was like that too, but I’ve only ever seen pictures.”

Itachi smiles at Naruto, He hadn’t met him often in his own time, but he had noticed his unwavering will and loyalty to those he loved. His dream had been to become Hokage, and even in a different world, that remains unchanged. That eases some of his anxiety, somehow.

“I’m sure she’d be proud of you,” Itachi says but Naruto scoffs.

“Everyone says that, but no one can know for sure,” he says bitterly, and Itachi’s smile becomes even more genuine.

“You’re right, no one knows, but still, I think any mother would be proud of the person who’s going to be the next Hokage,” he says and Naruto’s smile looks more honest now.

“Yeah, just need to take down the Hokage first, this idiot Kakashi-” and while Naruto’s voice is back to cheerful, Itachi’s heart feels like lead in his chest.

He can’t quite believe he heard Kakashi and Hokage in the same sentence, but if Naruto has grown so much, then Itachi can only wonder what had happened to the others. The barely soothed nerves are scrapped raw once more, and Itachi forgets to keep his thoughts in check. He vaguely registers his own voice thanking Naruto once more, coming up with a dumb excuse to leave, and if Naruto protests, Itachi doesn’t hear it.

He rushes away from the shadows and into the main street where he blends in with the crowd, many people still roaming Konoha’s streets even this late. Were he not so deep in thoughts, he’d notice the hanging happiness in the city centre, he’d see all the different coloured lights of the many shops, he’d hear the laughs of the children and smells that make Konoha his home.

But his mind is loud and it overpowers everything else. He has somewhere he needs to go, and none of Konoha’s beauty is able to reach him in that state.

When he takes a final turn into the familiar street, he immediately notices that it looks very much different from what he remembers. Where the old building of Kakashi’s flat should be stands a new one, much taller and modern. Itachi remains rooted to the spot for a few minutes. He searches for the familiar spark of Chakra he had expected to find there but only find foreign ones.

Itachi curses aloud, this time, when he realises that of course, the Hokage wouldn’t still live in this shady part of town. He almost goes straight to the Hokage’s office, consequences be damned, but with so many years gone by, the more sensible thing to do is gather information, yet he doesn’t even know where to begin.

Itachi spends some more time walking around aimlessly, thoughts filled with the memories of his friends, wondering what could have happened during the time he was gone. When he lifts his head to check out his surroundings once more, he notices that he knows the street quite well, he recognizes the buildings and he realises that in this part of town, nothing much has changed.

He recognizes easily the apartment he shared with Deidara, and he wonders if the kid still lives there. Once the thought has formed in his mind, Itachi can’t stop thinking about it. He walks up the flight of stairs without even realizing what he is doing and before he can stop himself, he is standing right before his front door. He searches for the familiar spark, but it seems like the apartment is empty.

Where else could he gather information, if not in his own flat? Granted that it could still be called his. Itachi tries for the doorknob, but evidently, the door is locked and he doesn’t feel like breaking it down, probably a terrible idea. So he jumps up on the roof and studies the building, looking for a way in that wouldn’t put him in an awkward situation, were he to be found out.

That’s when he notices one single open window, one that would lead right into his living room. He crawls closer and jumps down on the window sill, studying the inside.

There’s no light inside the flat, but Itachi can make out the shape of furniture all the same. The same table is still there, even the one plant Deidara had insisted on getting hasn’t moved an inch, but grown significantly. He feels his heartbeat pickup, not quite yet believing what this could mean.

Itachi extends a hand towards the window, debating whether he should just jump inside but as he is about to cross the frame, he stops. Something is prickling his skin, and surely enough when he gathers Chakra and his Sharingan activates, he sees threads of Chakra surrounding the window.

That’s a trap if Itachi has ever seen one. But it isn’t the fineness of the trap, or the well planned activation method that makes Itachi’s breathing come out shallow. It’s the Chakra signature. There’s no mistaking that explosive energy and in that instant, Itachi makes his decision. In the blink of an eye, he has deactivated the trap, and he jumps inside.

Nothing implodes when his feet touch the wooden flooring, and nothing does either when he turns on the light.

On the table stays abandoned a single cup, cold tea sitting in the bottom. Thrown across the chair are clothes, shinobi clothes and if the uniforms haven’t changed, then Itachi knows for sure that this is a Jonin equipment. A sad smile forms on his lips, wondering how much the kid has grown, how much he has changed.

“I was wondering who could so easily break down my trap,” a deep voice suddenly says and Itachi whips around.

His eyes land on a person that is at the same time familiar and foreign.

The young man before him has shoulder length blond hair and light blue eyes, and even if the colours are the right shade, Itachi doesn’t want to believe that who he is seeing is Deidara. He is much taller, still shorter than Itachi by a good head, but his body is lithe and muscular. He looks like an adult, like a healthy and well trained shinobi. He looks everything like Itachi would have expected him to look like in a few years, but it's the lurid stare Deidara gives Itachi that makes him feel ill at ease.

“As hot as you are, lady, I’d like to know why you broke into my flat,” the young man says in a voice that is too sultry, with a glint in his eyes that is too sensual and Itachi feels horribly wrong.

He glances down at his chest where long red hair falls in a curtain, shaping the round shape of boobs that are not his before he glances up at Deidara with a weak smile.

“You have changed quite a bit,” Itachi says and when Deidara’s lecherous smile turn into a suspicious frown, Itachi calls off the Henge, a cloud of smoke appearing as his appearance becomes once more what he truly is.

Deidara’s eyes widen, he stands immobile for a few seconds, before his face fills with rage.

“Leave, right now,” he says and his voice is no longer playful, he sounds dangerous. Itachi feels his heart stop in his chest.

“What? No, Deidara, I’m not leaving I-” Itachi tries, but Deidara takes a step closer, his Chakra coming out in murderous waves.

“You said you’d come back, you fucking promised-” Deidara begins but Itachi cuts him off, voice pleading.

“But I’m back, I’m right here!”

Deidara scoffs. The young man crosses his arms in front of his chest, and levels Itachi with a hateful glare.

“It’s been ten years, Kuro,” Deidara states. His voice is entirely blank, matter-of-fact, and when the words register in Itachi’s brain he feels his stomach drop.

Ten years.

“We all mourned you,” Deidara adds and while Itachi can feel how aggressive his Chakra is, there’s also so much sadness in his voice that Itachi can’t help but take a step forward, a hand coming up to reach out to Deidara. But the young man steps away, glaring at his extended hand as if it would burn him.

“Leave. Now,” Deidara warns and Itachi knows he means it. Still, he can't simply go. He doesn't even know where he's supposed to go if not in Konoha.

“You don’t get it, I had no choice, I didn’t know it had been so long-”

“Don’t try to explain yourself," Deidara cuts in. The blue of his eyes has never looked so cold. "The others know what went down, and I told them to keep quiet. I don’t care about the reasons or the explanation, you don’t get to come back after so many years and expect me to forgive you. Leave.”

There’s not much Itachi can say to that. He can see in the set of his jaw that the kid he used to know isn’t any more. He can feel from his Chakra and from the tone of his voice the barely contained anger that Deidara feels. He is right. Itachi has no right, after breaking his promise and leaving for so long, to simply walk back in Konoha and expect things to be the same. Not the city, neither the people.

Itachi looks into Deidara’s blue eyes, the hopeful gleam he used to see there has disappeared. He can’t bear to look at him.

Itachi takes a breath and turns away. In the blink of an eye, he has jumped out through the window and a few Shunshin later, the cold wind of the night is messing his hair up and freezing his face. Far away from the city centre, only the darkness and silence are his companions. At least, Konoha's cemetery isn't going to crush his heart the way Deidara had just done.

Itachi turns to the Memorial Stone, and if something hasn’t changed much it is the graveyard. There are more tombstones, clearly, but the energy is the same. It’s as calm as ever. Itachi takes a hesitating step towards the monument and runs a hand over the new names that have been engraved there. He doesn’t know a lot of them, but it saddens him all the same.

He keeps reading, until his fingers stop over a name that he hadn’t expected to read here.

'Uchiha Itachi'

His heart feels like lead in his chest once more. If it has been ten years, then the Itachi of this world would be…

The same age as him, he realises. He would be in his early twenties, but Itachi had known all along that this younger version of himself, without the proper care, would die before he reached that age. It’s a weird feeling, to see his own name in a cemetery, even if it doesn’t really belong to him any more.

“Kuro…?”

Itachi turns around, once more wondering how deep in his own head he must have been for two people to sneak up on him without him noticing, but that thought is quickly overpowered by a new one when his eyes land on the person who called out to him. Shisui, even with ten more years under his belt, looks exactly the same. He is still all long limbs and lithe frame, short black curly hair and the eyes that stare at him are filled with the same love and affection as ever.

“Shisui,” Itachi breathes out,

For a second, Itachi thinks Shisui is going to reject him, like Deidara had just done and the mere thought breaks his heart even more than he had thought possible. But then Shisui takes a step forward, then another, and suddenly he is running to Itachi. His shinobi instincts scream at him to move, but Shisui isn’t launching an attack, he jumps right in his arms and the weight of his body sends the both of them tumbling on the grass.

They land with a thud, Itachi’s head hitting the ground a tad too hard but the feeling of Shisui’s arms around him, their body so close together, soothes that pain away. It’s forgotten in favor of the pure pleasure he feels when he breathes in Shisui’s scent, when his hair tickles his cheek and when the man’s arms tighten around him.

“You’re back,” Shisui whispers as he moves away just enough to look at Itachi’s face. His eyes roam all over, as if he couldn’t really believe it.

“Yeah, Deidara told me it’s been ten years, I had no idea-” he starts, tone apologetic but Shisui brings him in another crushing hug and he can’t quite get another word out from how tightly Shisui holds him.

“I don’t care how many years it’s been. You’re back, that’s all that matters,” Shisui says with such strength in his voice that Itachi almost believes him, but the anger he had been met with moments ago is still strong in his mind.

“Doesn’t seem like that’s what everyone thinks,” he says bitterly, unable to keep the sadness out of his voice.

Shisui lets him go and moves away to sit beside him on the grass and when he sighs deeply, Itachi pushes down his fears and sits up as well, daring to look at his best friend’s face. There is no anger there, but the raw pain he sees in Shisui’s eyes is almost worse.

“Deidara… He-,” Shisui starts but stops midway with a shake of his head. “It was very tough, for all of us, we all dealt with our grief the best we could.”

Itachi remains silent, taking the words in. He had caused them a lot of pain, unwillingly, but still enough for Deidara to grow into a bitter adult, none of his childhood happiness left. Itachi can feel Shisui’s stare, but doesn’t quite dare meet his eyes. The anger Deidara feels, Itachi understands, it’s probably the right reaction to have. But Shisui’s sadness, that he struggles to handle.

When Itachi closes his eyes, desperate for his emotions to calm down, he sees a mop of silver hair behind his closed eyelids and he feels his eyes water.

“He’ll come around,” Shisui says, and Itachi’s eyes open to look at his best friend.

Shsui smiles at him in such a tender way that Itachi can’t help wonder if he still deserves to be loved this way.

“I missed you, we all did, and I’m sure everyone will be happy to see you in time,” Shisui says and he sounds certain, as if it was obvious but Itachi can’t help but doubt.

Deidara surely wasn’t happy at all to see him, Shisui, even, is trying his best to keep up appearances, but Itachi knows where to look to find what his bestfriend truly feels.

He is sad. Obviously he is, it doesn't take a genius to figure that out. Itachi can't even begin to think about what it must have been for all of them. He clearly remembers how hard he had taken Shisui's death, back in his own world. Those memories seem very old now, and they all get burried under new, happier ones. Ones in which Itachi is allowed in Konoha again.

Itachi's heart is suddenly very loud in his ears. He only realises then, that his quest is truly over. He is back in Konoha, he has defeated Akatsuki and saved the world. He is done with surviving, he is done with working himself sick for the sake of the greater good. Itachi is done with it all. Now, he can just... Live. 

“Have you gone to see Kakashi yet?”

Shisui's voice is like a cold shower that drags him out of his thoughts. Itachi takes in a sharp breath before he even tries to answer. He isn’t sure he should, he actually thinks he shouldn’t. But Shisui, as he always do, seems to know exactly what Itachi thinks and he gives him a warm smile.

“You should go see him,” he says.

Itachi shakes his head, throat feeling too tight for him to speak.

“Well, if you change your mind, you should find him in the Hokage’s office,” Shisui says with a wink and it brings a tiny smile to Itachi’s lips.

“Yeah, I heard he is the current Hokage,” Itachi says, his pain easing a bit when he imagines the man in the Hokage robes. They probably don’t fit him at all.

“Quite the unexpected turn of events,” Shisui says with a chuckle.

For a few moments, none of them speaks or moves. They sit side by side on the grass of the graveyard, the Memorial Stone right beside them. The wind is still blowing, but not quite as hard and Itachi’s doesn’t even feel cold any more. There’s a comforting warmth radiating from Shisui’s body and where they touch, his body feels hot. His shoulder, his elbow, his thigh, and when Shisui raises a hand to pat his head, his whole face catches fire too.

“I knew I’d be taller than you,” he says and Itachi chokes down a sob. Of all the things Shisui could have said, he always goes with what makes the least sense. Itachi expected rejection, questions, distrust, anything at all now that he knows how long it’s been, and how they had all thought him dead. 

“I’m sorry,” Itachi says again, and the hand on his hand falls to his shoulder.

Tentatively, he looks up to his cousin to find Shisui already staring at him. The small lines around his eyes speak of an exhaustion Itachi knows all too well. The man’s hair looks a bit shorter than before, even if still as wild. Everything about him seems more mature, much more dependable and Itachi suddenly feels very small. He remembers then, that Shisui was always supposed to be older than him, taller and much much stronger. A friend, a confident, and a role model. Itachi had lost that person before they even got to adulthood.

“I’m not mad at you, you’ve done everything you could,” Shisui tells him, and Itachi distantly thinks that adulthood suits his best friend much better than it does him.

“And I promised I'd come back, it’s been a whole decade-” Itachi counters, but before he can finishing crushing his heart to dust all on his own, Shisui’s hand on his shoulder tightens its hold, and the man cuts him off.

“You’re here now.”

Itachi would snort at his cousin’s simple mindedness if the man wasn’t looking so grave. None of his childish glee is left. Shisui is twenty-five now, Itachi suddenly realises, and he looks even older than that. The glint in his eyes is not playful. In his few words, Itachi hears something that soothes some of the ache Deidara’s outburst had left in his heart. He thinks he knows what he needs to do to heal it more.

“I’m going to see Kakashi,” Itachi says before he can second guess himself.

Shisui doesn’t seem surprised by his statement, if anything, he looks in fact pleased. A small smile stretches over his lips, and the familiar way his eyes crinkle makes Itachi’s heart feel full enough to burst.

"Why are you still here then?" He asks with a wink and Itachi does snort this time. He pushes himself up and turns to Shisui before he teleports away. The two men share a look, one that is quiet, and intimate, but it speaks volumes for both of them. Itachi has a lot of questions to answer, but he has all the time in the world to do that. 

That thought doesn't paralyze him with fear the way it used to. Back then, having no purpose felt like a curse worse than death. Now, Itachi can only think of spending as much time as possible with the people he loves.

He gives his oldest and bestest friend a smile, one he knows looks probably more genuine than every single one he's given Shisui before.

In the next second, Itachi has flickered out of the cemetery, and he stands above the Hokage's office. From the roof where he landed, Itachi can see the mountains surrounding Konoha clearly. The five stone faces look grim and dark in the moonlight, and Itachi distantly wonders if Kakashi is finally the one who will put an end to this idiotic tradition. What were they even supposed to do once they carved out all of the mountain with giant faces?

Itachi knows it's because he doesn't want to spend too long thinking about how Kakashi is going to react if he's even wasting time wondering about that.

A deep breath in, and a deep breath out, and Itachi's resolve is strengthened enough for him to dare leave the roof and head for the window. He conceals himself, more out of habit than because he wants to sneak up on Kakashi. Just in case the man is in a meeting, Itachi will remain in the shadows.

Evidently, with how late it's getting, Kakashi is not in a meeting.

When Itachi lands on the window sill and risks a glance inside the room, he sees that the lights are dimmed, and he can barely make out Kakashi's silhouette, seated at the Hokage desk. He looks inhumanly still, but a longer searching stare reveals to Itachi that Kakashi is, in fact, sleeping. He stays there for a few moments, frozen in place as he watches the slow rise and fall of Kakashi's chest.

Without his Sharingan activated, Itachi almost misses the tense set of the man's shoulders, and the bags under his eyes. Still, even in the darkness he notices and his heart aches at the sight. Kakashi is by far the one who looks oldest now. Which shouldn't surprise Itachi, seeing as he should be nearing his thirties. Still, the sight registers and suddenly he doesn't feel so brave any more.

Even asleep, Kakashi's acute senses must realise he is being stared at and he suddenly jolts awake. The man blinks away the sleep a few times, before his gaze finally settles at the window.

Itachi wonders what is worse between simply running away now, and confronting Kakashi after the man has just witnessed him hiding in shadows to watch him sleep like a creep.

He can't make up his mind though, because even in the darkness, even through the glass, Itachi can see clear as day the widening of the man's eyes, and the name his lips shape.

The call of his invented name doesn't reach him through the window, but Itachi hears it echo in his mind all the same. He has a distant thought that for something as important as name, he probably should have come up with something better, all that time ago, when he first introduced himself to Deidara in this time.

This time, is now his world, and he is no longer Itachi here, he suddenly realises. That person, and all the bagage that came with are gone. Here, and now, he is Kuro, and the smile that blooms on his face when it all registers is mirrored by Kakashi. In a rush, he pushes the window open.

He enters the Hokage Office as Kuro, the Konoha Chuunin, and somehow, that thought makes his heart fuller than ever before.

He thinks his heart might burst when it gets impossibly tighter as Kakashi's arms wrap around him.

When their lips finally meet, he forgets about any and every name he could have had.

None of it matters, as long as he has those he loves.